ETABS Composite Floor Frame Design Manual

®
ETABS
Integrated Building Design Software
Composite Floor Frame Design Manual
Computers and Structures, Inc. Version 8

Berkeley, California, USA January 2002
Copyright
The computer program ETABS and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and
Structures, Inc. Unlicensed use of the program or reproduction of the documentation in
any form, without prior written authorization from Computers and Structures, Inc., is
explicitly prohibited.
Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:
Computers and Structures, Inc.

1995 University Avenue
Berkeley, California 94704 USA
Phone: (510) 845-2177

FAX: (510) 845-4096
e-mail: info@csiberkeley.com (for general questions)
e-mail: support@csiberkeley.com (for technical support questions)
web: www.csiberkeley.com
 Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-2002.

The CSI Logo is a trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
ETABS is a trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
DISCLAIMER
CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENTATION OF ETABS. THE PROGRAM HAS
BEEN THOROUGHLY TESTED AND USED. IN USING THE PROGRAM,
HOWEVER, THE USER ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY
IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS
ON THE ACCURACY OR THE RELIABILITY OF THE PROGRAM.
THIS PROGRAM IS A VERY PRACTICAL TOOL FOR THE DESIGN/CHECK OF

STEEL STRUCTURES. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST THOROUGHLY READ THE
MANUAL AND CLEARLY RECOGNIZE THE ASPECTS OF COMPOSITE DESIGN
THAT THE PROGRAM ALGORITHMS DO NOT ADDRESS.
THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

PROGRAM AND MUST INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS.
©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001
COMPOSITE BEAM DESIGN
Contents
General Composite Beam Design Information

1 General Design Information
Design Codes 1-1
Units 1-1
Beams Designed as Composite Beams 1-1
Material Property Requirements for Com-
posite Beams 1-2
Other Requirements for Composite
Beams 1-2
Frame Elements Designed by Default as
Composite Beams 1-3
Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure
for a Composite Beam 1-3
How the Program Optimizes Design Groups 1-5
Using Price to Select Optimum Beam
Sections 1-6
Design Load Combinations 1-8
Analysis Sections and Design Sections 1-8
Output Stations 1-10
2 Composite Beam Design Process

Design Process for a New Building 2-1
Check Process for an Existing Building 2-4
3 Interactive Composite Beam Design

Member Identification 3-1
Section Information 3-2
Acceptable Sections List 3-3
ReDefine 3-4
i
Composite Beam Design Manual
Temporary 3-5
Show Details 3-5
4 Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model

Overview 4-1
Labels Displayed on the Model 4-2
Design Data 4-3
Stress Ratios 4-4
Deflection Ratios 4-5
5 Input Data
General 5-1
Using the Print Composite Beam Design
Tables Form 5-1
Material Properties Input Data 5-2
Section Properties Input Data 5-3
Deck Properties Input Data 5-4
Design Preferences Input Data 5-6
Beam Overwrites Input Data 5-8
6 Output Data
Overview 6-1
Using the Print Composite Beam Design
Tables Form 6-1
Summary of Composite Beam Output 6-2
7 Composite Beam Properties

Beam Properties 7-1
Metal Deck and Slab Properties 7-3
Shear Stud Properties 7-5
Cover Plates 7-5
8 Effective Width of Concrete Slab

Location Where Effective Slab Width is
Checked 8-1
Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the
Beam Length 8-2
Effect of Diagonal Beams on Effective Slab
Width 8-6
ii
Contents
Effect of Openings on Effective Slab

Width 8-8
Effective Slab Width and Transformed
Section Properties 8-9
9 Beam Unbraced Length

Overview 9-1
Determination of the Braced Points of a
Beam 9-2
User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam
Overview 9-3
User-Specified Uniform and Point
Bracing 9-4
Design Check Locations 9-7
10 Design Load Combinations

Overview 10-1
Special Live Load Patterning for
Cantilever Back Spans 10-2
Special Live Load Patterning for
Continuous Spans 10-4
11 Beam Deflection and Camber

Deflection 11-1
Camber 11-4
12 Beam Vibration
Overview 12-1
Vibration Frequency 12-1
Murray's Minimum Damping Requirement 12-4
Initial Displacement Amplitude 12-4
Effective Number of Beams Resisting
Heel Drop Impact 12-6
References 12-7
13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite

Beam
Overview 13-1
Composite Beam Segments 13-1
iii
Physical End of the Beam Top Flange 13-2

Distribution of Shear Studs Within a
Composite Beam Segment 13-5
How the Program Distributes Shear Studs
on a Beam 13-5
Equations Used When the Program
Works from Left to Right 13-8
Equations Used When the Program
Works from Right to Left 13-9
Minimum and Maximum Number of
Shear Studs in a Composite Beam
Segment 13-11
A Note About Multiple Design Load
Combinations 13-11
14 The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a

Composite Beam Segment
General 14-1
Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to
Beam Span 14-2
Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Beam
Span 14-6
Different Deck Type or Orientation on Beam
Sides 14-8
15 User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns

Specifying a User-Defined Shear Connector
Pattern 15-1
Uniformly Spaced Shear Studs Over the
Length of the Beam 15-2
Additional Shear Studs in Specified Sections
of Beam 15-4
Defining Additional Beam Sections 15-4
Example of a User-Defined Shear Stud
Pattern 15-8
How the Program Checks a Beam with User-
Defined Shear Studs 15-9
iv
Contents
Composite Beam Design Specific to AISC-ASD89

16 General and Notation
Introduction to the AISC-ASD89 Series of
Technical Notes 16-1
Notation 16-2
17 Preferences
General 17-1
Using the Preferences Form 17-1
Preferences 17-2
Factors Tab 17-3
Beam Tab 17-3
Deflection Tab 17-4
Vibration Tab 17-5
Price Tab 17-6
18 Overwrites
General 18-1
Using the Composite Beam Overwrites
Form 18-2
Overwrites 18-3
Beam Tab 18-4
Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab 18-6
Deck Tab 18-9
Shear Studs Tab 18-10
Deflection Tab 18-13
Vibration Tab 18-14
Miscellaneous Tab 18-14
EQ Factor 18-15
19 Width-to-Thickness Checks
Overview 19-1
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for
Flanges 19-2
Compact Section Limits for Flanges 19-2
Noncompact Section Limits for
Flanges 19-2
v
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios

for Webs 19-3
Compact Section Limits for Webs 19-3
Noncompact Section Limits for Webs 19-3
Cover Plates 19-4
Compact Section Limits for Cover
Plates 19-5
Noncompact Section Limits for Cover
Plates 19-5
20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia

Background 20-2
Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover
Plate) Alone 20-4
Properties of the Composite Section
General Calculation Method 20-7
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to
Calculate the Distance ye 20-10
Background Equations 20-11
Hand Calculation Process for ye 20-17
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to
Calculate the Composite Properties 20-18
21 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite

Connection
Effective Moment of Inertia for Partial
Composite Connection 21-1
Effective Section Modulus Referred
to the Extreme Tension Fiber 21-2
Location of the ENA for Partial
Steel Section Stresses for Partial
Concrete Slab Stresses for Partial
22 Allowable Bending Stresses

General 22-1
vi
Contents
Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam

Alone 22-2
Allowable Bending Stresses for Positive
Bending in the Composite Beam 22-6
23 Bending Stress Checks

Bending Stress Checks Without
Composite Action 23-1
Positive Moment in a Composite Beam 23-2
Important Notes Regarding Unshored
Composite Beams 23-5
Steel Stress Checks 23-5
Concrete Stress Checks 23-6
24 Beam Shear Checks

Shear Stress Check 24-1
Typical Case 24-1
Slender Web 24-2
Copes 24-3
Shear Rupture Check 24-4
Limitations of Shear Check 24-7
25 Shear Studs
Overview 25-1
Shear Stud Connectors 25-1
Reduction Factor when Metal Deck is
Perpendicular to Beam 25-2
Reduction Factor when Metal Deck is
Parallel to Beam 25-3
Horizontal Shear for Full Composite
Connection 25-4
Number of Shear Studs 25-5
Between the Output Station with
Maximum Moment and the
Point of Zero Moment 25-6
Between Other Output Stations and
Points of Zero Moment 25-6
vii
26 Calculation of the Number of Shear Studs

Basic Equations 26-1
Shear Stud Distribution Example 1 26-4
Detailed Calculations 26-15
27 Input Data
Beam Overwrites Input Data 27-1
28 Output Details
Short Form Output Details 28-1
Composite Beam Design Specific to AISC-LRFD93

29 General and Notation
AISC-LRFD93 Design Methodology 29-1
Notation 29-7
30 Preferences
General 30-1
Using the Preferences Form 30-1
Preferences 30-2
Factors Tab 30-3
Beam Tab 30-4
Deflection Tab 30-5
Vibration Tab 30-5
Price Tab 30-6
31 Overwrites
General 31-1
Using the Composite Beam Overwrites
Form 31-2
Resetting Composite Beam
Overwrites to Default Values 31-3
Overwrites 31-3
Beam Tab 31-4
Brace (C) Tab and Bracing Tab 31-6
viii
Contents
Deck Tab 31-9

Shear Studs Tab 31-10
Deflection Tab 31-12
Vibration Tab 31-13
Miscellaneous Tab 31-14
32 Design Load Combinations

Strength Check for Construction Loads 32-1
Strength Check for Final Loads 32-2
Deflection Check for Final Loads 32-2
Reference 32-3
33 Compact and Noncompact Requirements

Overview 33-1
Flanges 33-2
Compact Section Limits for Flanges 33-2
Noncompact Section Limits for
Flanges 33-2
Webs 33-3
Compact Section Limits for Webs 33-3
Noncompact Section Limits for Webs 33-4
Cover Plates 33-5
Compact Section Limits for Cover
Plates 33-5
Noncompact Section Limits for Cover
Plates 33-6
34 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for

Positive Bending
Overview 34-1
Location of the Plastic Neutral Axis 34-2
PNA in the Concrete Slab Above
the Steel Beam 34-5
PNA within the Beam Top Flange 34-8
PNA within the Beam Top Fillet 34-9
PNA within the Beam Web 34-10
ix
PNA within the Beam Bottom Fillet 34-11

PNA within the Beam Bottom Flange 34-12
PNA within the Cover Plate 34-13
Calculating the PNA Location 34-15
Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive
Bending 34-16
35 Composite Section Elastic Moment

Capacity
Positive Moment Capacity with an Elastic Stress
Distribution 35-1
36 Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone

Overview 36-1
Steel Beam Properties 36-1
Moment Capacity for a Doubly Symmetric Beam
or a Channel Section 36-2
Lateral Unbraced Length Checks 36-3
Yielding Criteria in AISC-LRFD93 Section
F1.1 36-5
Lateral Torsional Buckling Criteria in
AISC-LRFD93 Section F1.2a 36-5
AISC-LFRD Appendix F1(b) Equation
A-F1-3 46-5
Moment Capacity for a Singly Symmetric
Beam with a Compact Web 36-7
AISC-LFRD93 Equation A-F1-1 for
WLB 36-8
AISC-FLRD93 Equation A-F1-1 for
FLB 36-8
FLB 36-9
LTB 36-9
LTB 36-10
Moment Capacity for a Singly Symmetric
Beam with a Noncompact Web 36-11
x
Contents
AISC-LFRD93 Equation A-F1-3 for

WLB 36-12
37 Partial Composite Connection with a Plas-

tic Stress Distribution
Estimating the Required Percent Composite
Connection 37-1
Calculating MPFconc 37-2
Location of PNA 37-3
Determining the Effective Portion of
the Concrete Slab 37-4
Moment Capacity of a Partially Composite
Beam with a Plastic Stress
Distribution 37-6
38 Bending and Deflection Checks

Bending Check Locations 38-1
Bending Check 38-1
Deflection Check 38-2
39 Shear Connectors
Shear Stud Connectors 39-1
Horizontal Shear for Full Composite
Connection 39-1
Number of Shear Connectors 39-2
Between Maximum Moment and
Point of Zero Moment 39-2
Between Point Load and Point of
Zero Moment 39-3
40 Beam Shear Capacity

Shear Capacity 40-1
Checking the Beam Shear 40-2
Limitations of Beam Shear Check 40-2
41 Input Data
Beam Overwrites Input 41-1
xi
42 Output Details
Short Form Output Details 42-1
Long Form Output Details 42-8
xii
Technical Note 1
General Design Information
This Technical Note presents some basic information and concepts that are
useful when performing composite beam design using this program.
Design Codes
The design code is set using the Options menu > Preferences > Compos-
ite Beam Design command. You can choose to design for any one design
code in any one design run. You cannot design some beams for one code and
others for a different code in the same design run. You can however perform
different design runs using different design codes without rerunning the
analysis.
Units
For composite beam design in this program, any set of consistent units can be
used for input. Typically, design codes are based on one specific set of units.
The documentation in the Composite Beam Design series of Technical Notes is
presented in kip-inch-seconds units unless otherwise noted.
Again, any system of units can be used to define and design a building in the
program. You can change the system of units at any time using the pull-down
menu on the Status Bar or pull-down menu on individual forms where avail-
able.
Note:
You can use any set of units in composite beam design and you can change the units "on
the fly."
Beams Designed as Composite Beams

Section Requirements for Composite Beams
Only I-shaped and channel-shaped beams can be designed as composite
beams. The I-shaped and channel-shaped beams can be selected from the
Design Codes Technical Note 1 - 1

General Design Information Composite Beam Design
built-in program section database, or they can be user defined. The user-
defined sections can be specified using the Define menu > Frame Sections
command and clicking either the Add I/Wide Flange or the Add Channel op-
tion.
Note that beam sections that are defined in Section Designer are always
treated as general sections. Thus, if you define an I-type or channel-type
section in Section Designer, the program will consider it as a general section,
not an I-shaped or channel-shaped section, and will not allow it to be de-
signed as a composite beam.
Note:
Beam sections defined in the section designer utility cannot be designed as composite
beams.
Material Property Requirement for Composite Beams

If a beam is to be designed as a composite beam, the Type of Design associ-
ated with the Material Property Data assigned to the beam must be Steel. Use
the Define menu > Material Properties > Modify/Show Materials com-
mand to check your beams.
Other Requirements for Composite Beams

The line type associated with the line object that represents a composite
beam must be "Beam." In other words, the beam element must lie in a hori-
zontal plane. Right click on a line object to bring up the Line Information form
to check the Line Type.
For composite beams, the beam local 2-axis must be vertical. The Local axis 2
Angle is displayed on the Assignments tab of the Line Information form.
Note:
The line object representing a composite beam should span from support to support.
Composite beams should not be modeled using multiple, adjacent line objects between
supports for a single composite beam.
The line object representing a composite beam should span from support to
support. In the case of a cantilever beam overhang, the line object should
span from the overhang support to the end of the beam. The cantilever beam
back span should be modeled using a separate line object. If you do not
model cantilever beams in this way, the analysis results for moments and
Technical Note 1 - 2 Beams Designed as Composite Beams

Composite Beam Design General Design Information
shears will still be correct but the design performed by the Composite Beam
Design processor probably will not be correct.
Frame Elements Designed by Default as Composite Beams

The program will design certain frame elements using the design procedures
documented in these Technical Notes by default. Those elements must meet
the following restrictions:
The beam must meet the section requirements described in the subsection
entitled "Section Requirements for Composite Beams" in this Technical
Note.
The beam must meet the material property requirement described in the
subsection entitled "Material Property Requirement for Composite Beams"
in this Technical Note.
The beam must meet the two other requirements described in the subsec-
tion entitled "Other Requirements for Composite Beams" in this Technical
Note.
At least one side of the beam must support deck that is specified as a
Deck section (not a Slab or Wall section). The deck section can be filled,
unfilled or a solid slab. When the deck is unfilled, the beam will still go
through the Composite Beam Design postprocessor and will simply be de-
signed as a noncomposite beam.
The beam must not frame continuously into a column or a brace. Both
ends of the beam must be pinned for major axis bending (bending about
the local 3-axis).
Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Composite Beam

The three procedures possible for steel beam design are:
Composite beam design
Steel frame design
No design
By default, steel sections are designed using either the composite beam de-
sign procedure or the steel frame design procedure. All steel sections that
Beams Designed as Composite Beams Technical Note 1 - 3

meet the requirements described in the previous subsection entitled "Frame

Elements Designed by Default as Composite Beams" are by default designed
using the composite beam design procedures. All other steel frame elements
are by default designed using the steel frame design procedures.
Change the default design procedure used for a beam(s) by selecting the
beam(s) and clicking Design menu > Overwrite Frame Design Proce-
dure. This change is only successful if the design procedure assigned to an
element is valid for that element. For example, if you select two steel beams,
one an I-section and the other a tube section, and attempt to change the de-
sign procedure to Composite Beam Design, the change will be executed for
the I-section, but not for the tube section because it is not a valid section for
the composite beam design procedure. A section is valid for the composite
beam design procedure if it meets the requirements specified in the subsec-
tions entitled "Section Requirements for Composite Beams," "Material Prop-
erty Requirement for Composite Beams" and "Other Requirements for Com-
posite Beams" earlier in this Technical Note.
Note that the procedures documented for composite beam design allow for
designing a beam noncompositely. One of the overwrites available for com-
posite beam design is to specify that selected beams are either designed as
composite, noncomposite but still with a minimum number of shear studs
specified, or noncomposite with no shear studs. These overwrites do not af-
fect the design procedure. Changing the overwrite to one of the noncomposite
designs does not change the design procedure from Composite Beam Design
to Steel Frame Design. The noncomposite design in this case is still performed
from within the Composite Beam Design postprocessor.
Using the composite beam design procedure, out-of-plane bending is not con-
sidered and slender sections are not designed. This is different from the Steel
Frame Design postprocessor. Thus, the design results obtained for certain
beams may be different, depending on the design procedure used.
Finally, note that you can specify that the composite beam design procedures
are to be used for a beam even if that beam does not support any deck, or for
that matter, even if no slab is specified. In these cases, the beam will be de-
signed as a noncomposite beam by the Composite Beam Design postproces-
sor.
Technical Note 1 - 4 Beams Designed as Composite Beams

How the Program Optimizes Design Groups

This section describes the process the program uses to select the optimum
section for a design group. In this description, note the distinction between
the term section, which refers to a beam section in an auto select section
list, and the term beam, which refers to a specific element in the design
group.
When considering design groups, the program first discards any beam in the
design group that is not assigned an auto select section list.
Next, the program looks at the auto select section list assigned to each beam
in the design group and creates a new list that contains the sections that are
common to all of the auto select section lists in the design group. The pro-
gram sorts this new common section list in ascending order, from smallest
section to largest section based on section weight (area).
Note:
When designing with design groups, the program attempts to quickly eliminate inade-
quate beams.
The program then finds the beam with the largest positive design moment in
the design group, or the "pseudo-critical beam." The program then checks the
design of the pseudo-critical beam for all sections in the common section list.
Any sections in the common section list that are not adequate for the pseudo-
critical beam are discarded from the common section list, making the list
shorter. This new list is the shorter common section list. The shorter common
section list is still in ascending order based on section weight (area).
Now the program checks all beams in the design group for the first section
(smallest by weight [area]) in the shorter common section list. If the optimi-
zation is being performed on the basis of beam weight and the section is ade-
quate for all beams in the design group, the optimum section has been iden-
tified. If the section is not adequate for a beam, the next higher section in the
shorter common section list is tried until a section is found that is adequate
for all beams in the design group.
If the optimization is based on price instead of weight, the program finds the
first section in the shorter common section list (i.e., the one with the lowest
weight) that is adequate for all beams. Next it calculates the cost of this first
How the Program Optimizes Design Groups Technical Note 1 - 5

adequate section and then determines the theoretical heaviest section that
could still have a cost equal to the adequate section by dividing the total price
of the beam with the adequate section (steel plus camber plus shear connec-
tors) by the unit price of the steel. This assumes that when the cost of the
steel section alone is equal to or greater than the total cost of the adequate
section, the section could not have a total cost less than the adequate sec-
tion. The program then checks any other sections in the shorter common sec-
tion list that have a weight less than or equal to the calculated maximum
weight. If any of the other sections are also adequate, a cost is calculated for
them. Finally, the section with the lowest associated cost is selected as the
optimum section for the design group.
Regardless of whether the optimization is based on weight or cost, if all sec-

tions in the shorter common section list are tried and none of them are ade-
quate for all of the beams in the design group, the program proceeds to de-
sign each beam in the design group individually based on its own auto section
list and ignores the rest of the design group. If for a particular beam none of
the sections in the auto select section list are adequate, the program displays
results for the section in the auto select list with the smallest controlling ratio
in a red font. Note that the controlling ratio may be based on stress or deflec-
tion.
Note:
By default, the program selects the optimum composite beam size based on weight, not
price.
Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections

By default, when auto select section lists are assigned to beams, the program
compares alternate acceptable composite beam designs based on the weight
of the steel beam (not including the cover plate, if it exists) to determine the
optimum section. The beam with the least weight is considered the optimum
section. The choice of optimum section does not consider the number of shear
connectors required or if beam camber is required.
Technical Note 1 - 6 Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections

Important Note about Optimizing Beams by Weight and Price
When a beam is optimized by weight, the program internally optimizes the

beam based on area of steel (excluding the cover plate, if it exists). Thus,
the weight density specified for the steel is irrelevant in such a case.
When a beam is optimized by price, the program determines the price as-
sociated with the steel by multiplying the volume of the beam (including
the cover plate, if it exists) by the weight density of the beam by the price
per unit weight specified in the material properties for the steel. The price
associated with camber is determined by multiplying the volume of the
beam (including the cover plate, if it exists) by the weight density of the
beam by the specified price per unit weight for camber defined in the com-
posite beam preferences. The price for shear connectors is determined by
multiplying the total number of shear connectors by the price per connec-
tor specified in the composite beam preferences. The total price for the
beam is determined by summing the prices for the steel, camber and
shear connectors. Thus, when a beam is optimized by price, the weight
density for the steel is important and must be correctly specified for the
price to be correctly calculated.
Note that the volume of the beam is calculated by multiplying the area of
the steel beam (plus the area of the cover plate, if used) by the length of
the beam from center-of-support to center-of-support
You can request that the program use price to determine the optimum section
by clicking the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam Design
command, selecting the Price tab and setting the "Optimize for Price" item to
Yes. If you request a price analysis, the program compares alternate accept-
able beam designs based on their price and selects the one with the least cost
as the optimum section.
For the cost comparison, specify costs for steel, shear studs and beam cam-
ber. The steel cost is specified as a part of the steel material property using
the Define menu > Material Properties command. The shear stud and
beam camber costs are specified in the composite beam preferences.
The costs for steel and cambering are specified on a unit weight of the beam
basis; for example, a cost per pound of the beam. The shear connector cost is
specified on a cost per connector. By assigning different prices for steel, shear
Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections Technical Note 1 - 7

connectors and camber, you can influence the choice of optimum section. The
cost of the cover plate is not included in the comparison (but it would be the
same for all beam sections if it were included).
See the previous "Important Note about Optimizing Beams by Weight and
Price" for additional information.
Design Load Combinations

Using the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, three separate types of
load combinations are considered. They are:
Construction load strength design load combinations
Final condition strength design load combinations
Final condition deflection design load combinations
You can specify as many load combinations as you want for each of these
types. In addition, the program creates special live load patterns for cantile-
ver beams. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 20 Design Load Com-
binations for additional information on design load combinations for the Com-
posite Beam Design postprocessor.
Analysis Sections and Design Sections

Analysis sections are those section properties used to analyze the model
when you click the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command. The design
section is whatever section has most currently been designed and thus desig-
nated the current design section.
Tip:
It is important to understand the difference between analysis sections and design sec-
tions.
It is possible for the last used analysis section and the current design section
to be different. For example, you may have run your analysis using a W18X35
beam and then found in the design that a W16X31 beam worked. In that
case, the last used analysis section is the W18X35 and the current design
section is the W16X31. Before you complete the design process, verify that
the last used analysis section and the current design section are the same.
Technical Note 1 - 8 Design Load Combinations

The Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify Analysis vs De-
sign Section command is useful for this task.
The program keeps track of the analysis section and the design section
separately. Note the following about analysis and design sections:
Assigning a beam a frame section property using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Section command assigns the section as both the
analysis section and the design section.
Running an analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command
(or its associated toolbar button) always sets the analysis section to be
the same as the current design section.
Assigning an auto select list to a frame section using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Section command initially sets the design section
to be the beam with the median weight in the auto select list.
Unlocking a model deletes the design results, but it does not delete or
change the design section.
Using the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Select Design
Combo command to change a design load combination deletes the design
results, but it does not delete or change the design section.
Using the Define menu > Load Combinations command to change a

design load combination deletes the design results, but it does not delete
or change the design section.
Using the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam Design
command to change any of the composite beam design preferences de-
letes the design results, but it does not delete or change the design sec-
tion.
Deleting the static nonlinear analysis results also deletes the design re-
sults for any load combination that includes static nonlinear forces. Typi-
cally, static nonlinear analysis and design results are deleted when one of
the following actions is taken:
9 Use the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties com-
mand to redefine existing or define new hinges.
Analysis Sections and Design Sections Technical Note 1 - 9

9 Use the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases com-

mand to redefine existing or define new static nonlinear load cases.
9 Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Nonlinear Hinges
command to add or delete hinges.
Again, note that these actions delete only results for load combinations that
include static nonlinear forces.
Output Stations
Frame output stations are designated locations along a frame element. They
are used as locations to report output forces and to perform design, and as
plotting points used for graphic display of force diagrams. When force dia-
grams are plotted, exact forces are plotted at each output station and then
those points are connected by straight lines. Output stations occur at user-
specified locations and at point load locations along a beam. Designate the
output stations for a frame element using the Assign menu.
Note:
Access the display of frame element output stations using the View menu.
For composite beam design, the program checks the moments, shears and
deflections at each output station along the beam. No checks are made at any
points along the beam that are not output stations.
Technical Note 1 - 10 Output Stations

Technical Note 2
Composite Beam Design Process
This Technical Notes describes a basic composite beam design process using
this program. Although the exact steps you follow may vary, the basic design
process should be similar to that described herein. Separate processes are
described for design of a new building and check of an existing building. Other
Technical Notes in the Composite Beam Design General series provide addi-
tional information.
Design Process for a New Building

The following sequence describes a typical composite beam design process for
a new building. Note that although the sequence of steps you follow may
vary, the basic process probably will be essentially the same.
1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam Design
command to choose the composite beam design code and to review other
composite beam design preferences and revise them if necessary. Note
that default values are provided for all composite beam design prefer-
ences, so it is unnecessary to define any preferences unless you want to
change some of the default values. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 17 Preferences and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 30 Preferences for more information about prefer-
ences.
2. Create the building model, as described in Volumes 1 and 2.
3. Run the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis
command.
4. Assign composite beam overwrites, if needed, using the Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Note
that you must select beams before using this command. Also note that
default values are provided for all composite beam design overwrites so it
is unnecessary to define overwrites unless you want to change some of
Design Process for a New Building Technical Note 2 - 1

Composite Beam Design Process Composite Beam Design
the default values. Note that the overwrites can be assigned before or af-
ter the analysis is run. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Techni-
cal Note 18 Overwrites and See AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 31 Overwrites.
5. Designate design groups, if desired, using the Design menu > Compos-
ite Beam Design > Select Design Group command. Note that you
must have already created some groups by selecting objects and clicking
the Assign menu > Group Names command.
6. To use design load combinations other than the defaults created by the
program for composite beam design, click the Design menu > Compos-
ite Beam Design > Select Design Combo command. Note that you
must have already created your own design combos by clicking the De-
fine menu > Load Combinations command.
Note that for composite beam design, you specify separate design load
combinations for construction loading, final loading considering strength,
and final loading considering deflection. Design load combinations for each
of these three conditions are specified using the Design menu > Com-
posite Beam Design > Select Design Combo command. See Compos-
ite Beam Design Technical Note 10 Design Load Combinations.
7. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Start De-
sign/Check of Structure command to run the composite beam design.
8. Review the composite beam design results by doing one of the following:
a. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Display De-
sign Info command to display design input and output information on
the model. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 4 Data Plotted
Directly on the Model.
b. Right click on a beam while the design results are displayed on it to

enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the beam.
Note that while you are in this mode, you can also view diagrams
(load, moment, shear and deflection) and view design details on the
screen. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 3 Interactive
Composite Beam Design for more information.
Technical Note 2 - 2 Design Process for a New Building

Composite Beam Design Composite Beam Design Process
If design results are not currently displayed (and the design has been
run), click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Inter-
active Composite Beam Design command and then right click a
beam to enter the interactive design mode for that beam.
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design
command to print composite beam design data. If you select beams
before using this command, data is printed only for the selected
beams. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 27
Input Data, AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 41
Input Data, AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28
Output Details, and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 42 Output Details for more information.
d. Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify all
Members Passed command to verify that no members are over-
stressed or otherwise unacceptable.
9. Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Change Design
Section command to change the beam design section properties for se-
lected beams.
sign/Check of Structure command to rerun the composite beam design
with the new section properties. Review the results using the procedures
described in Step 8.
11. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis
command. Note that the beam section properties used for the analysis are
the last specified design section properties.
with the new analysis results and new section properties. Review the re-
sults using the procedures described in Step 8.
13. Again use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Change
Design Section command to change the beam design section properties
for selected beams, if necessary.
Design Process for a New Building Technical Note 2 - 3

14. Repeat Steps 11, 12 and 13 as many times as necessary.
Note:
Composite beam design in the program is an iterative process. Typically, the analysis
and design will be rerun multiple times to complete a design.
15. Select all beams and click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design
> Make Auto Select Section Null command. This removes any auto se-
lect section list assignments from the selected beams.
16. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis
command. Note that the beam section properties used for the analysis are
the last specified design section properties.
with the new section properties. Review the results using the procedures
described above.
18. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify Analysis
vs Design Section command to verify that all of the final design sections
are the same as the last used analysis sections.
19. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design com-
mand to print selected composite beam design results if desired. See
AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28 Output Details
and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output De-
tails
It is important to note that design is an iterative process. The sections used in

the original analysis are not typically the same as those obtained at the end
of the design process. Always run the building analysis using the final beam
section sizes and then run a design check using the forces obtained from that
analysis. Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify
Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that the design sections are
the same as the analysis sections.
Check Process for an Existing Building

The following sequence is a typical composite beam check process for an ex-
isting building. In general, the check process is easier than the design process
Technical Note 2 - 4 Check Process for an Existing Building

Composite Beam Design Composite Beam Design Process
for a new building because iteration is not required. Note that although the
sequence of steps you follow may vary, the basic process probably will be es-
sentially the same.
Tip:
You can define your own shear stud patterns on the Shear Studs tab in the composite
beam overwrites. This allows you to model existing structures with composite floor fram-
ing.
1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam Design
command to choose the composite beam design code and to review other
composite beam design preferences and revise them if necessary. Note
that default values are provided for all composite beam design prefer-
ences so it is unnecessary to define preferences unless you want to
change some of the default preference values. See AISC-ASD89 Compos-
ite Beam Design Technical Note 17 Preferences and AISC-LRFD93 Com-
posite Beam Design Technical Note 30 Preferences for more information
about preferences.
2. Create the building model, as explained in Volumes 1 and 2.
3. Run the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis
command.
4. Assign composite beam overwrites, including the user-defined shear stud

patterns, using the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
View/Revise Overwrites command. Note that you must select beams
first before using this command. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 18 Overwrites and See AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 31 Overwrites.
sign/Check of Structure command to run the composite beam design.
6. Review the composite beam design results by doing do one of the follow-
ing:
a. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Display De-
sign Info command to display design input and output information on
the model. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 4 Data Plotted
Directly on the Model.
Check Process for an Existing Building Technical Note 2 - 5

b. Right click on a beam while the design results are displayed on it to

enter the interactive design and review mode and review the beam de-
sign. Note that while you are in this mode you can also view diagrams
(load, moment, shear and deflection) and view design details on the
screen. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 3 Interactive
Composite Beam Design for more information.
If design results are not currently displayed (and the design has been
run), click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Inter-
active Composite Beam Design command and then right click a
beam to enter the interactive design mode for that beam.
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design
command to print composite beam design data. If you select beams
before using this command, data is printed only for the selected
beams.
d. Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify all
Members Passed command to verify that no members are over-
stressed or otherwise unacceptable. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 27 Input Data, AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 41 Input Data, AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 28 Output Details, and AISC-LRFD93 Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output Details for more information.
Technical Note 2 - 6 Check Process for an Existing Building

Technical Note 3
Interactive Composite Beam Design
Interactive composite beam design is a powerful feature that allows the user
to review the design results for any composite beam and interactively revise
the design assumptions and immediately review the revised results.
Note that a design must have been run for the interactive design mode to be
available.
To enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the beam, right
click on a beam while the design results are displayed in the active window. If
design results are not displayed (and the design has been run), click the De-
sign menu > Composite Beam Design > Interactive Composite Beam
Design command and then right click a beam.
The following sections describe the features that are included in the Interac-
tive Composite Beam Design and Review form.
Member Identification
Story ID
This is the story level ID associated with the composite beam.
Beam Label
This is the label associated with the composite beam.
Design Group
This list box displays the name of the design group that the beam is assigned
to if that design group was considered in the design of the beam. If the beam
is part of a design group but the design group was not considered in the de-
sign, N/A is displayed. If the beam is not assigned to any design group,
"NONE" is displayed.
If a beam is redesigned as a result of a change made in the Interactive Com-

posite Beam Design and Review form, the design group is ignored and only
the single beam is considered. Thus, as soon as you design a beam in the
Member Identification Technical Note 3 - 1

Interactive Composite Beam Design Composite Beam Design
Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review form, the Design Group box
either displays N/A or None.
You cannot directly edit the contents of this list box.
Section Information
Auto Select List
This drop-down box displays the name of the auto select section list assigned
to the beam. If no auto select list has been assigned to the beam, NONE is
displayed. You can change this item to another auto select list or to NONE
while in the form and the design results will be updated immediately. If you
change this item to NONE, the design is performed for the Current De-
sign/Next Analysis section property.
Optimal
If an auto select section list is assigned to the beam, this list box displays the
optimal section as determined by beam weight or price, depending on what
has been specified in the composite beam preferences. If no auto select list is
assigned to the beam, N/A is displayed for this item.
Last Analysis
This list box displays the name of the section that was used for this beam in
the last analysis. Thus, the beam forces are based on a beam of this section
property. For the final design iteration, the Current Design/Next Analysis sec-
tion property and the Last Analysis section property should be the same.
Current Design/Next Analysis

This list box displays the name of the current design section property. If the
beam is assigned an auto select list, the section displayed in this form initially
defaults to the optimal section.
Tip:
The section property displayed for the Current Design/Next Analysis item is used by the
program as the section property for the next analysis run.
Technical Note 3 - 2 Section Information

Composite Beam Design Interactive Composite Beam Design
If no auto select list has been assigned to the beam, the beam design is per-
formed for the section property specified in this edit box.
It is important to note that subsequent analyses use the section property

specified in this list box for the next analysis section for the beam. Thus, the
forces and moments obtained in the next analysis are based on this beam
size.
The Current Design/Next Analysis section property can be changed by clicking

the Sections button that is described later in this Technical Note.
Important note: Changes made to the Current Design/Next Analysis section

property are permanently saved (until you revise them again) if you click the
OK button to exit the Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review form. If
you exit the form by clicking the Cancel button, these changes are consid-
ered temporary and are not permanently saved.
Acceptable Sections List

The Acceptable Sections List includes the following information for each beam
section that is acceptable for all considered design load combinations.
Section name
Steel yield stress, Fy
Connector layout
Camber
Ratio
Tip:
A single beam displayed in a red font in the Acceptable Sections List means that none of
the sections considered were acceptable.
Typically, the ratio displayed is the largest ratio obtained considering the
stress ratios for positive moment, negative moment and shear for both con-
struction loads and final loads, as well as the stud ratio(s), deflection ratios,
and if they are specified to be considered when determining if a beam section
is acceptable, the vibration ratios.
Acceptable Sections List Technical Note 3 - 3

If the beam is assigned an auto select list, many beam sections may be listed
in the Acceptable Sections List. If necessary, use the scroll bar to scroll
through the acceptable sections. The optimal section is initially highlighted in
the list.
If the beam is not assigned an auto select list, only one beam section will be
listed in the Acceptable Sections List. It is the same section as specified in the
Current Design/Next Analysis edit box.
At least one beam will always be shown in the Acceptable Sections List, even
if none of the beams considered are acceptable. When no beams are accept-
able, the program displays the section with the smallest maximum ratio in a
red font. Thus, a single beam displayed in a red font in the Acceptable Sec-
tions List means that none of the sections considered were acceptable.
ReDefine
Sections Button
Use the Sections button to change the Current Design/Next Analysis section
property. This button can designate a new section property whether the sec-
tion property is or is not displayed in the Acceptable Sections List.
When you click on the Sections button, the Select Sections form appears.
Assign any frame section property to the beam by clicking on the desired
property and clicking OK. Note that if an auto select list is assigned to the
beam, using the Sections button sets the auto select list assignment to
NONE.
Overwrites Button
Click the overwrites button to access and make revisions to the composite
beam overwrites and then immediately see the new design results. Modifying
some overwrites in this mode and exiting both the Composite Beam Over-
writes form and the Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review form by
clicking their respective OK buttons permanently saves changes made to the
overwrites.
Exiting the Composite Beam Overwrites form by clicking the OK button tem-
porarily saves changes. Subsequently exiting the Interactive Composite Beam
Design and Review form by clicking the Cancel button cancels the changes
made. Permanent saving of the overwrites does not occur until the OK but-
Technical Note 3 - 4 ReDefine

tons in both the Composite Beam Overwrites form and the Interactive Com-
posite Beam Design and Review form have been clicked.
Temporary
Combos Button
Click this button to access and make temporary revisions to the design load
combinations considered for the beam. This is useful for reviewing the results
for one particular load combination, for example. You can temporarily change
the considered design load combinations to be just the one you are interested
in and review the results.
The changes made to the considered design load combinations using the
combos button are temporary. They are not saved when you exit the Interac-
tive Composite Beam Design and Review form, whether you click OK or Can-
cel to exit it.
Show Details
Diagrams Button
Clicking the Diagrams button displays a form with the following four types of
diagrams for the beam.
Applied loads
Shear
Moment
Deflection
The diagrams are plotted for specific design load combinations specified in the
form by the user.
Details Button
Clicking the Details button displays design details for the beam. The infor-
mation displayed is similar to the short form output that can be printed using
the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command. The
Technical Notes describe short form output.
Temporary Technical Note 3 - 5

Note:
Stud Details Information is available using the Details button, but is not included in the
short form output printed using File Menu > Print Tables> Composite Beam Design.
Stud details information is one item included in the interactive design details
that is not included in the short form output details (and thus not described in
AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28 Output Details or
AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output Details). This
information is provided in a table with six columns on the Stud Details tab.
The definitions of the column headings in this table are given in the following
bullet items.
Location: This is either Max Moment or Point Load. If it is Max Moment,

the information on the associated row applies to the maximum moment
location for the specified design load combination. If it is Point Load, the
information on the associated row applies to the point load location for the
specified design load combination.
Distance: The distance of the Max Moment or Point Load location meas-
ured from the center of the support at the left end (I-end) of the beam.
Combo: The final strength design load combination considered for the as-
sociated row of the table.
L1 left: The dimension L1 left associated with the specified location. See
"How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam" in Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Beam for
more information.
Recall that L1 left is the distance from an output station to an adjacent point
of zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange, or physical end of
the concrete slab, measured toward the left end (I-end) of the beam.
L1 right: The dimension L1 right associated with the specified location. See
"How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam" in Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Beam for
more information.
Recall that L1 right is the distance from an output station to an adjacent

point of zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange, or physical
Technical Note 3 - 6 Show Details

end of the concrete slab, measured toward the right end (J-end) of the
beam
Studs: The number of shear studs required between the specified location
and adjacent points of zero moment, the end of the concrete slab, or the
end of the beam top flange.
The Stud Details table reports information at each maximum moment location
and each point load location (if any) for each final strength design load com-
bination.
The Stud Detail information allows you to report your shear studs in compos-
ite beam segments that are different from the default composite beam seg-
ments used by the program. See "Composite Beam Segments" in Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Beam for a
definition of composite beam segments. It is very important that you un-
derstand how the program defines composite beam segments, be-
cause in the composite beam output, the program reports the re-
quired number of shear studs in each composite beam segment. See
"How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam" in Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Beam for discus-
sion of how the program distributes shear studs along a beam.
Show Details Technical Note 3 - 7

Technical Note 4
Data Plotted Directly on the Model
This Technical Note describes the input and output data that can be plotted
directly on the model.
Overview
Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Display Design Info
command to display on-screen output plotted directly on the model. If de-
sired, the screen graphics can then be printed using the File menu > Print
Graphics command.
The on-screen display data is organized into four data groups, as follows.
Labels
Design Data
Stress Ratios
Deflection Ratios
Each of these data groups is described in more detail later in this Technical
Note. It is important to note that items from different data groups cannot be
displayed simultaneously.
Tip:
The colors related to the beam ratios can be modified by clicking the Options menu >
Colors > Output command.
When design information is displayed directly on the model, the frame ele-
ments are displayed in a color that indicates the value of their controlling ra-
tio. (Note that this controlling ratio may be a stress ratio or a deflection ra-
tio.) The colors associated with various ranges of ratios are specified in the
Steel Ratios area of the Assign Output Colors form, which is accessed using
the Options menu > Colors > Output command.
Overview Technical Note 4 - 1

Data Plotted Directly on the Model Composite Beam Design
Labels Displayed on the Model

Beam labels and associated beam design group labels can be displayed on the
model. A beam label is the label that is assigned to the line object that repre-
sents the composite beam.
Tip:
Long labels may not display or print properly (fully).
If a beam has been assigned to a group that has been designated as a com-
posite beam design group, the group name for the beam will be displayed
when requested. If a beam is not part of a composite beam design group, no
group name will be displayed for that beam. Note that you can assign beam
design groups by clicking the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
Select Design Group command.
As shown in Figure 1, beam labels (B7, B8, etc.) are plotted above or to the
left of the beam, and beam design groups (Group01, Group07, etc.) are dis-
played below or to the right of the beam.
B7
p08
Grou 3
Group07
B2
B24
B8
Group01
B9
Group01
Floor Plan
Figure 1: Example of Beam and Design Group Labels
Technical Note 4 - 2 Labels Displayed on the Model

Composite Beam Design Data Plotted Directly on the Model
Tip:
The design data and ratios output that is plotted directly on the model is also available in
text form in the short and long form printed output, which are described in AISC-ASD89
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28 Output Details and AISC-LRFD93 Compos-
ite Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output Details.
Design Data
The following design data can be displayed on the model:
Beam section (e.g., W18X35)
Beam yield stress, Fy
Shear stud layout
Beam camber
Beam end reactions
One or more of these items can be displayed at the same time. Figure 2
shows an example where all five of these items are displayed. The beam sec-
tion size (e.g., W18X35) is apparent and needs no further explanation.
The beam yield stress is displayed just after the beam section size.
The shear stud layout pattern is displayed in parenthesis just after the beam
yield stress. The number of equally spaced shear studs is reported for each
composite beam segment. See “Composite Beam Segments” in Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite
Beam for more information on composite beam segments.
Important note: It is very important that you fully understand the concept
of composite beam segments. This is necessary to properly interpret the out-
put results for shear studs.
The beam camber is displayed below or to the right of the beam. All other
data is displayed above or to the left of the beam.
The end reactions are displayed at each end of the beam. They are displayed
below or to the right of the beam. The end reactions displayed are the maxi-
mum end reactions obtained from all design load combinations. Note that the
Design Data Technical Note 4 - 3

Yield stress
W16X26 Fy=36.00 (14)

16.2 16.2 Right reaction
23.7
18.4
,16)
W24X55 Fy=50 (16,16)

Shear stud layout in
0 (16
parenthesis
C=0.75
Fy=5
00
W18X35 Fy=36 (22)

Camber
C=1.
20.7 20.7
X55
Beam section
W24
23.7
18.4
Left reaction
W18X35 Fy=36 (48)
25.2 C=1.25 25.2
Floor Plan
Figure 2: Example of Design Data that Can be Displayed on the Model
left end reaction and the right end reaction displayed may be from two differ-
ent design load combinations.
Note that cover plate information is not displayed on the model. This infor-
mation is available in the printed output (short form or long form; see AISC-
ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28 Output Details and AISC-LRFD93
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output Details) and in the overwrites.
Tip:
The length of the composite beam segments associated with the shear stud layout is
documented in the short and long form printed output, which are described in AISC-
ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 28 Output Details and AISC-LRFD93
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 42 Output Details.
Stress Ratios
The following design data can be displayed on the model:
Construction load bending and shear ratios
Final load bending and shear ratios
Technical Note 4 - 4 Stress Ratios

Composite Beam Design Data Plotted Directly on the Model
You can display the construction load ratios, the final load ratios, or both.
Bending ratios are always displayed above or to the left of the beam. Shear
ratios are always displayed below or to the right of the beam.
When both construction and final stress ratios are displayed, the construction
load ratios are displayed first, followed by the final load ratios. See Figure 3
for an example.
0.678, 0.961
0.121, 0.245
Construction Final load

0.13 0.968
0.561, 0.983
0.213, 0.293
224
0.882, 0.978 load bending bending ratio

5, 0.
7,
0.134, 0.222 ratio

0.46
0.678, 0.961
0.121, 0.245
Construction Final load
0.765, 0.994 load shear shear ratio
0.179, 0.311 ratio
Floor Plan Legend
Figure 3: Example of Stress Ratios That Are Displayed on the Model
Deflection Ratios
When the Deflection Ratios option is chosen, the program plots one or both of
the following two ratios.
The maximum live load deflection ratio (live load deflection divided by al-
lowable live load deflection) for deflection loads.
The maximum total load deflection ratio (total load deflection divided by
allowable total load deflection) for deflection loads.
When both ratios are plotted, the live load deflection ratio is plotted first, fol-
lowed by the total load deflection ratio, as shown in Figure 4.
Deflection Ratios Technical Note 4 - 5

0.521, 0.426
326
0.392, 0.372
9, 0.
0.612, 0.433
0.41
Live load Total load

deflection ratio deflection ratio
0.445, 0.409
0.521, 0.426
Floor Plan Legend
Figure 4: Example of Deflection Ratios That Are

Displayed on the Model
Technical Note 4 - 6 Deflection Ratios

Technical Note 5
Input Data
General
This Technical Note describes the composite beam input data that can be
printed to a printer or to a text file when you click the File menu > Print
Tables > Composite Beam Design command. You can print any combina-
tion of five data categories.
Using the Print Composite Beam Design Tables Form

To print composite beam design input data directly to a printer, use the File
menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command and click the
check box on the Print Composite Beam Design Tables form next to the de-
sired type(s) of input data. Click the OK button to send the print to your
printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the
print.
Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to
change printers, if necessary.
To print composite beam design input data to a file, use the File menu >
Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command and click the Print to
File check box on the Print Composite Beam Design Tables form. Click the
Filename>> button to change the path or filename. Use the appropriate file
extension for the desired format (e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons
on the Open File for Printing Tables form and the Print Composite Beam De-
sign Tables form to complete the request.
Note:
The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-
put that is printed to a text file.
The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and
filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print
General Technical Note 5 - 1

Input Data Composite Beam Design
Composite Beam Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use
the Filename>> button to locate another file, and when the Open File for
Printing Tables caution box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.
If you select a specific composite beam(s) before using the File menu >
Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command, the Selection Only
check box will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only. If
you uncheck the Selection Only check box, the print will be for all composite
beams.
Material Properties Input Data

The Material Properties input data item prints the concrete and steel material
properties assigned to all frame sections that are the current design section
for a selected composite beam. If no objects are selected, it prints the con-
crete and steel material properties assigned to all frame sections that are the
current design section for any composite beam.
The material properties printed in this output are those that are used in the
composite beam design. For example, mass per unit volume is not used in the
composite beam design so it is not printed in these tables. Table 1 lists the
column headings in the material property tables and provides a brief descrip-
tion of what is in the columns.
Table 1 Material Properties Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION
Concrete Material Properties
Material Label Label (name) of the concrete material property.
Modulus of Elasticity Modulus of elasticity, Ec, of the concrete material. Note that this
is the modulus of elasticity used for deflection calculations, but
not necessarily for stress calculations. See "Effective Slab
Width and Transformed Section Properties" in Compos-
ite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the
Concrete Slab for more information.
Unit Weight Weight per unit volume of the concrete.
Concrete f'c Compressive strength of the concrete.
Technical Note 5 - 2 Material Properties Input Data

Composite Beam Design Input Data
Table 1 Material Properties Input Data

Steel Material Properties
Material Label Label (name) of the steel material property.
Modulus of Elasticity Modulus of elasticity, Es, of the steel material.
Unit Weight Weight per unit volume of the steel.
Steel Fy Yield stress of the steel.
Steel Fu Minimum tensile strength of the steel.
Steel Price Price per unit weight (e.g., $/pound) of the steel.
Section Properties Input Data

The section properties input data is provided in two tables, labeled Frame
Section Property Data (Table 1) and Frame Section Property Data (Table 2).
This data is provided in two tables because it would not all fit onto one line in
a single table. Table 2 herein lists the column headings in the section property
tables and provides a brief description of what is in the columns.
Table 2 Section Properties Input Data

Frame Section Property Data (Table 1)
Section Label Label (name) of the steel frame section.
Material Label Label (name) of the steel material property that is assigned to
the steel frame section.
bf Top Width of beam top flange.
tf Top Thickness of beam top flange.
d Depth Depth of beam measured from the top of the beam top flange to
the bottom of the beam bottom flange.
tw Web Thick Thickness of beam web.
bf Bottom Width of beam bottom flange.
tf Bottom Thickness of beam bottom flange.
Section Properties Input Data Technical Note 5 - 3

Table 2 Section Properties Input Data

Frame Section Property Data (Table 2)
Section Label Label (name) of the steel frame section.
Material Label Label (name) of the steel material property that is assigned to
the steel frame section.
k In a rolled beam section, the distance from the outside face of
the flange to the web toe of the fillet.
I33 Major Moment of inertia about the local 3-axis of the beam section.
S33 Major Section modulus about the local 3-axis of the beam section. If
the section moduli for the top and bottom of the beam are dif-
ferent, the minimum value is printed.
Z33 Major Plastic modulus about the local 3-axis of the beam section. If
the plastic moduli for the top and bottom of the beam are differ-
ent, the minimum value is printed.
Deck Properties Input Data

The deck properties input data is provided in three tables, labeled Deck Sec-
tion Property Data (Geometry), Deck Section Property Data (Material Proper-
ties), and Deck Section Property Data (Shear Studs). Table 3 lists the column
headings in the deck property tables and provides a brief description of what
is in the columns.
Table 3 Deck Properties Input Data

Deck Section Property Data (Geometry)
Section Label Label (name) of the deck section.
Solid Slab This item is Yes if the deck section represents a solid slab with
no metal deck. Otherwise it is No.
Slab Cover The depth of the concrete slab above the metal deck, tc. If the
deck section represents a solid slab with no metal deck, this is
the thickness of the solid slab.
Deck Depth The height of the metal deck ribs, hr. This item is specified as
N/A if the deck section represents a solid slab.
Technical Note 5 - 4 Deck Properties Input Data

Table 3 Deck Properties Input Data

Rib Width The average width of the metal deck ribs, wr. This item is speci-
fied as N/A if the deck section represents a solid slab.
Rib Spacing The center-to-center spacing of the metal deck ribs, Sr. This
item is specified as N/A if the deck section represents a solid
slab.
Deck Section Property Data (Material Properties)
Deck Type This item is either Filled, Unfilled or Solid. Filled means that the
deck section is a metal deck filled with concrete. Unfilled means
it is a bare metal deck. Solid means it is a solid slab with no
metal deck.
Slab Material This is the concrete material property associated with the con-
crete slab defined by the deck section. If the Deck type is Un-
filled, this item is specified as N/A.
Deck Material This is the steel material property associated with the metal
deck. This item is only specified when the Deck Type is Un-
filled. If the Deck type is not Unfilled, this item is specified as
N/A.
Deck Shear Thickness This is the shear thickness of the metal deck. This item is only
specified when the Deck Type is Unfilled. It is used for calcu-
lating the shear (in-plane, membrane) stiffness of the deck. If
the Deck type is not Unfilled, this item is specified as N/A.
Deck Unit Weight This is the weight per unit area of the metal deck, wd. See
"Metal Deck and Slab Properties" in Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 7 Composite Beam Properties for
more information.
Deck Section Property Data (Shear Studs)
Stud Diameter Diameter of the shear studs associated with the deck section,
ds.
Stud Height Height after welding of the shear studs associated with the deck
section, Hs.
Stud Fu Minimum specified tensile strength of the shear studs associ-
ated with the deck section, Fu.
Deck Properties Input Data Technical Note 5 - 5

Design Preferences Input Data

The output for the composite beam design preferences is provided in a series
of tables. The tables correspond to the tabs in the Preferences form. You can
click the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam Design com-
mand to access the composite beam preferences.
Note:
The composite beam preferences are described in AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 17 Preferences and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Tech-
nical Note 30 Preferences.
Recall that the composite beam preferences apply to all beams designed us-
ing the Composite Beam Design postprocessor. A few of the preference items
can be overwritten on a beam-by-beam basis in the composite beam over-
writes. Those preferences items that can be overwritten are mentioned in this
documentation. You can select one or more beams and then click the Design
menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command
to access the composite beam overwrites.
The preference input data is provided in tabular format. Table lists the column
headings in the preference table and provides a brief description of what is in
the columns.
Table 4 Preferences Input Data

Factors
The input data related to factors is described in AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 17 Preferences and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 30 Preferences.
Beam Properties
Shored Floor This item is Yes if the composite beam preferences designate
that the composite beams are to be shored. Otherwise, it is No.
Note that this item can be modified on a beam-by-beam basis
in the composite beam overwrites.
Technical Note 5 - 6 Design Preferences Input Data


Middle Range Length in the middle of the beam over which the program
checks the effective width on each side of the beam, expressed
as a percentage of the total beam length. See "Location Where
Effective Slab Width is Checked" in Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete Slab for more
information.
Pattern LL Factor Factor applied to live load for special pattern live load check for
cantilever back spans and continuous spans. See "Special Live
Load Patterning for Cantilever Back Spans" and "Special Live
Load Patterning for Continuous Spans" in Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 10 Design Load Combinations for more
information.
Deflection and Camber
Note:
Deflection and camber are described in Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber.
Live Load Limit Live load deflection limitation. The term L represents the length
of the beam. Note that this item can be modified on a beam-by-
beam basis in the composite beam overwrites.
Total Load Limit Total load deflection limitation. The term L represents the length
of the beam. Note that this item can be modified on a beam-by-
beam basis in the composite beam overwrites.
Camber DL Percent Percentage of dead load (not including superimposed dead
load) on which the program camber calculations are based.
See "Camber" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11
Beam Deflection and Camber for more information.
Vibration
Note:
Vibration is described in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 12 Beam
Vibration.
Percent Live Load Percentage of live load plus reduced live load considered (in
addition to full dead load) when computing weight supported by
the beam for use in calculating the first natural frequency of the
beam.
Design Preferences Input Data Technical Note 5 - 7


Consider Frequency If this item is Yes, the specified minimum acceptable frequency
is considered when selecting the optimum beam section from
an auto select section list. If this item is No, frequency is not
considered when selecting the optimum beam section.
Minimum Frequency The minimum acceptable first natural frequency for a floor
beam. This item is used when the Consider Frequency item is
set to Yes.
Murray Damping If this item is Yes, the Murray's minimum damping requirement
is considered when selecting the optimum beam section from
an auto select section list. If this item is No, Murray's minimum
damping requirement is not considered when selecting the op-
timum beam section. See "Murray's Minimum Damping
Requirement" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 12
Beam Vibration for more information.
Inherent Damping Percentage critical damping that is inherent in the floor system.
This item is used when the Murray Damping item is set to Yes.
Price
Consider Price If this item is Yes, the section price rather than steel weight is
considered when selecting the optimum beam section from an
auto select section list. If this item is No, section price is not
considered when selecting the optimum beam section. The
section price is based on specified prices for steel, shear studs,
and camber.
Stud Price Installed price for a single shear stud.
Camber Price Camber price per unit weight of steel beam (including cover
plate, if it exists).
Beam Overwrites Input Data

Beam Overwrites Input Data is described in AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 18 Overwrites and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 31 Overwrites.
Technical Note 5 - 8 Beam Overwrites Input Data

Technical Note 6
Output Details
Overview
This Technical Note describes the composite beam output summary that can
be printed to a printer or to a text file. Additionally, both short form and long
form of the output details can be printed. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 28 Output Details and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 42 Output Details for more information about the
short- and long-form outputs.
Using the Print Composite Beam Design Tables Form

To print composite beam design output data directly to a printer, use the File
menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command and click the
Summary check box on the Print Composite Beam Design Tables form. Also
select the form, or detail, of the print by selecting None, Short Form, or Long
Form. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer. Click the Cancel
button rather than the OK button to cancel the print. Use the File menu >
Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers, if neces-
sary.
Note:
A design must be run before output data can be generated.
To print summary output data to a file, use the File menu > Print Tables >
Composite Beam Design command and click the Print to File check box on
the Print Composite Beam Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button
to change the path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the de-
sired format (e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for
Printing Tables form and the Print Composite Beam Design Tables form to
complete the request.

Output Details Composite Beam Design
Note:
The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-
put that is printed to a text file.
The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and
filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print
Composite Beam Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use
the Filename button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Print-
ing Tables caution box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.
If you select a specific composite beam(s) before using the File menu >
Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command, the Selection Only
check box will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only. If
you uncheck the Selection Only check box, the print will be for all composite
beams.
Summary of Composite Beam Output

The summary of composite beam output prints a concise summary of the
composite beam results in a tabular form. One row of the output table is de-
voted to each composite beam.
If you have selected some composite beams before printing the summary
data, only summary data for the selected beams is printed. If you have not
selected any composite beams before printing the summary data, summary
data for all composite beams is printed.
Table 1 lists the column headings in the Summary of Composite Beam Output
table and provides a brief description of what is in the columns.
Table 1 Composite Beam Output Table

Story Level Story level associated with the beam.
Beam Label Label associated with the line object that represents the beam.
A typical beam label example is "B23." Do not confuse this with
the Section Label, which may be identified as "W18X35."
Section Name The current design section for the beam.
Beam Fy Yield stress of the beam, Fy.
Technical Note 6 - 2 Summary of Composite Beam Output

Composite Beam Design Output Details
Table 1 Composite Beam Output Table

Stud Diameter Diameter of shear studs, ds.
Stud Layout Number of studs in each composite beam segment separated
by commas. They are listed starting with the composite beam
segment at the I-end of the beam and working toward the J-end
of the beam.
Beam Shored This item is Yes if the beam is shored and No if it is unshored.
Beam Camber The camber for the beam. This item may be calculated by the
program, or it may be user-specified.
Summary of Composite Beam Output Technical Note 6 - 3

Technical Note 7
Composite Beam Properties
This Technical Note provides an overview of composite beam properties.

Items described include beam properties, metal deck and concrete slab prop-
erties, shear connector properties, user-defined shear connector patterns,
cover plate properties, effective slab width and beam unbraced length.
The many properties associated with composite beams are defined using vari-
ous menus in the program. The steel beam itself is defined using the Define
menu > Frame Sections command. The cover plate, if it exists, is defined in
the composite beam overwrites for the beam. The metal deck, concrete slab
and shear connectors are defined together as part of the Deck section prop-
erties using the Define menu > Wall/Slab/Deck Sections command.
Other items related to the beam properties are specified in the composite
beam preferences or overwrites.
Beam Properties
Figure 1 shows a typical composite beam for reference. The beam shown is a
rolled beam section from the built-in section database.
Tip:
The Composite Beam Design postprocessor only designs beams that are I-shaped sec-
tions and channel sections.
Basic steel beam properties are defined using the Define menu > Frame
Sections command. Use this command to define the basic geometry of the
steel section, except for the cover plate, if it exists. Define the cover plate on
the Beam tab in the composite beam overwrites. When defining a beam, a
material property that includes the yield stress for that beam is also assigned.
That yield stress is assumed to apply to the beam and the cover plate unless
it is revised in the beam overwrites. The steel Material Property also includes
the price or cost-per-unit-weight that is assigned to the beam.
Beam Properties Technical Note 7 - 1

Composite Beam Properties Composite Beam Design
Concrete slab
Sr
wr
tc
Hs
hr
Metal deck
Shear stud
d
Steel beam
tcp
Cover plate bcp
Figure 1: Illustration of Composite Beam
The beam section for a composite beam can be any I-shaped section, or a
channel. The I-shaped section can be defined by selecting a W, M, S or HP
shape from the built-in program steel section database, or by defining your
own I-shaped section using the Define menu > Frame Sections command
and selecting the Add I/Wide Flange option from the drop-down list on the
Define Frame Properties form. It is not necessary that the top and bottom
flanges have the same dimensions in user-defined I-shaped sections used as
composite beams. A channel section used as a composite beam can also be a
section taken from the built-in program steel section database or user-
defined, using the Define menu > Frame Sections command and selecting
the Add Channel option from the drop-down list on the Define Frame Proper-
ties form.
Note:
See the section entitled “Cover Plates” later in this Technical Note for more information.
Technical Note 7 - 2 Beam Properties

Composite Beam Design Composite Beam Properties
Beam sections defined using Section Designer are considered as general sec-
tions, not I-shaped or channel-shaped sections (even if they really are I-
shaped or channel-shaped), and cannot be designed using the Composite
Beam Design postprocessor.
If you define a beam section by selecting it from the built-in section database,
the program assumes that it is a rolled section and applies the design equa-
tions accordingly. If you create your own user-defined section, the program
assumes it is a welded section and revises the design equations as necessary.
The program does not check or design any of the welding for these welded
beams.
Metal Deck and Slab Properties

Basic metal deck and concrete slab properties are defined using the Define
menu > Wall/Slab/Deck Sections command. This command specifies the
geometry and the associated material properties of the metal deck, concrete
slab and shear connectors.
Tip:
A beam designed using the Composite Beam Design postprocessor can only have com-
posite behavior if it supports a deck section (not a slab or wall section).
Important note: You must specify the concrete slab over metal deck as a
deck section property (not a slab section property) if you want the beam to
have composite behavior. If you specify the slab using a slab section property
instead of a deck section property, the Composite Beam Design postprocessor
designs the beams supporting that slab as noncomposite beams.
Using the Define menu > Wall\Slab\Deck Sections command, select a

deck-type section and click the Modify/Show>> button to bring up the Deck
Section form. This box allows you to specify that the deck section is a Filled
Deck (metal deck filled with concrete), an Unfilled Deck, or a Solid Slab (solid
concrete slab with no metal deck). Alternatively, you can select "Add New
Deck" from the drop-down list in the "Click to:" area of the form to add a new
deck and specify its section type.
In the Geometry area of the Deck Section form, the specified metal deck ge-
ometry includes:
Metal Deck and Slab Properties Technical Note 7 - 3

Slab Depth: The depth of concrete fill above the metal deck. This item is
labeled tc in Figure 1.
Deck Depth: The height of the metal deck ribs. This item is labeled hr in
Figure 1.
Rib Width: The average width of the metal deck ribs. This item is labeled
wr in Figure 1.
Rib Spacing: The center-to-center spacing of the metal deck ribs. This
item is labeled Sr in Figure 1.
In the Composite Deck Studs area of the Deck Section form, the following
items are specified:
Diameter: The diameter of the shear stud.
Height: The height of the shear stud. This item is labeled Hs in Figure 1.
Tensile Strength, Fu: The specified tensile strength of the shear stud.
In the Material area of the Deck Section form, if the Deck type is Filled Deck
or Solid Slab (not Unfilled Deck), specify a Slab Material for the concrete. This
should be a previously specified concrete material property. This concrete
material property is used to specify all material properties of the concrete,
except in some code-specific cases. See "Effective Slab Width and Trans-
formed Section Properties" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effec-
tive Width of the Concrete Slab for additional information.
If the Deck type is Unfilled Deck, specify a steel material property for the
deck material and an equivalent shear thickness for the deck. These two
items are used by the program to determine the membrane shear stiffness of
the deck.
Note:
Deck section properties can be specified as a metal deck filled with concrete, unfilled
metal deck, or a solid slab with no metal deck.
In the Metal Deck Unit Weight area of the Deck Section form, specify the
weight-per-unit-area of the deck, wd.
Technical Note 7 - 4 Metal Deck and Slab Properties

Composite Beam Design Composite Beam Properties
The self-weight of the deck element representing the concrete slab over metal
deck is calculated using the weight-per-unit-area shown in Equation 1. In the
equation, wc is the weight-per-unit-volume of concrete. The first term is the
weight-per-unit-area of the concrete and the second term is the weight-per-
unit-area of the metal deck.
w h 
Weight-per-Unit-Area = w c  r r + t c  + w d Eqn. 1
 Sr 
Note that the program does not check the design of the metal deck itself.
Shear Stud Properties

As described in the previous section, shear studs are defined along with the
deck properties using the Define menu > Wall/Slab/Deck Sections com-
mand. The properties specified for shear studs are the diameter, dsc, the
height, Hs, and the specified tensile strength of the shear stud, Fu.
Tip:
In this program, you can define your own shear connector patterns.
The program automatically calculates the strength of a single shear connector

based on the shear stud and concrete slab properties. Revise this value using
the composite beam overwrites, if desired.
For additional information about shear studs, see AISC-ASD89 Composite

Beam Design Technical Note 22 Allowable Bending Stresses, AISC-ASD89
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 23 Bending Stress Checks, and AISC-
ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 24 Beam Shear Checks.
Cover Plates
In this program, full-length cover plates can be specified on the bottom flange
of a composite beam. Cover plates are not defined as part of the beam prop-
erties. They can only be specified on the Beam tab of the composite beam
overwrites. Thus, to specify a beam with a cover plate, define the beam as
you normally would without the cover plate and then add the cover plate in
the overwrites by selecting a composite beam(s) and using the Design Menu
> Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command.
Shear Stud Properties Technical Note 7 - 5

One consequence of this process is that the cover plate is not included for
overall analysis of the building. However, the cover plate is considered both
for resisting moments and deflections for design of the composite beam
within the program's Composite Beam Design postprocessor.
Tip:
Cover plates are specified in the composite beam overwrites.
The properties specified for a cover plate on the Beam tab of the Composite
Beam Overwrites form are the width, bcp, the thickness, tcp, and a yield
stress, Fycp. The width and thickness dimensions are illustrated in Figure 1.
The program does not check or design any of the welding between the cover
plate and the beam bottom flange. It also does not determine cutoff locations
for the full length cover plate.
Technical Note 7 - 6 Cover Plates

Technical Note 8
Effective Width of the Concrete Slab
This Technical Note explains how the program considers the effective width of
the concrete slab separately on each side of the composite beam. This sepa-
ration is carried through in all of the calculations. It allows you to have differ-
ent deck properties on the two sides of the beam.
You can redefine the effective slab width on either side of the beam in the
overwrites. In the composite beam overwrites on the Beam tab (display using
the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Over-
writes command), the effective widths are specified on the left and right
sides of the beam. As illustrated in Figure 1, if you stand at the I-end of the
beam looking toward the J-end of the beam, the program assumes the right
side of the beam to be on your right side.
Location Where Effective Slab Width is Checked

By default, the program checks the effective width of the beam over the en-
tire middle 70% of the beam and uses the smallest value found as the effec-
tive width of the beam, beff, everywhere in the calculations for that beam. The
70% number is derived based on two assumptions:
The capacity of the composite beam is approximately twice that of the

steel beam alone.
The steel beam alone is capable of resisting the entire moment in the
composite beam for the last 15% of the beam length at each end of the
beam. Note that for a uniformly loaded beam, the moment drops off to
half of the maximum moment or less in the last 15% of the beam.
Redefine this default “middle range” of 70% in the composite beam design
preferences, if desired. In the preferences, the Middle Range item is on the
Beam tab (display using the Options > Preferences > Composite Beam
Design command).
Location Where Effective Slab Width is Checked Technical Note 8 - 1

Effective Width of the Concrete Slab Composite Beam Design
j-end of beam
Left side of beam Right side of beam
i-end of beam
Figure 1: Example of How the Program Defines the Left and Right
Sides of the Beam
Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the Beam

Length
For the design calculations, the program assumes one deck type and deck
direction on each side of the beam along the entire length of the beam, re-
gardless of the actual number of types and directions of deck that may exist.
The program allows different deck types and deck directions on the two sides
of the beam in the calculations. Figure 2 shows examples of different deck
types and different deck directions on the two sides of the beam.
Note:
The program allows a different deck type and deck orientation on each side of the beam.
The program checks the deck types and deck directions on each side of the
composite beam within the specified middle range (see the previous subsec-
Technical Note 8 - 2 Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the Beam Length
Composite Beam Design Effective Width of the Concrete Slab
Deck Direction Different on Deck Type Different on

Two Sides of Beam Two Sides of Beam
Figure 2: Different Deck Types and Different Deck Directions on the Two
Sides of the Beam
tion). When multiple deck types or deck directions occur on the same side of
a composite beam, the program decides which single deck section and direc-
tion to use on that side of the beam.
The program goes through these steps in this order to choose the deck sec-
tion.
1. The program calculates the product of tc * f c' for each deck where tc is
the depth of the concrete above the metal deck and f c' is the concrete
slab compressive strength. It uses the deck section that has the small-
est value of tc * f c' in the calculations for the beam.
2. If two or more deck sections have the same value of tc * f c' but the
deck spans in different directions, the program uses the deck section
that spans perpendicular to the beam.
Important note about deck orientation: In this program's compos-

ite beam design, the deck is assumed either parallel or perpendicular
to the span of the beam. If the deck span is exactly parallel to the
beam span or within 15 degrees of parallel to the beam span, the deck
span is assumed to be parallel to the beam span. Otherwise, the deck
span is assumed to be perpendicular to the beam span.
Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the Beam Length Technical Note 8 - 3
3. If two or more deck sections span in the same direction and have the
same value of tc * f c' , the program uses the deck section with the
smaller tc value.
4. If two or more deck sections span in the same direction and have the
same values of tc and f c' , the program use the first defined deck sec-
tion.
Tip:
You can change the assumed deck type and deck direction on each side of the beam on
the Deck tab in the composite beam overwrites.
Refer to the floor plan shown in Figure 3. The typical floor in this plan consists
of 2-1/2" normal weight concrete over 3" metal deck that is designated Deck
Type A. However, the upper left-hand quadrant of the floor consists of 4-1/2"
normal weight concrete over 3" metal deck that is designated Deck Type B.
Assume that the concrete compressive strength is 3,500 psi for both deck
types.
Now consider the beam labeled “Girder F” in the figure. Deck Type A exists
along the entire length of the right-hand side of this beam. Thus, the program
Deck Type B: 4-1/2"

normal weight concrete
over 3" metal deck
Step in floor slab Edge of deck

Girder F
Deck Type A: 2-1/2"

over 3" metal deck
Floor Plan
Figure 3: Example of Different Deck Types on the Left and Right Sides of
a Beam
Technical Note 8 - 4 Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the Beam Length
uses Deck Type A on the right side of the beam in the calculations. Both Deck
Type A and Deck Type B exist along the left-hand side of the beam. The pro-
gram uses the following method to determine which of these deck types to
use on the left side of the beam in the calculations:
1. Determine the product of tc * f c' for each deck type.
a. For Deck Type A: tc * f c' = 2.5 * 3,500 = 8,750 lbs/in.
b. For Deck Type B: tc * f c' = 4.5 * 3,500 = 15,750 lbs/in.
2. Use Deck Type A on the left side of the girder in the composite beam
calculations because it has the smaller value of tc * f c' .
Note that the loads applied to the beam are still based on the actual deck
types. Thus, the load applied to the upper half of Girder F in Figure 3 would
include the contribution from Deck Type B even though Deck Type B might
not be used in calculating the composite beam properties.
A second example is shown in Figure 4. In this example, the deck type is the
same throughout the floor, but the direction of the deck changes in the upper
left-hand quadrant of the floor.
Now consider the beam labeled “Girder G” in the figure. The deck ribs are
oriented parallel to the span of Girder G along the entire length of the right-
hand side of this beam. Thus, the program uses Deck Type A oriented parallel
to the span of Girder G on the right side of the beam in the calculations.
Deck ribs oriented both perpendicular and parallel to the span of Girder G
exist along the left-hand side of the beam. Because only the deck direction is
different along the left side of the beam, not the deck type (and thus tc and
f c' do not change), the program uses the deck that spans perpendicular to
Girder G on the left side of the beam.
Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the Beam Length Technical Note 8 - 5
Deck Type A: 2-1/2"

over 3" metal deck
Edge of deck
Girder G
Deck Type A: 2-1/2"

over 3" metal deck
Floor Plan
Figure 4: Example of Different Deck Orientations on Left and Right Sides

of the Beam
Effect of Diagonal Beams on Effective Slab Width

Consider the example shown in Plan A of Figure 5. In Plan A, the length of
Beam A is LA. Assume that the effective width of this beam is controlled by
the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam. Also assume that the
program checks the effective width of the slab over the default middle range
(70%) of Beam A. If the variable labeled xA in the figure is less than or equal
to 0.15, the effective width of the concrete slab on the upper side of Beam A
(i.e., the side between Beam A and Beam X) is controlled by the distance
between Beam A and Beam X. On the other hand, if xA is greater than 0.15,
the effective width of the concrete slab on the upper side of Beam A is con-
trolled by the distance between Beam A and Girder Y, at a location of 0.15LA
from the left end of Beam A. This distance is measured along a line that is
perpendicular to Beam A.
Technical Note 8 - 6 Effect of Diagonal Beams on Effective Slab Width

Beam X
Z
xA * LA
am
Be
Beam A θ Beam B
LA
er Y
Gird
Plan A Plan B
Be
Z1
am
am
Z2
Be
θ2 θ1
Beam C
Plan C
Figure 5: Examples for the Effect of Diagonal Beams on Composite Beam

Effective Width
Now consider the example shown in Plan B of Figure 5. Assume that the ef-
fective width of Beam B is controlled by the distance to the centerline of the
adjacent beam. When considering the perpendicular distance from Beam B to
the adjacent beam on the upper side of Beam B, the program considers the
diagonal beam labeled Beam Z when the angle θ is less than 45 degrees. If
the angle θ is greater than or equal to 45 degrees, Beam Z is ignored when
calculating the effective slab width on the upper side of Beam B.
Plan C in Figure 5 shows a special case where two diagonal beams frame into
Beam C at the same point. In this special case, the program assumes that the
effective width of the slab on the side of the beam where the two diagonals
exist is zero. You can, of course, change this in the overwrites. The program
assumes the zero effective width because although it is checking the effective
Effect of Diagonal Beams on Effective Slab Width Technical Note 8 - 7

width for Beam C, it is unable to determine whether a slab is actually between

the two diagonal beams.
Effect of Openings on Effective Slab Width

Now consider Plan D shown in Figure 6. In this case, there is an opening on
both sides of the slab at the left end of Beam D. Assume again that the effec-
tive width of this beam is controlled by the distance to the centerline of the
adjacent beam, and also assume that the program checks the effective width
of the slab over the default center 70% of the Beam D length. If the width of
the opening, xD * LD is less than 0.15LD, the program bases the effective
width of the concrete slab on the distance to the adjacent beams. On the
other hand, if xD * LD exceeds 0.15LD, the program assumes the effective
concrete slab width for Beam D to be zero; that is, it assumes a noncompo-
site beam.
LV
xD * LD
Beam D
Plan D
Figure 6: Example of the Effect of Openings on Composite Beam

Effective Width
Technical Note 8 - 8 Effect of Openings on Effective Slab Width

Effective Slab Width and Transformed Section

Properties
When the program calculates the transformed section properties, the concrete
is transformed to steel by multiplying beff by the ratio Ec / Es. This ratio may
be different on the two sides of the beam. For AISC-ASD89 composite beam
design, Ec may be different for stress and deflection calculations. See AISC-
ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Mo-
ment of Inertia for more information.
Effective Slab Width and Transformed Section Properties Technical Note 8 - 9

Technical Note 9
Beam Unbraced Length and Design Check Locations
Overview
The program considers the unbraced length for construction loading sepa-
rately from that for final loads. For both types of loading, the unbraced length
of the beam associated with buckling about the local 2-axis (minor) of the
beam is used to determine the flexural capacity of the noncomposite beam.
The local 2-axis is illustrated in Figure 1.
By default, the program automatically determines the locations where the

beam is braced for buckling about the local 2-axis. This information is then
used to determine the unbraced length associated with any point on the
beam. Instead of using the program calculated bracing points, you can specify
in the overwrites your own brace points for any beam.
i-end of beam
Figure 1: Local 2-Axis of Beam

Beam Unbraced Length and Design Check Locations Composite Beam Design
Tip:
The program considers the unbraced length for construction loading separately from that
for final loads.
For buckling about the local 2-axis, the program differentiates between brac-
ing of the top flange of the beam and bracing of the bottom flange of the
beam. The program automatically recognizes which flange of the beam is the
compression flange at any point along the beam for any design load combina-
tion. With this ability and the program-determined or user-specified bracing
point locations, the program can automatically determine the unbraced length
of any segment along the beam and can apply appropriate code-specified
modification factors (e.g., Cb factor for flexure) to the flexural strength of the
beam.
Note:
The program can automatically determine the unbraced length of any beam segment
based on the assumed or specified bracing points.
Determination of the Braced Points of a Beam

The program considers the lateral bracing for the top and bottom flanges
separately. In the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, the program as-
sumes that beams can be braced by the deck section (or slab section) that
they support and by other beams framing into the beam being considered.
The program automatically determines the braced points of a beam for buck-
ling about the local 2-axis as follows:
The top flange is assumed to be continuously laterally supported (un-

braced length of zero) anywhere there is metal deck section with concrete
fill framing into one or both sides of the beam or there is a slab section
framing into both sides of the beam.
Note:
In the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, either deck or slab sections can brace the
top flange of a beam.
Tip:
You can choose to accept the program default bracing points for a beam. Alternatively,
you can enter the composite beam overwrites and specify the actual bracing points for a
beam or specify a maximum unbraced length.
Technical Note 9 - 2 Determination of the Braced Points of a Beam

Composite Beam Design Beam Unbraced Length and Design Check Locations
Metal deck sections with no concrete fill are assumed to continuously

brace the top flange if the deck ribs are specified as oriented perpendicu-
lar to the beam span. If the deck ribs are specified as oriented parallel to
the beam span, the deck is assumed to not brace the top flange.
The top and bottom flange are assumed to be braced at

any point where another beam frames into the beam
being considered at an angle greater than 30 degrees,
Beam Considered
as shown in the sketch to the right. It is up to you to Br
ac
provide appropriate detailing at this point to assure that
ing
Be
the bottom flange is adequately braced. If appropriate am
detailing is not provided, you should redefine the brace
θ > 30°
points using one of the methods described in the next
section.
When the bracing is program calculated or brace points are user specified,
the program always assumes that each end of the beam is braced at both
the top and the bottom flange. If the unbraced length of a beam is longer
than the actual beam, specify a user-defined unbraced length, not user-
defined brace points.
User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam

Overview
To use unbraced lengths other than those determined by the program,
change the assumed unbraced length for any beam in the composite beam
overwrites. This is true for both the construction loading unbraced lengths
and the final loading unbraced lengths. Select a beam and click the Design
menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command
to access the overwrites. The construction loading bracing is specified on the
Bracing (C) tab. The final condition bracing is specified on the Bracing tab.
For buckling about the local 2-axis, you can specify specific bracing points
along the beam that apply to the top flange, bottom flange, or both, or you
can specify one maximum unbraced length that applies over the entire length
of the beam to both the top and bottom flanges.
User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam Technical Note 9 - 3

Important Note: As soon as you specify any user-defined bracing points or

unbraced lengths for a beam, all of the program-determined lateral bracing
information on that beam is ignored. Thus, if you specify any bracing
points for a beam, you should specify all of the bracing points for that
beam.
User-Specified Uniform and Point Bracing

If you specify your own bracing along the beam for buckling about the local 2-
axis, you can specify continuous bracing along a beam flange, bracing at spe-
cific points along a beam flange, or both.
Point Braces
To define point braces, specify a distance along the beam that locates the
brace point, and then indicate whether the top, bottom, or both flanges are
braced at this location. Specify the distance as an actual distance or as a
relative distance, both measured from the I-end of the beam. All distances
are measured from the center of the support, not the physical end of the
beam. The distances may be specified as either absolute (actual) distances or
as relative distances. A relative distance to a point is the absolute distance to
that point divided by the length of the beam measured from the center-of-
support to center-of-support.
Tip:
You can change the default bracing assumed for a beam in the composite beam over-
writes. The bracing specified can be different for construction loading and final loading.
Use the following procedure in the composite beam overwrites (display using
the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Over-
writes command) on the Bracing (C) or Bracing tab to specify point braces:
1. Check the box next to the Bracing Condition overwrite item and then
select Bracing Specified from the drop-down box to the right of the
Bracing Condition title.
2. Check the box next to the No. Point Braces title and then click in the
cell to the right of the title.
3. The Point Braces form appears. In this form:
Technical Note 9 - 4 User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam

a. Indicate whether the specified distances will be relative or absolute

from the I-end of the beam by selecting the appropriate option
near the bottom of the form.
b. In the Define Point Braces area, input a distance from end-I in the
Location box and choose a brace type in the Type box. In the Type
box, Top means only the top flange is braced; Bottom means only
the bottom flange is braced; and All means both flanges are braced
at that point.
c. Click the Add button to add the brace point.
4. Repeat step 3 as many times as required.
5. To modify an existing point brace specification, do the following:
a. Highlight the item to be modified in the Define Point Braces area.

Note that the highlighted distance and type appear in the edit
boxes at the top of the area.
b. Modify the distance and type in the edit box as desired.
c. Click the Modify button to modify the brace point.
Note:
You can specify uniform bracing, point braces, or a combination of both for a composite
beam.
6. To delete an existing point brace specification, do the following:
a. Highlight the item to be deleted in the Define Point Braces area.

Note that the highlighted distance and type appear in the edit
b. Click the Delete button to delete the brace point.
7. Click the OK button to return to the Composite Beam Overwrites form.

Note that the No. Point Braces item is automatically updated by the
program to reflect the point braces specified.
User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam Technical Note 9 - 5

Uniform Braces
To define uniform or continuous bracing, specify a distance along the beam
that locates the starting point of the continuous bracing, specify a second
(longer) distance along the beam that locates the ending point of the continu-
ous bracing, and then indicate whether the top, bottom, or both flanges are
continuously braced over this length. You can specify the distances as abso-
lute (actual) distances or as relative distances, both measured from the I-end
of the beam. A relative distance to a point is the absolute distance to that
point divided by the length of the beam measured from the center-of-support
to center-of-support.
Use the following procedure in the composite beam overwrites on the Bracing
(C) or Bracing tab to specify point braces:
1. Check the box next to the Bracing Condition overwrite item and then
select Bracing Specified from the drop-down box to the right of the
Bracing Condition title.
2. Check the box next to the No. Uniform Braces title and then click in
the cell to the right of the title.
3. The Uniform Braces form appears. In this form:

b. In the Define Uniform Braces area, input distances from end-I in

the Start and End boxes and choose a brace type in the Type box.
The distance in the End box must be larger than that in the Start
box. In the Type box, Top means only the top flange is braced;
Bottom means only the bottom flange is braced; and All means
both flanges are braced at that point.
Note:
You can specify whether a bracing point braces the top flange, bottom flange or both
flanges of a beam.
c. Click the Add button to add the brace point.
4. Repeat step 3 as many times as required.
Technical Note 9 - 6 User-Defined Unbraced Length of a Beam

5. To modify an existing uniform brace specification, do the following:
a. Highlight the item to be modified in the Define Uniform Braces

area. Note that the highlighted distances and type appear in the
edit boxes at the top of the area.
b. Modify the distances and type in the edit boxes as desired.
c. Click the Modify button to modify the uniform brace.
6. To delete an existing uniform brace specification, do the following:
a. Highlight the item to be deleted in the Define Uniform Braces area.

Note that the highlighted distances and type appear in the edit
b. Click the Delete button to delete the uniform brace.
7. Click the OK button to return to the Composite Beam Overwrites form.

Note that the No. Uniform Braces item is automatically updated by the
program to reflect the uniform braces specified.
Design Check Locations

One of the first tasks the program performs when designing or checking a
composite beam is to determine the design check locations for the design
load combinations used for checking the strength of the beam to carry the
final design loads. There may be many design check locations along a beam.
The design check locations are determined as follows:
The point of maximum positive moment for each design load combination
used for checking the strength of the beam to carry the final design loads
is a design check location. Note that there may be more than one of these
design load combinations and thus there may be more than one point of
maximum moment to consider.
The point of maximum negative moment (if negative moment exists) for
each design load combination used for checking the strength of the beam
to carry the final design loads is a design check location.
Design Check Locations Technical Note 9 - 7

A point load or point moment location for any design load combination
used for checking the strength of the beam to carry the final design loads
is a design check location.
The ends of a cover plate, if one is specified, are design check locations.
The end or edge of the deck. This occurs, for example, at locations where
the beam spans through an opening in the deck.
At each design check location the program checks the moment capacity of the
composite beam and determines the number of shear connectors required
between that location and the nearest point of zero moment (or in some spe-
cial cases, the end of the slab).
Note:
The program determines one set of design check locations that applies to all design load
combinations.
Consider, for example, a composite beam with two design load combinations
used for checking the strength of the beam to carry the final design loads.
Assume one of those load combinations is a uniform load over the full length
of the beam and the other is a point loads at the third points of the beam.
Also assume there is positive moment only in the beam and no cover plate. In
this example, the program considers the following design check locations:
The point of maximum positive moment for the design load combination
with uniform load only.
The point of maximum positive moment for the design load combination
with point loads at the third points.
The locations of the point loads, that is, the third points of the beam.
The program checks the moment capacity and the number of shear connec-
tors required between each of these four locations and the nearest point of
zero moment for both of the design load combinations. Thus, for the design
load combination with uniform load only, the program still checks how many
shear studs are required between the location of the point load in the other
design load combination and the nearest point of zero moment. This ensures
that there is always a sufficient number of shear connectors in the appropri-
ate location on the beam.
Technical Note 9 - 8 Design Check Locations

Technical Note 10
Overview
This Technical Note described the three types of design load combinations for
composite beam design in the program:
Strength Check for Construction Loads: Design load combinations for

checking the strength of the beam to carry construction loads. Note that
this design load combination is only considered if the beam is specified to
be unshored.
You can specify on the Beam tab in the composite beam preferences that
all beams considered by the Composite Beam Design postprocessor are
shored. Access these preferences using the Options menu > Prefer-
ences > Composite Beam Design command. Modify the shoring prefer-
ence for selected beams on the Beam tab in the composite beam over-
writes. Access the overwrites by selecting a beam and then clicking the
Design menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites
command.
Strength Check for Final Loads: Design load combinations for checking
the strength of the beam to carry the final design loads.
Deflection Check for Final Loads: Design load combinations for check-
ing the deflection of the beam under final design loads.
Note:
This program automatically creates code-specific design load combinations for composite
beam design.
Tip:
None of the program default load combinations include the effect of lateral loads. If lateral
loads need to be considered, you should specify your own design load combinations.

Design Load Combinations Composite Beam Design
The design load combinations are defined separately for each of these three
conditions. The program automatically creates code-specific composite beam
design load combinations for each of the three types of design load combina-
tions based on the specified dead, superimposed dead, live and reducible live
load cases. You can add additional design load combinations and modify or
delete the program-created load combinations. Use the Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > Select Design Combo command to review or
modify design load combinations. Note that the Design Load Combinations
Selection form that appears when you use this command has three separate
tabs. There is one tab for each of the three types of load combinations.
Special Live Load Patterning for Cantilever Back Spans

For strength design of cantilever back spans, the program performs special
live load patterning. The live load patterning used for cantilever back spans is
slightly different from what you might expect, so you should read this section
carefully to understand what the program does.
Each composite beam design load combination for a cantilever has a dead
load (DL), superimposed dead load (SDL) and a live load plus reduced live
load (LL + RLL) component. There may also be other types of load compo-
nents as well. The nature of the other types of load components is not im-
portant. The DL, SDL, (LL + RLL) and other components are shown in Figure
1a.
The program internally creates a simply supported model of the cantilever

back span. It applies a load to this simply supported span that is equal to a
factor times the LL + RLL applied to the span. The factor used is specified on
the Beam tab in the composite beam design preferences as the Pattern Live
Load Factor. (Access the preferences using the Options menu > Prefer-
ences > Composite Beam Design command.) This internally created model
and loading is illustrated in Figure 1b. In the figure, PLLF is short for Pattern
Live Load Factor.
Finally for strength design (final loads only) of cantilever back spans, the pro-
gram considers the following two conditions for each design load combination:
Technical Note 10 - 2 Special Live Load Patterning for Cantilever Back Spans
Composite Beam Design Design Load Combinations
DL SDL
LL + RLL Other
a) Components of a Design Load Combination
PLLF * (LL + RLL) Note: PLLF = The Pattern Live Load Factor as
specified on the Beam tab in the
composite beam preferences.
b) Simply Supported Back Span with Factored LL + RLL Loading
DL + SDL + LL + RLL + Other

1.
DL + SDL + Other PLLF * (LL + RLL)

2. +
c) Two Conditions Considered for Each Design Load Combination
Figure 1: Conditions Considered for Strength Design of a Cantilever Back

Span
DL + SDL + LL + RLL (+ any other type of load if it exists) as specified

over the full length (back span plus overhang) of the cantilever beam.
DL + SDL (+ any other type of load if it exists) over the full length (back
span plus overhang) of the cantilever beam plus the (LL + RLL) multiplied
by the Pattern Live Load Factor applied to the simply supported back
span.
These two conditions are shown in Figure 1c.
Note that the conditions described herein are only considered for strength de-
sign for final loads. The program does not do any special pattern loading
checks for deflection design or for construction loading design.
Special Live Load Patterning for Cantilever Back Spans Technical Note 10 - 3
Note:
The live load patterning used for continuous spans is slightly different from what you
might expect, so you should read this section carefully to understand what the program
does.
If load patterning different from that provided by the program is needed, you
should create your own design load combination. When creating your own live
load patterning, it typically works best if you give the specially defined pat-
tern live load cases an “Other” design type instead of a “Live Load” design
type. That way, the special pattern live load cases are not included in the
automatically created default design load combinations, avoiding possible
double counting of some live loads in those load combinations.
Special Live Load Patterning for Continuous Spans

For strength design of spans that are continuous at one or both ends, the
program performs special live load patterning similar to that described in the
previous section for back spans of cantilevers. The live load patterning used
for continuous spans is slightly different from what you might expect, so you
should read this section carefully to understand what the program does.
Each composite beam design load combination for a continuous span has a
DL, SDL and (LL + RLL) component. There may also be other types of load
components as well. The nature of the other types of load components is not
important. The DL, SDL, (LL + RLL) and other components are shown in Fig-
ure 2a.
The program internally creates a simply supported model of the continuous

span. It applies a load to this simply supported span that is equal to a factor
times the LL + RLL applied to the span. The factor used is specified on the
Beam tab in the composite beam design preferences as the Pattern Live Load
Factor. (You can access the preferences using the Options menu > Prefer-
ences > Composite Beam Design command.) This internally created model
and loading is illustrated in Figure 2b. In the figure, PLLF is short for Pattern
Live Load Factor.
Finally for strength design (final loads only) of continuous spans, the program
considers the following two conditions for each design load combination:
Technical Note 10 - 4 Special Live Load Patterning for Continuous Spans

Composite Beam Design Design Load Combinations
DL SDL
LL + RLL Other
a) Components of a Design Load Combination
PLLF * (LL + RLL) Note: PLLF = The Pattern Live Load Factor as
specified on the Beam tab in the
composite beam preferences.
b) Simply Supported Span with Factored LL + RLL Loading
DL + SDL + LL + RLL + Other
1.
DL + SDL + Other PLLF * (LL + RLL)
2. +
c) Two Conditions Considered for Each Design Load Combination
Figure 2: Conditions Considered for Strength Design of a Continuous Span
DL + SDL + LL + RLL (+ any other type of load if it exists) as specified

with actual continuity.
DL + SDL (+ any other type of load if it exists) as specified with actual

continuity plus the (LL + RLL) multiplied by the Pattern Live Load Factor
applied to the simply supported beam.
These two conditions are shown in Figure 2c.
Special Live Load Patterning for Continuous Spans Technical Note 10 - 5

Note that the conditions described herein are only considered for strength de-
sign for final loads. The program does not do any special pattern loading
checks for deflection design or for construction loading design.
If load patterning different from that provided by the program is needed, you
should create your own design load combination. When creating your own live
load patterning, it typically works best if you give the specially defined pat-
tern live load cases an “Other” design type instead of a “Live Load” design
type. That way, the special pattern live load cases are not included in the
automatically created default design load combinations, avoiding possible
double counting of some live loads in those load combinations.
Technical Note 10 - 6 Special Live Load Patterning for Continuous Spans

Technical Note 11
Beam Deflection and Camber
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates beam deflections
and how it considers beam camber.
Deflection
In the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, when a beam is shored, the
deflection is calculated using (a) the transformed moment of inertia, Itr, if
there is full (100%) composite connection, (b) the effective moment of iner-
tia, Ieff, if there is partial composite connection, or (c) the moment of inertia
of the steel beam alone, Ibare, if the beam is designed noncompositely or
found to be a cantilever overhang.
Note:
The program checks the deflection of composite beams against default or user-specified
deflection limits.
Itr is calculated as follows:
I tr = ∑A 2
tr y1 + ∑I O − (∑ A ) y
tr
2
Eqn. 1
where,
Atr = Area of an element of the composite beam section, in2.
yl = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel

beam section to the centroid of an element of the beam sec-
tion, in.
IO = Moment of inertia of an element of a steel beam section taken

about its own elastic neutral axis, in4.
y = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel

beam section to the elastic neutral axis of the fully composite
beam, in.
Deflection Technical Note 11 - 1

Beam Deflection and Camber Composite Beam Design
Ieff is calculated as follows:
I eff = I bare + PCC (I tr − I bare ) Eqn. 2
where,
PCC = Percent composite connection, unitless. The percentage varies

between 25% and 100% inclusive.
Ibare = Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone plus cover plate, if it
exists, in4.
Ieff = Effective moment of inertia of a partially composite beam, in4.
Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia about elastic neutral

axis of the composite beam calculated as described in Equation
1, in4.
Ibare is calculated as follows:
I bare = ∑ (Ay )+ ∑ I
1
2
O − (∑ A ) y 2
bare Eqn. 3
where,
∑(Ay12) = Sum of the product A times y12 for all of the elements of the
steel beam section (including the cover plate, if it exists), in4.
∑Io = Sum of the moments of inertia of each element of the beam

section taken about the center of gravity of the element, in4.
∑A = Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the steel beam

sections (including the cover plate, if it exists), in2.
ybare = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel
section of the elastic neutral axis of the steel beam (plus
cover plate, if it exists), in.
If a composite beam is unshored, the dead load deflection is always based on

the moment of inertia of the steel section alone (plus cover plate, if it exists),
Ibare. The deflection for all other loads is calculated using (a) the transformed
moment of inertia, Itr, if there is full (100%) composite connection, (b) the
Technical Note 11 - 2 Deflection

Composite Beam Design Beam Deflection and Camber
Original position of beam

A
Line between
A position of beam
shown
Deflection reported by
Composite Beam
postprocess
a) b) Deflected Shape of
Figure 1: Deflection Results Reported by the Composite Beam Design

Postprocessor
effective moment of inertia, Ieff, if there is partial composite connection, or (c)

the moment of inertia of the steel beam alone, Ibare, if the beam is designed
noncompositely or found to be a cantilever overhang.
When deflection is used as a criterion for selecting the optimum beam size,
the program checks that the total load deflection minus the camber does not
exceed the specified total load deflection limit. It also checks that the live load
deflection does not exceed the specified live load deflection limit.
The program calculates composite beam deflections using a moment-area

technique. An M/EI diagram is constructed by calculating M/EI values at each
output station along the length of the beam and then connecting the M/EI
values at those stations with straight-line segments. The program assumes
that the moment of inertia does not vary along the length of the beam (line
object).
Deflections for the beam are calculated at each output station. The overall
deflected shape of the beam is drawn by connecting the computed values of
deflection at each output station with straight-line segments. Thus, the pro-
gram assumes a linear variation of M/EI between output stations.
In this program's composite beam design, the reported deflection is the verti-
cal displacement relative to a line drawn between the deflected position of
the ends of the beam. For example, refer to the beam shown in Figure 1. Fig-
ure 1a shows the original undeformed beam and also shows an arbitrary point
Deflection Technical Note 11 - 3

Beam Deflection and Camber Composite Beam Design
along the beam labeled A. Figure 1b shows the beam in its deformed position
and illustrates the deflection that the Composite Beam Design postprocessor
reports for the beam at point A.
Deflection Reported for Cantilever Overhangs

For cantilever overhangs, the program's Composite Beam Design postproces-
sor reports the displacement of the beam relative to the deformed position of
the supported end. This displacement is calculated by the design postproces-
sor assuming that the supported end of the cantilever overhang is fixed
against rotation.
If you use the Display menu > Show Deformed Shape command to review
the displacement at the end of the cantilever, the displacement is reported
relative to the undeformed position of the end of the cantilever. In that case,
the rotation at the supported end of the cantilever overhang is correctly taken
into account. However, the displacements displayed are all based on the
analysis section properties (noncomposite moment of inertias).
Camber
When beam camber is calculated, the amount of camber is based on a per-
centage of the dead load (not including superimposed dead load) deflection.
By default, this percentage is 100%, but you can modify this value on the
Deflection tab of the composite beam design preferences. The name of the
item to modify is "Camber DL (%)." Use the Options menu > Preferences
> Composite Beam Design command to access the composite beam design
preferences.
The minimum camber that the program specifies (other than zero) is ¾ inch.
The maximum camber the program specifies is 4 inches. The program speci-
fies the camber in ¼ inch increments. Table 1 shows how the program as-
signs camber to a beam based on the specified percentage of dead load de-
flection.
Technical Note 11 - 4 Camber

Composite Beam Design Beam Deflection and Camber
Table 1: How the Program Specifies Camber

Camber Camber
CP * ∆DL Specified by the CP * ∆DL Specified by
(inches) Program (inches) the Program
(inches) (inches)
≥ < ≥ <
N.A. 0.5 0 2.375 2.625 2.5
0.5 0.875 0.75 2.625 2.875 2.75
0.875 1.125 1 2.875 3.125 3
1.125 1.375 1.25 3.125 3.375 3.25
1.375 1.625 1.5 3.375 3.625 3.5
1.625 1.875 1.75 3.625 3.875 3.75
1.875 2.125 2 3.875 N.A. 4
2.125 2.375 2.25
In the table, CP is the specified percentage of dead load deflection upon which
the camber is based. The CP * ∆DL column is broken into two subcolumns la-
beled “≥” and “<”. These two subcolumns specify the range of CP * ∆DL for
which the program specifies a particular camber.
The program specifies camber for those beams for which you request it to
specify camber, regardless of the beam depth or length. Review the beam
cambers calculated by the program together with beam camber information
related to your design code and any other information provided by your steel
fabricator to make any necessary adjustments.
Camber Technical Note 11 - 5

Technical Note 12
Beam Vibration
Overview
By default the program calculates the first natural vibration frequency for
each beam and reports it in the output, but it does not by default use this in-
formation to determine the adequacy of a composite beam section. You can
change this on the Preferences tab in the composite beam design preferences.
You can also indicate that a beam section must satisfy the Murray minimum
damping requirement to be considered acceptable.
Vibration Frequency
The program calculates the first natural vibration frequency of a beam using
Equation 1.
gE s I tr
f = Kf Eqn. 1
WL3
where,
f = First natural frequency of the beam in cycles per second.
Kf = A unitless coefficient typically equal to 1.57 unless the beam is the

overhanging portion of a cantilever with a back span, in which case Kf
is as defined in Figure 1 and digitized in Table 1, or the beam is a
cantilever that is fully fixed at one end and free at the other end, in
which case Kf is 0.56. Note that Figure 1 is based on a similar figure
in Murray and Hendrick (1977).
g = Acceleration of gravity, in/sec2.
Es = Steel modulus of elasticity, ksi.
Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia for the composite beam cal-
culated assuming full (100%) composite connection, regardless of the

Beam Vibration Composite Beam Design
actual percent composite connection, in4. Itr is calculated using Equa-

tion 1 of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam Deflection
and Camber. If there is no deck supported by the beam, Ibare is used
for this item. Ibare is calculated using Equation 3 of Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber.
W = Total load supported by the beam, kips. This is calculated by the pro-
gram as the sum of all of the dead load and superimposed dead load
supported by the beam, plus a percentage of all of the live load and
reducible live load supported by the beam. The percentage of live
load is specified in the composite beam preferences. The percentage
is intended to be an estimate of the sustained portion of the live load
(about 10% to 25% of the total design live load). See Naeim (1991).
Also see the Important Note About W.
L = Center-of-support to center-of-support length of the beam, in.
Note:
For vibration calculations, the program calculates the moment of inertia assuming full
(100%) composite connection, regardless of the actual percent composite connection.
Important Note About W, the Weight Used in the Frequency Calculation
The weight, W, used in the frequency calculations is determined by the

program as the sum of all dead loads, plus the sum of all superimposed
dead loads, plus some percentage of the sum of all live loads and reduced
live loads on the beam, regardless of whether those loads are included in a
design load combination. The program determines the type of load (dead,
live, etc.) based on the type of load specified in the load case definition.
You define a load case using the Define menu > Static Load Cases
command.
Thus, for the program to correctly calculate the weight supported by the
beam, and thus correctly calculate the frequency, you must be sure to tag
all of your load types correctly when you define your static load cases. Be
careful not to define the same load twice (i.e., in two different load cases)
as a Dead, Superimposed dead, Live or Reducible Live load type. If you
want or need to define the same load twice, you may want to tag the load
as an Other-type load in the second case. Doing this keeps the program
from double counting the load when calculating the weight, W.
Technical Note 12 - 2 Vibration Frequency

Composite Beam Design Beam Vibration
1.6
L H
1.4 g E I tr
f = Kf
W L3
1.2
Frequency Coefficient, Kf
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
Cantilever / Backspan Ratio, H / L
Figure 1: Kf Coefficient for an Overhanging Beam for use in Equation 1.

See the definition of Kf on page 1 of this Technical Note.
Table 1:
Table 1 Digitization of Figure 1 as used by the Program
Point H/L Kf Point H/L Kf Point H/L Kf

1 0 1.57 11 0.6 0.8 21 1.6 0.15
2 0.05 1.57 12 0.7 0.64 22 1.7 0.14
3 0.1 1.56 13 0.8 0.52 23 1.8 0.13
4 0.15 1.55 14 0.9 0.43 24 1.9 0.12
5 0.2 1.53 15 1 0.37 25 2 0.11
6 0.25 1.5 16 1.1 0.31 26 2.1 0.1
7 0.3 1.44 17 1.2 0.27 27 2.2 0.09
8 0.35 1.35 18 1.3 0.22 28 2.3 0.08
9 0.4 1.25 19 1.4 0.2 29 2.4 0.07
10 0.5 1.03 20 1.5 0.17 30 2.5 0.06
Vibration Frequency Technical Note 12 - 3

Murray’s Minimum Damping Requirement

In his paper entitled “Acceptability Criterion for Occupant-Induced Floor Vi-
brations,” Thomas M. Murray (Murray 1981) proposed that a criterion for ac-
ceptable steel beam-concrete slab floor systems subject to human walking
vibrations is as shown in Equation 2:
A sb
D ≥ 35 f + 2.5 Eqn. 2
Neff
where,
D = Damping ratio, percent critical damping inherent in the floor

system, unitless. This item is specified on the Vibration tab in
the composite beam preferences.
Asb = Initial displacement amplitude of a single beam resulting from a

heel drop impact, in.
Neff = The effective number of beams resisting the heel drop impact,
unitless.
f = First natural frequency of the beam in cycles per second as cal-

culated from Equation 1.
If the damping ratio, D, is greater than the right side of Equation 2, the beam
is considered acceptable. Approximate damping ratio values for typical build-
ing configurations are published in the literature (see, for example, Allen
1974; Allen and Rainer 1976; Allen, Rainer and Pernica 1979; Murray 1975;
and Murray 1991). The derivation of the initial displacement amplitude is de-
scribed herein.
Initial Displacement Amplitude

To calculate the initial displacement amplitude of a single beam, Asb, first cal-
culate the time to the maximum initial displacement, tO, in seconds. This time
is calculated using Equation 3.
1
tO = tan-1(0.1πf) Eqn. 3
πf
Technical Note 12 - 4 Murray’s Minimum Damping Requirement

where f is the first natural vibration frequency as determined from Equation 1

and tan-1(0.1πf) is evaluated in radians. After the value of tO has been deter-
mined, the value of Asb is calculated from either Equation 4a or 4b, depending
on the value of tO.
POL3
A sb = (0.1 − tO ) , if tO ≤ 0.05 sec Eqn. 4a
2.4EsItr
POL3 1
A sb = * * VF , if tO > 0.05 sec Eqn. 4b
2.4EsItr 2πf
where,
VF = 2 [1 - 0.1πf sin(0.1πf ) − cos(0.1πf )] + (0.1πf )

2
Eqn. 4c
In Equation 4c, the terms sin(0.1πf) and cos(0.1πf) are evaluated in radians.
In Equations 4a through 4c,
Asb = Initial displacement amplitude of a single beam resulting from a

heel drop impact, in.
PO = Heel drop force, kips. This force is taken as 0.6 kips.
Es = Steel modulus of elasticity, ksi.
Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia for the composite beam

calculated assuming full (100%) composite connection, re-
gardless of the actual percent composite connection, in4. Itr is
calculated using Equation 1 of Composite Beam Design Techni-
cal Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber. If there is no deck
supported by the beam, Ibare is used for this item. Ibare is calcu-
lated using Equation 3 of Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber.
f = First natural frequency of the beam in cycles per second, as

calculated from Equation 1 of this Technical Note.
Murray’s Minimum Damping Requirement Technical Note 12 - 5

Effective Number of Beams Resisting Heel Drop Impact

The program defaults to using an Neff value of 1. Alternatively, specify a value
of Neff on the Vibration tab in the composite beam overwrites, if desired, or
specify that the program calculate Neff using Equation 5 of this Technical Note.
Note:
The program defaults to using an Neff value of 1. You can specify your own value of Neff in
the composite beam overwrites, if desired, or you can specify that the program calculate
Neff based on a user-specified beam spacing using Equation 5.
Note the following about the program's implementation of Equation 5:
• When calculating Neff using Equation 5, the program does not check or
consider the number of parallel, equally spaced identical beams.
• The beam spacing used in Equation 5 is user input in the composite beam
overwrites.
• If the beam considered is a cantilever overhang, the program calculated

value of Neff is always set to 1.0.
• If the beam considered has deck on one side, or less, the program calcu-
lated value of Neff is always set to 1.0.
 sb 
N eff = 2.967 − 0.05776   +
 d avg 
 
3
Eqn. 5
−8
 L4   L 
2.556 * 10   + 0.00010  
 I tr  s 
   b 
where,
Neff = Effective number of beams resisting heel drop impact, unitless.
sb = Beam spacing as input by the user in the composite beam

overwrites, in.
davg = Average depth of concrete slab including the concrete in the

metal deck ribs, in.
Technical Note 12 - 6 Murray’s Minimum Damping Requirement

Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia for the composite beam

calculated assuming full (100%) composite connection regard-
less of the actual percent composite connection, in4. Itr is cal-
culated using Equation 1 of Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber. If there is no deck sup-
ported by the beam, Ibare is used for this item. Ibare is calculated
using Equation 3 of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11
Beam Deflection and Camber.
The depth davg is calculated as:
 wr lefthr left  
 + tc left  beff left + 

 Sr left  

 
  wr righthr right  
  + t c right  beff right 
 Sr right 
   
davg =  Eqn. 6
beff left + beff right
where,
wr = Average width of metal deck ribs, in.
hr = Height of metal deck ribs, in.
Sr = Center-to-center spacing of metal deck ribs, in.
tc = Depth of concrete slab above metal deck ribs or depth of solid

concrete slab, in.
beff = Effective slab width for composite design, in.
Each of the above quantities may be different on the left and right sides of
the beam.
References
Allen, D.L. 1974. Vibrational Behavior of Long Span Floor Slabs. Canadian
Journal of Civil Engineering. Vol. 1, No. 1. September.
References Technical Note 12 - 7

Allen, D. E., and J.H. Rainer. 1976. Vibration Criteria for Long Span Floors.
Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering. Vol. 3, No.2. June.
Allen, D.E., J.H. Rainer, and G. Pernica. 1979. Vibration Criteria for Long Span
Concrete Floors. Vibrations of Concrete Structures. Publication SP-60.
American Concrete Institute. Detroit, MI.
Murray, T.H. 1975. Design to Prevent Floor Vibration. Engineering Journal.

American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Vol. 12, No. 3.
Murray, T.H. 1981. Acceptability Criterion for Occupant-Induced Floor Vibra-

tions. Engineering Journal. American Institute of Steel Construction,
Inc. Vol. 18, No. 2.
Murray, T.M. 1991. Building Floor Vibrations. Engineering Journal. American

Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Vol. 28, No. 3.
Murray, T.M. and W.E. Hendrick. 1977. Floor Vibrations and Cantilevered
Construction. Engineering Journal. American Steel Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. Vol. 14, No. 3.
Naeim, F. 1991. Design Practice to Prevent Floor Vibration. Steel Tips, Techni-
cal Information & Product Service. Structural Steel Educational Coun-
cil. September.
Technical Note 12 - 8 References

COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001
Technical Note 13
Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam
Overview
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates and reports the
distribution of shear studs on a composite beam. It begins by introducing the
term “composite beam segments.” Next it describes how the program calcu-
lates the shear stud distribution for a beam.
Composite Beam Segments

For the purposes of reporting the number of shear studs required on each
composite beam, the program divides the top flange of each composite beam
into segments. The segments extend along the length of the beam. Each
composite beam consists of one or more composite beam segments.
Note:
When the program designs a composite beam, it reports the required number of
shear studs in each composite beam segment. Therefore, it is very important that you
understand the explanation in this Technical Note describing how composite beam seg-
ments are defined.
A composite beam segment may span between any two of the following three
items provided that there is concrete on the beam and the beam top flange is
available over the full length of the segment:
1. The physical end of the beam top flange.
2. Another beam in the program model that frames into the beam being
considered.
3. The physical end of the concrete slab on top of the beam considered.
A composite beam segment cannot exist in locations where concrete is not

over the beam or where the beam top flange has been coped. Figure 1 shows

Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam Composite Beam Design
some examples of composite beam segments. The figure uses the following
notation:
L = Length of composite beam measured from center-of-support to

center-of-support, in.
LCBS = Length of a composite beam segment, in.
Note that a composite beam can have more than one composite beam
segment, as shown in Figure 1c.
Physical End of the Beam Top Flange

When one or both ends of a composite beam segment lie at the end of a
composite beam, the program must assume the exact location of the end(s)
of the beam top flange to calculate a length, LCBS, for the composite beam
segment.
When determining the location of the ends of the beam top flange, the pro-
gram begins by assuming that the top flange extends from the center of the
left support to the center of the right support. It then subtracts a support
distance, S, from each end of the beam and a gap distance, G, from each end
of the beam. The gap distance, G, is always 1/2". The support distance varies
depending on the type of support and the angle at which the beam frames
into the support.
If the end of the beam is supported by a wall or a point support, the support
distance, S, is assumed to be zero. If the end of the beam is supported by
another beam, support distance S is determined as illustrated in Cases 1 and
2 in Figure 2, which show the beam supported by an I-shaped beam. A simi-
lar method is used in the unusual case of other types of support beams.
If the end of the beam is supported by a column, S is determined as illus-

trated in Cases 3, 4 and 5 in Figure 1, which show the beam supported by an
I-shaped column. A similar method is used for box columns and in the very
unusual case of some other column shape.
Technical Note 13 - 2 Composite Beam Segments

Composite Beam Design Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam
LCBS
a) LCBS for Beam Between Two Columns
LCBS
b) LCBS for Beam Between Two Girders
Figure 1:
LCBS LCBS LCBS
Examples of Composite L
Beam Segments, LCBS.
c) LCBS when Beams Frame into Considered Beam
End of
slab
LCBS
d) LCBS when Slab Ends in Beam Span
Composite Beam Segments Technical Note 13 - 3

Column
S G θ
am
S
Beam Be
Girder
Girder
G
G
Beam
S
bf bf bf
S= 2 S = 2sinθ S= 2
G = 0.5" G = 0.5" G = 0.5"
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
Beam
Column
θ
S G Be
am
S
G
Column d bfsinθ + dcosθ
S= S= 2 , θ ≤ 90°
2
G = 0.5" G = 0.5"
Case 4 Case 5
Notes:
1. S is the support distance.
2. G is the gap distance.
3. If a beam is supported by a wall or a point support, the program assumes that the
dimension S is 0".
4. The dimension bf in Cases1 and 2 is the top flange width of the supporting girder.
5. The dimension bf in Cases 3 and 5 is the flange width of the supporting column
(dimension parallel to the local 3-axis). If the two flanges have different widths, the
larger flange width is used.
6. The dimension d in Cases 4 and 5 is the depth of the supporting column
(dimension parallel to the local 2-axis).
Figure 2: Examples of Support Distance, S, and Gap Distance, G.
Technical Note 13 - 4 Composite Beam Segments

In the unusual case of some other column shape, the program draws a
bounding rectangle around the shape. The sides of the rectangle are parallel
to the local 2- and 3-axes of the shape. The beam is assumed to connect to
the center of the bounding rectangle. The dimensions of the edges of the
rectangle are assumed to be bf and d, where bf is the dimension parallel to
the local 3-axis and d is the dimension parallel to the local 2-axis.
Distribution of Shear Studs Within a Composite Beam Segment

The program always assumes a uniform intensity of shear studs within a
composite beam segment. This is a convenient assumption that in some cases
may lead to a slightly conservative number of shear studs.
How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam

This section describes how the program calculates the shear stud distribution
on a beam.
When determining the distribution of shear studs on a composite beam, the

program considers the following output stations:
1. The output station with the maximum positive moment.
2. Any output station with a positive moment greater than 0.999 times
the maximum positive moment.
3. Any output station that has a point load applied to it for any load case
defined in the program. Even if the load case with the point load is not
used in the design load combinations for composite beam design, the
program will still consider the output station associated with the point
load when it determines the shear stud distribution. It will not, how-
ever, in any way explicitly consider the loads in that unused load case
when determining the shear stud distribution.
At each considered output station, the program begins by determining the

distances L1 left and L1 right. These are illustrated in Figure 3 for a typical com-
posite beam with positive moment only and with a concrete slab over metal
deck along its entire length. The following notation is used in the figure:
How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam Technical Note 13 - 5

bf 7.005 Output station located bf 9.990

S= = = 3.50 in 10 feet from the left S= = = 5.00 in
2 2 2 2
end of the beam
G = 0.5 in G = 0.5 in
W18X40
W24X55 W27X94
4.00 in L1 left = 116.00 in L1 right = 234.50 in 5.50 in
L = 30 ft = 360 in
Figure 3: Illustration of L1 left and L1 right
L = Length of composite beam measured from center-of-support

to center-of-support, in.
L1 left = Distance from the output station considered to the closest

point of zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange,
or physical end of the concrete slab on the left side of the
output station considered, in.
L1 right = Distance from the output station considered to the closest

point of zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange,
or physical end of the concrete slab on the right side of the
output station considered, in.
Next, the program calculates the number of shear studs, N, required within
the lengths L1 left and L1 right. This is a code-specific calculation and is described
in AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design Technical Note 26 Calculation of the
Number of Shear Studs and AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 39 Shear Connectors.
The program works along the beam from left to right, making calculations at
each considered output station along the way. These calculations are de-
scribed later in this Technical Note. When there is more than one composite
Technical Note 13 - 6 How the Program Distributes Shear Studs on a Beam

beam segment along the beam, the program must also work back along the
beam from right to left, again making calculations at each considered output
station along the way, after finishing the pass from left to right.
When the program completes the necessary calculations at each considered

output station, it has determined the required uniformly spaced shear studs in
each composite beam segment along the beam based on strength considera-
tions. If the calculated number of studs is then found to be less than the
minimum required number of studs on the beam, the program increases the
number of studs on the beam accordingly. This check is described later in the
subsection entitled "Minimum and Maximum Number of Shear Studs in a
Composite Beam Segment."
The program also checks if the number of shear studs required based on
strength considerations or minimum stud requirements actually fit on the
beam. This check is described in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 14
The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment. If the re-
quired number of studs does not fit on the beam, the program considers the
beam to be inadequate.
In the following description of the calculations the program performs as it

steps along the beam and then back again, the terms LCBSn and NCBSn are
used. LCBS is the length of a composite beam segment and NCBS is the number
of uniformly spaced shear studs required in a composite beam segment. The
n is the composite beam segment number. The leftmost composite beam
segment is always LCBS1 and the numbering of composite beam segments then
proceeds in order toward the right end of the beam.
The values we are ultimately interested in are the NCBSn values. Note that the
final NCBSn values calculated are the values of interest. All other NCBSn values
are intermediate values.
Also in the equations used (Equations 1 through 4d) note that NCBSx Prev is the
value of NCBSx calculated at the previously considered output station. Finally
the term Roundup used in Equations 1 through 5 means to calculate the indi-
cated quantity and round it up to the next integer.

Equations Used When the Program Works from Left to Right

When the program is working from left to right along the beam, the equation
used to calculate NCBSn depends on the location of the output station consid-
ered.
Output Station in Composite Beam Segment 1

When working along the beam from left to right and the output station con-
sidered falls in composite beam segment 1, or at the right end of composite
beam segment 1, Equation 1 is used to determine the value of NCBS1. Note
that when there is only one composite beam segment along the beam, Equa-
tion 1 is the equation that is used at each considered output station.
NCBS1 =
  N N   Eqn. 1
Roundup Max  ,  * L CBS1  ≥ NCBS1 Prev
  L 1 left L 1 right  
 
Values of NCBSn where n > 1 (i.e., values of NCBS for composite beam seg-
ments 2, 3, etc.) are not applicable and thus not calculated at these stations
when working along the beam from left to right.
Note:
In the term NCBS1, the "1" denotes composite beam segment 1.
Output Station in Composite Beam Segment n, n > 1

The equations in this subsection are used when the output station considered
falls in composite beam segment n, where n > 1, and the program is working
from left to right along the beam. Note that if the output station considered
coincides with the right end of composite beam segment n, the output station
is assumed to be in composite beam segment n (when you are working along
the beam from left to right).
Equation 2a applies for composite beam segments i, where i is an integer less

than n.
 N 
NCBSi = Roundup  * L CBSi  ≥ NCBSi Prev Eqn. 2a
 L 1 left 
 

Equations 2b and 2c apply for composite beam segment n.
n −1 n −1
N
If
L 1 left
* ∑
i =1
L CBSi < ∑N
i =1
CBSi , use Equation 2b to calculate NCBSn. Otherwise
use Equation 2c to calculate NCBSn.
NCBSn =
 n −1 
 N-
 i =1
∑
NCBSi 
 Eqn. 2b
Roundup  n −1
* L CBSn  ≥ NCBSn Prev
 
 L 1 left −
 i =1
∑
L CBSi 

 N 
NCBSn = Roundup  * L CBSn  ≥ NCBSn Prev Eqn. 2c
 L 1 left 
 
When i > n, values of NCBSi are not applicable and thus are not calculated at
those stations when working along the beam from left to right.
Equations Used When the Program Works from Right to Left

Recall that it is only necessary for the program to work back along the beam
from right to left if there is more than one composite beam segment along
the length of the beam. When the program is working back along the beam
from right to left, the equation used to calculate NCBSn again depends on the
location of the output station considered.
Output Station in Rightmost Composite Beam Segment

The equations in this subsection are used when working back along the beam
from right to left and the output station considered falls in the right-most
composite beam segment, or at the left end of the right-most composite
beam segment. For the right-most composite beam segment:
NCBS rightmost =
  N N  
Roundup Max  , * L CBS rightmost  , Eqn. 3a
 
  L 1 left L 1 right  
NCBS rightmost ≥ NCBS rightmost prev

For other composite beam segments that are not the right-most composite
beam segment, Equation 3b applies. In Equation 3b, i represents the com-
posite beam segment number.
NCBSi = NCBSi Prev Eqn. 3b
Output Station Not in Rightmost Composite Beam Segment

The equations in this subsection apply when you are working back along the
beam from right to left. (Note that this implies that there is more than one
composite beam segment along the beam.) In this section, assume that the
output station considered falls within (or at the left end of) composite beam
segment n.
Equation 4a applies for composite beam segments i, where i is an integer

greater than n. For example, if the output station considered falls in compos-
ite beam segment 2, Equation 4a applies to composite beam segments 3, 4,
etc.
 N 
NCBSi = Roundup  * L CBSi  ≥ NCBSi Prev Eqn. 4a
 L1 right 
 
Equations 4b and 4c apply for composite beam segment n. For example, if the
output station considered falls in composite beam segment 2, Equations 4b
and 4c apply to composite beam segment 2 only.
rightmost rightmost
N
If
L1 right
* ∑L
i = n +1
CBSi < ∑N
i = n +1
CBSi use Equation 4b to calculate NCBSn. Otherwise,
use Equation 4c to calculate NCBSn.
NCBSn =
 rightmost 
 N-

i =n +1
NCBSi ∑ 
 Eqn. 4b
Roundup  rightmost
* L CBSn  ≥ NCBSn Prev
 
 L 1 right −

L CBSi
i =n +1
∑ 

 N 
NCBSn = Roundup  * L CBSn  ≥ NCBSn Prev Eqn. 4c
 L 1 right 
 

Equation 4d applies for composite beam segments i, where i is an integer less

than n. For example, if the output station considered falls in composite beam
segment 2, Equation 4d applies to composite beam segment 1.
N CBSi = N CBSi Prev Eqn. 4d
Minimum and Maximum Number of Shear Studs in a Composite Beam Segment

After the number of shear studs required in a composite beam segment has
been calculated using the procedure described in the previous section, the
program checks that the number of studs is not less than the required mini-
mum. This required minimum, MSCBS, is calculated based on the maximum
longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the length of the beam, MaxLS,
which is specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites.
This calculations is shown in Equation 5.
 L 
MS CBS = Roundup  CBS  Eqn. 5
 MaxLS 
The program also checks that the number of studs required in a composite
beam segment does not exceed the number that can actually fit in the seg-
ment. Composite Beam Design Technical Note 14 The Number of Shear Studs
that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment describes how the program determines
the maximum number of shear studs that can fit into a composite beam seg-
ment.
Note:
The minimum number of shear studs required in a composite beam segment is calcu-
lated based on the maximum longitudinal spacing of shear studs specified on the Shear
Studs tab in the overwrites.
A Note About Multiple Design Load Combinations

When there are multiple design load combinations on a composite beam, the
program determines the stud distribution separately for each design load
combination and then uses an intelligent algorithm to determine the final stud
distribution that satisfies all design load combinations.
As an example, consider a beam with four composite beam segments (CBS1

through CBS4) and two separate design load combinations (1 and 2). Figure
4a shows the stud distribution obtained for the first design load combination
A Note About Multiple Design Load Combinations Technical Note 13 - 11

and Figure 4b shows the stud distribution obtained for the second design load
combination. Note that the term NCBS in the figure denotes the number of
shear studs in the corresponding composite beam segment.
Figure 4c shows the final stud distribution that reports for this beam. Note
that the intelligent algorithm allows the program to shift one of the five shear
studs required in composite beam segment 2 for design load combination 1
out into composite segment 1.
CBS1 CBS2 CBS3 CBS4

NCBS = 5 NCBS = 5 NCBS = 5 NCBS = 5
a) Shear Stud Distribution for Design Load Combination 1
CBS1 CBS2 CBS3 CBS4

b) Shear Stud Distribution for Design Load Combination 2
CBS1 CBS2 CBS3 CBS4

c) Final Shear Stud Distribution Reported by the Program
Figure 4: Example for Shear Stud Distribution When Multiple Design Load
Combinations Are Considered.
Technical Note 13 - 12 A Note About Multiple Design Load Combinations

Technical Note 14
Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a
Composite Beam Segment
General
Composite beam segments are defined in "Composite Beam Segments" of
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a
Composite Beam. In short, a composite beam segment spans between any of
the following: (1) physical end of the beam top flange, (2) another beam
framing into the beam being considered, (3) physical end of the concrete slab
on top of the beam. When the program designs a composite beam, it reports
the required number of uniformly spaced shear studs in each composite beam
segment.
Tip:
It is very important that you understand how the program defines composite beam seg-
ments. See "Composite Beam Segments" of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13
Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam for more information.
For a beam section to be adequate in the program Composite Beam Design

postprocessor, the stresses and deflections for the beam must be less than
the allowable stresses and deflections, and the number of shear studs re-
quired in each composite beam segment must be less than or equal to the
maximum number of shear studs that can fit in the composite beam segment.
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates the maximum
number of shear studs that fit in a composite beam segment.
The program uses the same process to determine the number of shear con-
nectors that can fit on a composite beam when there is a solid slab with no
metal deck and when the deck ribs span parallel to the beam span. The pro-
gram uses a different process when the deck ribs span perpendicular to the
beam. These conditions are described in the next two sections.

Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment Composite Beam Design
Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam Span

When there is a solid slab with no metal deck, or when there is metal deck
and the metal deck ribs are assumed to be oriented parallel to the beam
span, the program uses the following process to determine the number of
shear studs that can be placed within a composite beam segment. See "Com-
posite Beam Segments" of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of
Shear Studs on a Composite Beam for a definition of a composite beam segment.
Note:
The number of shear studs that can fit in a row across the beam top flange may be lim-
ited by the width of the beam top flange, by the width of the deck ribs, or by the Max
Studs per Row item specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites.
1. The program determines the number of shear studs that can fit in a single
row across the width of the top flange of the beam. When there is a solid
slab (no metal deck), the number of shear studs is limited by the width or
thickness of the beam flange (item 1a below), or by the "Max Studs per
Row" item specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam over-
writes. When the deck spans parallel to the beam, the number of shear
studs may be limited by the width or thickness of the beam flange (item
1a below), the width of the metal deck rib (item 1b below), or by the "Max
Studs per Row" item specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite
beam overwrites. Following is a description of each of these limits:
a. When checking the number of shear studs that fit ≥ ds & ≥ 1"
across the width of the beam flange, the program as-
sumes that the studs are centered about the center-
line (web) of the beam and that the center of a shear
stud can be no closer than ds or 1 inch, whichever is
larger, to the edge of the beam flange. This is illus-
trated in the sketch to the right.
In the preceding paragraph and the sketch (above right), ds is the di-
ameter of the shear stud. The clearance requirement means that the
minimum clear distance from the face of a shear stud to the edge of
the beam flange is equal to one-half of a shear stud diameter. For
shear studs less than 1" in diameter (typically they are 3/4" in diame-
ter), the program clearance is slightly more than one-half of a shear
Technical Note 14 - 2 Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam Span
Composite Beam Design Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment
stud diameter. This clear distance is provided by the program to allow

for adequate welding of the shear stud.
b. When checking the number of shear studs

that fit within a metal deck rib, the program
hr
assumes that the studs and deck rib are
≥ (ds + hr/4) ≥ (ds + hr/4)
centered about the centerline (web) of the
beam and that the center of a shear stud wr
can be no closer than ds + hr/4 to the edge

of the beam flange. This is illustrated in the
sketch to the right.
In the preceding paragraph and the sketch, ds is the diameter of the

shear stud and hr is the height of the metal deck ribs. The wr dimen-
sion in the sketch is the average width of the deck ribs. The spacing
between the shear studs is the “Min Tran. Spacing” item specified on
the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam design overwrites. The
default value for this shear stud spacing is 4ds.
The dimension ds + hr/4 is derived by assuming that the slope of the

sides of the metal deck ribs is 2 to 1 and that the clear distance from
the face of the shear stud to the point where the edge of the deck rib
starts to rise is equal to one-half of a shear stud diameter. This clear
distance is provided by the program to allow for adequate welding of
the shear stud.
Regardless of the number of studs calculated to fit across the width of

the beam flange in items 1a or 1b above, the program does not use a
number of studs larger than the “Max Studs per Row” item specified
on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam design overwrites.
2. The program determines the number of rows of shear studs that can fit
between the two considered points on the beam top flange. This number
of rows is controlled by the “Min Long Spacing” item specified on the
Shear Studs tab in the composite beam design overwrites.
3. The program multiplies the maximum number of shear studs in a single

row, determined in item 1, by the number of rows of studs that can fit in a
composite beam segment, determined in item 2, to calculate the maxi-
mum number of studs that can fit in the composite beam segment.
Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam Span Technical Note 14 - 3
Tip:
Modify the default minimum transverse and longitudinal shear stud spacing
using the composite beam overwrites.
Figure 1 is a flowchart that illustrates the details of how the program calcu-
lates the maximum number of shear studs that fit in a composite beam seg-
ment when there is a solid slab or when the span of the metal deck is parallel
to the beam span.
The term "Int" in the flowchart means to calculate the indicated quantity and
round the result down to the nearest integer. The definitions of the variables
used in the flowchart are:
tf-top = Thickness of beam top flange, in.
ds = Diameter of a shear stud connector, in.
SPRmax = Maximum number of shear studs that can fit in one row
across the top flange of a composite beam, unitless.
Temp = Temporary variable equal to the minimum of the 2 or 3 items

specified in the parenthesis, in. The items specified are sepa-
rated by commas.
bf-top = Width of beam top flange, in.
wr = Average width of metal deck rib, in.
hr = Height of the metal deck rib, in.
MTS = Minimum transverse spacing of shear studs across the beam

top flange as specified on the Shear Studs tab in the compos-
ite beam overwrites, in.
MSPR = Maximum shear studs per row across the beam top flange as
specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam
overwrites, unitless.
Technical Note 14 - 4 Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam Span
Yes
Start ds SPRmax = 1
Here
Is t f − top < ?
2.5
No
Yes
Is this a solid slab (i.e., no Temp = Minimum of (bf-top -2ds, bf-top -2)
metal deck)?
No
Temp = Minimum of (bf-top -2ds, wr - 2ds - 0.5hr, bf-top -2)
 Temp 
SPR max = Int  + 1 ≤ MSPR
 MTS 
L − MLS  L 
RSmax = Int  CBS + 1 = Int  CBS 
 MLS   MLS 
NSmax = SPRmax * RSmax
Figure 1: Flowchart of the Method Used to Determine Maximum Number

of Shear Studs that Can Fit within a Composite Beam Segment
When There is a Solid Slab or the Metal Deck Ribs Are Oriented
Parallel to the Beam Span
The term "Int" in the flowchart means to calculate the indicated quantity
and round the result down to the nearest integer.
RSmax = Maximum number of rows of shear studs that can fit in a

composite beam segment, unitless.
LCBS = Length of a composite beam segment, in.
MLS = Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the length

of the beam as specified on the Shear Studs tab in the com-
posite beam overwrites, in.
NSmax = Maximum number of shear studs that fit in a composite beam

segment, unitless.
Note that in the flowchart formulation, the studs located closest to the ends of
the composite beam segment are located no closer than MLS/2 to the ends of
the composite beam segment. This helps prevent possible double-counting of
shear studs in adjacent composite beam segments.
Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Beam Span Technical Note 14 - 5
Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Beam Span

When the deck ribs are oriented perpendicular to the beam span, the program
limits the number of rows of shear studs across the width of the beam flange
in each metal deck rib to one. For a typical case with 3/4" diameter shear
studs and an average width of the deck rib equal to 6 inches, it is difficult to
fit more than one row of shear studs in a deck rib and still have adequate
edge clearances. To have more than one row of shear studs in a single deck
rib, specify a user-defined shear connector pattern for the beam.
The process used to determine the number of shear studs that can fit in a
composite beam segment when the metal deck is assumed to span perpen-
dicular to the beam span is described as follows.
1. The program determines the number of shear studs that can fit in a single
row across the width of the top flange of the beam. This number of shear
studs is limited by either the width or thickness of the beam flange, or by
the "Max Studs per Row" item specified on the Shear Studs tab in the
composite beam overwrites.
When checking the number of shear studs that fit ≥ ds & ≥ 1"
across the width of the beam flange, the program as-
sumes that the studs are centered about the centerline
(web) of the beam and that the center of a shear stud
can be no closer than either ds or 1 inch, whichever is
larger, to the edge of the beam flange. This is illus-
trated in the sketch to the right.
In the preceding paragraph and the sketch, ds is the diameter of the shear
stud. The clearance requirement means that the minimum clear distance
from the face of a shear stud to the edge of the beam flange is equal to
one-half of a shear stud diameter. For shear studs less than 1" in diame-
ter (typically they are 3/4" in diameter), the program clearance is slightly
more than one-half of a shear stud diameter. This clear distance is pro-
vided by the program to allow for adequate welding of the shear stud.
Technical Note 14 - 6 Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Beam Span

Length of composite beam segment

Sr
Sr - wr wr
≥ 0.5 wr for shear stud to

be assumed to fit in the
Midheight of metal deck rib down flute
is assumed to align with
one end of the composite
beam segment as shown.
Figure 2: Illustration of Some of the ETABS Assumptions Used to

Determine the Number of Available Deck Ribs
Note:
If the diameter of the shear studs exceeds 2.5 times the thickness of the beam top flange,
the shear studs can only be placed directly over the beam web.
Some codes require that if the thickness of the beam flange is less than
the diameter of the stud divided by 2.5, the shear studs must be located
on top of the beam web. This means that only one stud can fit across the
width of the beam flange if tf < ds/2.5. The program checks the top flange
thickness for this requirement when determining the number of studs that
fit across the width of the beam flange.
2. The program determines how many deck ribs are available to receive
shear studs within the length of the composite beam segment. To deter-
mine this, the program makes several assumptions, which are described
as follows:
a. The midheight of a side of the metal deck rib is assumed to align with
one end of the composite beam segment, as shown in Figure 2. In
other words, one end of the composite beam segment is always as-
sumed to start with an "up" flute.
b. If one-half or more of the width of a metal deck rib down flute is within
the length of the composite beam segment, the program assumes that
Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Beam Span Technical Note 14 - 7

the deck rib is available to receive shear studs. This is illustrated in

Figure 2.
c. The minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the length of

the beam as specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam
overwrites is assumed to apply when the deck ribs run perpendicular
to the beam span. In some cases, this could cause deck ribs that are
within the length of the composite beam segment to be unavailable to
receive shear studs.
3. The program multiplies the maximum number of shear studs in a single

row across the beam flange, determined as described in item 1, by the
number of deck ribs within the length of the composite beam segment
that are available to receive shear studs, determined as described in item
2, to calculate the maximum number of studs that can fit in the composite
beam segment.
Figure 3 is a flowchart that illustrates the details of how the program calcu-
lates the maximum number of shear studs that fit in a composite beam seg-
ment when the span of the metal deck is perpendicular to the beam span.
The term "Int" in the flowchart means to calculate the indicated quantity and
round the result down to the nearest integer. The definitions of the variables
used in the flowchart are the same as those used in the Figure 1 flowchart,
with the following additions:
Sr = Center-to-center spacing of metal deck ribs, in.
NR = Available number of metal deck ribs within the composite beam

segment that are available to receive shear studs, unitless.
Different Deck Type or Orientation on Beam Sides

When a different type or orientation of the metal deck exists on the two sides
of the beam, the program determines the maximum number of shear studs
that fits in the composite beam segment for each of the two deck
types/orientations. The smaller maximum value obtained is used as the
maximum number of shear studs that fit within the composite beam segment.
Technical Note 14 - 8 Different Deck Type or Orientation on Beam Sides

Yes
Start ds SPRmax = 1
Here
Is t f − top < ?
2.5
No
 b f − top − 2d s 
No SPR max = Int  + 1 ≤ MSPR
Is ds ≤ 1" ? MTS
 
Yes
 b f − top − 2 
SPR max = Int  + 1 ≤ MSPR
 MTS 
 
 
L − Sr + 0.5w r 
NR = Int  CBS + 1

 Int  MLS  
  S + 1 Sr 
  r  
NSmax = SPRmax * NR
Figure 3: Flowchart of the Method to Determine the Maximum

Number of Shear Studs that Can Fit Within a Composite
Beam Segment When the Metal Deck Ribs Are Oriented
Perpendicular to the Beam Span
The term "Int" in the flowchart means to calculate the indicated
quantity and round the result down to the nearest integer.
Different Deck Type or Orientation on Beam Sides Technical Note 14 - 9

Technical Note 15
User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns
This Technical Note explains how to specify the shear stud pattern yourself
rather than having the program determine the distribution of shear studs for
you. This can be useful if you are checking an existing building or if there is a
certain shear stud pattern that you want; for example, one shear stud per
foot of beam length.
Specifying a User-Defined Shear Connector Pattern

User-defined shear connector patterns are specified on the Shear Studs tab in
the composite beam overwrites. See AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 18 Overwrites or AISC-LRFD93 Composite Beam Design Tech-
nical Note 31 Overwrites for more information.
Tip:
You can use user-defined shear connector patterns to specify shear connectors in exist-
ing construction.
The composite beam overwrites option enable you to specify a uniform spac-
ing of shear studs located on top of the beam web and centered along the
length of the beam top flange, or to specify a starting and ending point for a
beam section and the number of studs that are uniformly spaced within the
beam section. Use one of these options or use the two options together to
define the studs on a beam.
Important note: The term beam section is purposely used here to differen-
tiate it from a composite beam segment. Do not confuse composite beam
sections and composite beam segments. They are two entirely different items.
Composite beam segments are described in "Composite Beam Segments" of
Composite Beam. Beam sections are simply an arbitrary length of the beam,
defined by a starting and ending location over which you specify a certain
number of uniformly spaced shear studs.
Specifying a User-Defined Shear Connector Pattern Technical Note 15 - 1

User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns Composite Beam Design
The following two sections describe the two methods of specifying user-
defined shear studs.
Uniformly Spaced Shear Studs Over the Length of the

Beam
When you specify uniformly spaced user-defined shear studs over the length
of the beam, the program treats the shear studs as if they were all in a single
line along the beam web and disregards any checks for minimum longitudinal
spacing requirements.
Figure 1 illustrates uniformly spaced user-defined shear studs over the length
of the beam. These shear studs are specified by inputting the spacing for the
Uniform Spacing item on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam over-
writes. Note the following about these shear studs:
1. The shear studs are assumed to occur over the length of the top flange
of the beam. In most cases, this is shorter than the center-of-support
to center-of-support length of the beam.
2. There is assumed to be one shear stud per row. To use this option to
specify 2 studs every 12 inches, specify a spacing of 6 inches. The 6-
inch spacing gives you the closest equivalent to two studs every 12
inches.
Tip:
Modify the default minimum longitudinal shear stud spacing in the composite
beam overwrites.
3. The program determines the exact distance from the end of the beam
top flange (or end of the concrete slab) to the first shear stud, as
shown in Equation 1. In Equation 1 the term "Int" means to calculate
the indicated quantity and round the result down to the nearest inte-
ger, and the term "Specified Spacing" is the spacing input in the com-
posite beam overwrites for the Uniform Spacing item.
 TFL - MLS 
TFL - Int   * Specified Spacing
 Specified Spacing 
ED = Eqn. 1
2
Technical Note 15 - 2 Uniformly Spaced Shear Studs Over the Length of the Beam
Composite Beam Design User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns
Greater than or equal to Shear studs are centered

MLS / 2 and less than one- along the length of the Specified uniform
half the specified uniform beam top flange shear connector
shear connector spacing spacing
plus MLS / 2
Elevation
End distance Shear studs at specified uniform spacing centered along length of beam top flange End distance
is the same is the same
at each end at each end
Plan View of Top Flange
Figure 1: Uniformly Spaced User-Defined Shear Connectors Over the

Length of the Beam Specified Using the Uniform Spacing Item on
the Shear Studs Tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites
where,
ED = Distance from the end of the beam top flange (or end of
the concrete slab) to the first shear stud, in.
TFL = The length of the beam top flange available to receive

shear studs, in. This length is typically determined by
subtracting the support distance and the gap distance at
each end of the beam from the center-of-support to cen-
ter-of-support length of the beam. In special cases, you
may subtract an additional distance if the slab does not
exist over some portion of the beam.
MLS = Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the

length of the beam, as specified on the Shear Studs tab in
the composite beam overwrites, in.
Uniformly Spaced Shear Studs Over the Length of the Beam Technical Note 15 - 3
After the shear studs at the end of the beam top flange (or end of the
concrete slab) have been located using Equation 1, the program knows
the exact location of each uniformly spaced shear stud along the length of
the beam.
In Equation 1, the studs at the ends of the beam are assumed to be no

closer than MLS/2 from the end of the beam top flange. The studs at the
ends of the beam are also assumed to be no farther than (MLS + Speci-
fied Spacing)/2 from the end of the beam top flange. Finally, the distance
from the studs at the ends of the beam to the end of the beam top flange
is assumed to be the same at each end of the beam.
Similar to the preceding, if the concrete slab stops before the end of the
beam, the first shear stud at that end of the beam is assumed to occur at
a distance not less than MLS/2 from the end of the slab and not more
than (MLS + the specified uniform spacing)/2 from the end of the slab.
Additional Shear Studs in Specified Sections of Beam

When you specify the starting and ending points of a beam section and the
number of uniformly spaced shear studs in the section, the program treats
the shear connectors as if they were all in a single line and disregards any
checks for minimum longitudinal spacing requirements.
Defining Additional Beam Sections

To define your own additional beam sections for specifying shear studs, sim-
ply specify a distance along the beam that locates the starting point of the
beam section, specify a second (longer) distance along the beam that locates
the ending point of the beam section, and then specify the total number of
uniformly spaced shear studs that fall within the specified beam section.
Distances can be specified as absolute (actual) distances or relative distances,

both measured from the I-end of the beam. A relative distance to a point is
the absolute distance to that point divided by the length of the beam meas-
ured from the center-of- support to center-of-support.
Technical Note 15 - 4 Additional Shear Studs in Specified Sections of Beam

Beam section length = 110"
5" 10 spaces @ 10" = 100" 5"
Left end of Right end of

beam section beam section
Figure 2: Assumed Spacing of User-Defined Shear Studs
Tip:
Do not confuse beam sections with composite beam segments. See the section entitled
"Specifying a User-Defined Shear Connector Pattern" earlier in this Technical Note for
more information.
Use the following procedure in the composite beam overwrites on the Shear
Studs tab (display using Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
View/Revise Overwrites command) to define shear studs in additional
beam sections:
1. Check the box next to the "User Pattern?" overwrite item, then click in
the cell to the right and select Yes from the drop-down box.
2. Check the box next to "No. Additional Sections" and then click in the
cell to the right.
3. The Additional Sections form appears. In this form:

b. In the Define Additional Beam Sections area, input distances from

end-I in the Start and End boxes and input a total number of uni-
Additional Shear Studs in Specified Sections of Beam Technical Note 15 - 5

formly spaced studs in the No. Studs box. The distance in the End
box must be larger than that in the Start box.
c. Click the Add button to add the additional beam section.
4. Repeat step 3 as many times as required to define additional beam

sections.
5. To modify an existing additional beam section specification, do the

following:
a. Highlight the item to be modified in the Define Additional Beam

Sections area. Note that the highlighted distances and number of
studs appear in the edit boxes at the top of the area.
b. Modify the distances and number of studs in the edit boxes as de-
sired.
c. Click the Modify button to modify the additional beam section.
6. To delete an existing additional beam section specification, do the fol-

lowing:
a. Highlight the item to be deleted in the Define Additional Beam Sec-

tions area. Note that the highlighted distances and number of studs
appear in the edit boxes at the top of the area.
b. Click the Delete button to delete the additional beam section.
7. Click the OK button and you return to the Composite Beam Overwrites
form. Note that the No. Additional Sections item is automatically up-
dated by the program to reflect the beam sections modifications that
you specified.
Note the following about the shear studs specified for additional beam sec-
tions:
The program assumes that the specified shear studs occur in a single line
along the beam web within the specified length of the beam section. It
further assumes that the end shear studs in the beam section are located
one-half of the equal space from ends of the specified beam section.
These assumptions mean that the spacing of shear studs in a beam sec-

tion is equal to the length of the beam top flange available to receive
shear studs in the beam section divided by the specified number of shear
studs. See Figure 2 for an example.
The figure shows a beam section that is 110 inches long. Assume that 11
shear studs have been specified for this beam section. The spacing of
shear studs in the beam section is equal to the beam section length di-
vided by the number of studs, that is, 110"/11 studs = 10"/stud. The end
studs are located one-half of a space, that is, 10"/2 = 5", from each end
of the beam section.
Note:
The program does not check shear stud spacing requirements for user-defined shear
stud patterns.
Assume you specify a beam section at the end of a beam and the beam
top flange does not exist over a portion of that beam section length. This
can often happen because, as described “Physical End of the Beam Top
Flange” of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of
Shear Studs on a Composite Beam, the program subtracts a support dis-
tance and a gap distance from the end of the beam when computing the
length of the beam top flange.
In that case, the program places all of the specified shear studs on the
portion of the top flange that does exist. See Figure 3 for an illustration.
The figure shows a beam section at the end of the beam that is 120
inches long. The end of the beam top flange starts 10 inches from the
specified left end of the beam section. Thus, the actual length of top
flange available for shear studs is 110 inches. Assume that 11 shear studs
have been specified for this beam section.
As previously mentioned, the spacing of shear studs in a beam section is

equal to the length of the beam top flange available to receive shear studs
in the beam section divided by the specified number of shear studs. In
this case, 110"/11 studs = 10"/stud. The end studs are located one-half of
a space, that is 10"/2 = 5", from each end of the beam top flange within
the beam section.
Additional Shear Studs in Specified Sections of Beam Technical Note 15 - 7

Beam section length = 120"
10" Available length of beam top flange = 110"
5" 10 spaces @ 10" = 100" 5"
Left end of Right end of

beam section beam section
Figure 3: Example Showing No Beam Top Flange Over a Portion of the

Specified Beam Section Length
If the beam top flange does not exist over the entire length of the speci-
fied beam section, the program ignores the shear studs that are specified
for that beam section.
Example of a User-Defined Shear Stud Pattern

Refer to the example shown in Figure 4. To specify the actual shear connector
layout shown in Figure 4a, you specify three beam sections. Table 1 shows
how each of the three beam sections should be specified.
Table 1: Specification of Beam Sections in the Example Shown in Figure 4
Beam Section Starting Point Ending Point Number of Studs

1 0' 3.5' 6
2 3.5' 7.5' 4
3 7.5' 11' 6

0.8' 5 spaces @ 0.45' 0.5' 3 spaces @ 1.00' 0.5' 5 spaces @ 0.45' 0.8'
0.225' 0.225' 0.225' 0.225'
b) Program Assumed Shear Connector Layout
3.5' 4' 3.5'

6 shear studs 4 shear studs 6 shear studs
0.8' 0.8'
a) Actual Shear Connector Layout
Figure 4: Example of a User-Defined shear Stud Pattern
Figure 4b illustrates how the program interprets the stud pattern as specified
in Table 1. The location and spacing of shear studs is as described in the
bulleted items in the previous subsection entitled “Defining Additional Beam
Sections.”
How the Program Checks a Beam with User-Defined

Shear Studs
When you define the number and location of shear studs on a beam, the pro-
gram performs flexural design somewhat differently from how it is described
elsewhere in this manual. For flexural design with user-defined shear studs,
the program calculates the percent composite connection (PCC) at each de-
sign output station based on your specified shear stud layout. The program
then calculates the beam section properties for this PCC and derives a flexural
stress ratio (actual stress divided by allowable stress).
How the Program Checks a Beam with User-Defined Shear Studs Technical Note 15 - 9
COMPOSITE BEAM DESIGN AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 16
General and Notation
Introduction to the AISC-ASD89 Series of Technical

Notes
The AISC-ASD89 Composite Beam Design series of Technical Notes describes
in detail the various aspects of the composite beam design procedure that is
used by the program when the user selects the AISC-ASD89 Design Code.
The various notations used in this series are listed herein.
The design is based on loading combinations specified by the user. To facili-

tate the design process, the program provides a set of default load combina-
tions that should satisfy requirements for the design of most building type
structures. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 10 Design Load Com-
binations for more information.
The program also performs the following check, calculation, or analysis pro-
cedures in accordance with AISC-LRFD93 requirements:
Checks the width-to-thickness ratios of the beam flanges and web, and, if it
exists, the cover plate as specified for compact and noncompact sections in
AISC-ASD89 Specification Chapter B, Table B5.1; see Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 19 Width to Thickness Checks.
Calculates the transformed moment of inertia for a composite section, Itr;

see Composite Beam Design AICS-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed
Section Moment of Inertia.
Calculates elastic stresses for positive bending in the steel section and the
concrete slab when there is partial composite connection; see Composite
Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with Partial
Composite Connection.
General and Notation Technical Note 16 - 1

General and Notation Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Determines the allowable bending stresses using the AISC-ASD89 specifi-

cation for composite beams; see Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 22 Allowable Bending Stresses.
Checks the bending stress for AISC-ASD89 design for cases with and with-
out composite action; see Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Note 23 Bending Stress Checks.
Check the beam and reaction for shear for AISC-ASD89 composite beam
design; see Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 24 Beam
Shear.
Defines the program fault allowable shear stud horizontal loads for AISC-
ASD89 composite beam design and provides basic equations used to de-
termine the number of shear studs on the beam; see Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 25 Shear Studs.
Determines the placement of shear studs on a composite beam, including

three example problems; see Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Tech-
nical Note 26 Calculations for Number of Shear Studs . Also see Composite
Beam, Technical Note 14 The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Compos-
ite Beam Segment Composite Beam Design, and Technical Note 15 User-
Defined Shear Stud Patterns Composite Beam Design for more information
about shear stud distribution.
The program also provides input and output data summaries, which are de-
scribed in Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 27 Input
Data and Technical Note 28 Output Details Composite Beam Design AISC-
LRFD93.
Notation
Abare Area of steel beam (plus cover plate if one exists), in2. This
area does not include any contribution from the concrete
slab.
Ac Area of the concrete slab, in2. When the deck span is per-
pendicular to the beam span, this is the area of concrete in
the slab above the metal deck that is above the elastic
Technical Note 16 - 2 General and Notation

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 General and Notation
neutral axis (ENA) of the fully composite beam. When the

deck span is parallel to the beam span, this is the area of
concrete in the slab, including the concrete in the metal
deck ribs, that is above the ENA of the fully composite
beam. This item may be different on the left and right
sides of the beam.
Aelement Area of an element in the composite section, ignoring any

area of concrete that is in tension and ignoring any con-
crete in the metal deck ribs when the metal deck span is
perpendicular to the beam span, in2.
Af Area of compression flange (not including the cover plate,

even if it exists), in2
Agt Gross area along the tension plane of a bolted connection,

in2.
Ans Net area along the shear plane of a bolted connection, in2.
As Area of rolled steel section alone (without the cover plate,

even it one exists), in2
Asb Initial displacement amplitude of a single beam resulting

from a heel drop impact, in.
Asc Cross-sectional area of a shear stud, in2.
Atr Area of an element of the composite beam section, in2.
Cb Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient,

unitless.
Cbot Cope depth at bottom of beam, in. This item is internally

calculated by the program and it may be different at each
end of the beam. It is used in the shear calculations.
Ctop Cope depth at top of beam, in. This item is internally cal-
culated by the program and it may be different at each end
of the beam. It is used in the shear calculations.

D Damping ratio, percent critical damping inherent in the

floor system, unitless. This item is used in checking the
Murray damping requirement.
DL Acronym for deal load.
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete slab, ksi. Note that this

could be different on the left and right sides of the beam.
Also note that this may be different for stress calculations
and deflection calculations. For stress calculations in AISC-
ASD89 design Ec is always based on Equation 1 of Com-
posite Beam Design Technical Note 20 Transformed Section
Moment of Inertia using the f c' value specified in the material
properties for the concrete and assuming that the concrete
weighs 150 pcf regardless of its actual unit weight. This is
consistent with Section I2.2 of the AISC-ASD89 Specifica-
tion.
Es Modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi
ENA Acronym for elastic neutral axis
Fb Allowable bending stress in steel beam, ksi
Fb-bbf Allowable bending stress at the bottom of the beam bot-

tom flange, ksi
Fu Minimum specified tensile strength of the steel beam and

the shear studs, ksi
Fv Allowable shear stress in steel beam, ksi
Fy Minimum specified yield stress of structural steel, ksi
Fycp Minimum specified yield stress of cover plate, ksi.
G Gap distance between face of support and end of top

flange of steel beam, in. The program always takes this
distance as 1/2 inch.
Hs Length of shear stud connector after welding, in.

Ibare Moment of inertia for a steel beam (plus cover plate, if it

exists), in4.
Ieff Effective moment of inertia for a beam about the ENA of a

composite beam with partial composite connection, in4.
I0 Moment of inertia of an element of a steel beam section

taken about its own ENA, in4.
Is Moment of inertia of the steel beam along (not including

cover plate, even if it exists), in4.
Itr Transformed section moment of inertia about ENA of a

composite beam with full (100%) composite connection,
in4.
Kf A unitless coefficient typically equal to 1.57 unless the

beam is the overhanging portion of a cantilever with a
backspan, in which case, Kf is as defined in Figure 1 of
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 12 Beam Vibration,
or the beam is a cantilever that is fully fixed at one end
and free at the other end, in which case Kf is 0.56.
L Center-of-support to center-of-support length of the beam,

in.
Lc Limiting unbraced length for determining allowable bending

stress, in.
LCBS Length of a composite beam segment, in. A composite

beam segment spans between any of the following: (1)
physical end of the beam top flange, (2) another beam
framing into the beam being considered, (3) physical end
of concrete slab. Figure 1 of Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Com-
posite Beam illustrates some typical cases for LCBS.

L1left Distance from an output station to an adjacent point of

zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange, or
physical end of the concrete slab, measured toward the left
end (I-end) of the beam, in.
L1right Distance from an output station to an adjacent point of

zero moment or physical end of the beam top flange, or
physical end of the concrete slab, measured toward the
right end (J-end) of the beam, in.
LL Acronym for live load.
M Moment, kip-in.
MAll Other Moment due to all loads except dead load, kip-in.
MDL Moment due to dead load, kip-in.
Mmax station Maximum moment at any output station for a given design
load combination, kip-in.
Mstation Moment at the output station considered for the design

load combination, kip-in.
M1 Smaller bending moment at the end of the unbraced beam

span, kip-in. This is used when the program calculates the
Cb factor.
M2 Larger bending moment at the end of an unbraced beam

span, kip-in. This is used when the program calculates the
Cb factor.
MaxLS Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the

length of the beam, in. This item is specified on the Shear
Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites.
MLS Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the

length of the beam, in. This item is specified on the Shear
Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites.

MSCBS Minimum required number of shear studs in a composite

beam segment, unitless.
MSPR Maximum shear studs per row across the beam top flange
as specified on the Shear Studs tab in the composite beam
overwrites, unitless.
MTS Minimum transverse spacing of shear studs across the

beam top flange as specified on the Shear Studs tab in the
composite beam overwrites, in.
N The number of shear studs required between an output

station and adjacent points of zero moment or physical end
of the beam top flange, or physical end of the concrete
slab, unitless. This number is based on Equation 6, Equa-
tion 7, or Equation 9 of Composite Beam Design AISC-
ASD89 Technical Note 25 Shear Studs.
NCBS The number of uniformly distributed shear studs that the

program requires for a composite beam segment, unitless.
Neff The effective number of beams resisting a heel drop im-

pact, unitless. This item is used in the vibration calcula-
tions.
Nr Number of shear stud connectors in one metal deck rib,

but not more than 3 in the calculations even if more than 3
studs exist in the rib, unitless. The program uses whatever
value is specified for the Max Studs per Row item on the
Shear Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites for Nr,
unless that value exceeds 3, in which case the program
uses 3.
N1 Number of shear connectors required between the point of

maximum positive moment and adjacent points of zero
moment for the design load combination, unitless.
N2 Number of shear connectors required between a point load

and the nearest point of zero moment for the design load
combination, unitless.

NR Number of metal deck ribs within a composite beam seg-

ment that are available to receive shear studs when the
metal deck span is oriented perpendicular to the beam
span, unitless.
NSmax Maximum number of shear studs that fit in a composite

beam segment, unitless.
PO Heel drop force, kips. This force is taken as 600 pounds

converted to the appropriate units.
PCC Percent composite connection, unitless.
RF Reduction factor for the allowable horizontal load for a

shear stud based on the metal deck and shear stud ge-
ometry, unitless.
RLL Acronym for reduced live load.
RLLF The reduced live load factor for an element, unitless. The
RLLF is multiplied times the unreduced live load to get the
reduced live load.
RSmax Maximum number of rows of shear studs that can fit in a

composite beam segment when there is a solid slab or
when the metal deck span is oriented parallel to the beam
span, unitless.
S Support distance. This is the assumed distance from the

center of the support to the face of the support used to
calculate the available length of the beam top flange.
Sbare Section modulus of the steel beam alone (plus cover plate,
if it exists) referred to the extreme tension fiber, in3.
Seff Effective section modulus of a partially composite beam

referred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel beam
section (including cover plate, if it exists), in3.

Sr Center-to-center spacing of metal deck ribs, in. This item

may be different on the left and the right sides of the
beam.
Ss Section modulus of the steel beam alone (not including

cover plate even if it exists), in3.
St-eff The section modulus for the partial composite section re-
ferred to the top of the effective transformed section, in3.
This item may be different on the left and the right sides of
the beam.
Str Section modulus for the fully (100%) composite trans-

formed section referred to the extreme tension fiber of the
steel section (including cover plate, if it exists), in3. Refer-
ring to Figure 1 of Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite
Connection, Str is calculated using Equation 3 of Composite
Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic
Stresses with Partial Composite Connection.
SDL Acronym for superimposed dead load.
SPRmax Maximum number of shear studs that can fit in one row
across the top flange of a composite beam, unitless.
V Shear force, kips.
Vall Allowable beam shear (end reaction), kips.
Vh Total horizontal shear to be resisted by shear studs be-

tween the point of maximum moment and points of zero
moment for full (100%) composite connection, kips.
V'h Total horizontal shear to be resisted by shear studs be-

tween the point of maximum moment and points of zero
moment for partial composite connection, kips.

W Total load supported by the beam that is considered when

calculating the first natural frequency of the beam, kips.
This is calculated by the program as the sum of all of the
dead load and superimposed dead load supported by the
beam plus a percentage of all of the live load and reducible
live load supported by the beam. The percentage of live
load is specified in the composite beam preferences. The
percentage is intended to estimate the sustained portion of
the live load (about 10% to 25% of the total design live
load).
a3 Whichever is smaller of the distance from the top of the

concrete slab to the ENA or the thickness of the concrete
above the metal deck (or the thickness of a solid slab), tc,
in. This item may be different on the left and right sides of
the beam.
a4 Whichever is smaller of the distance from the top of the

metal deck to the ENA or the height of the metal deck, hr,
in. This item applies when there is metal deck (not a solid
slab) and the ENA falls below the top of the metal deck.
This item may be different on the left and right sides of the
beam.
b Width, in.
bcp Width of cover plate, in.
beff Effective width of concrete flange of composite beam, in.

This item may be different on the left and the right sides of
the beam.
beff par Effective width of concrete flange of composite beam,

when there is partial composite connection, transformed to
an equivalent width of steel (that is, multiplied by Ec / Es),
in. This item may be different on the left and the right
sides of the beam.
bf Width of flange of a rolled steel beam, in.

bf-bot Width of steel beam bottom flange, in.
bf-top Width of steel beam top flange, in.
b1 Smaller of the width of the beam bottom flange and the

width of the cover plate, in.
b2 Projection of the cover plate beyond the edge of the beam

bottom flange, in. See Figure 1 of Composite Beam Design
AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 19 Width to Thickness Checks.
d Depth of steel beam from the top of the beam top flange to
the bottom of the beam bottom flange, in.
davg Average depth of concrete slab, including the concrete in

the metal deck ribs, in.
delement Distance from the ENA of the element considered to the

ENA of the steel beam alone (including cover plate if it ex-
ists), in. Signs are considered for this distance. Elements
located below the ENA of the steel beam alone (including
cover plate if it exists) have a negative distance and those
above have a positive distance.
ds Diameter of a shear stud, in.
f First natural frequency of the beam in cycles per second.
fb Bending stress, ksi.
fbot-bm The maximum tensile stress at the bottom of the bottom

flange of the steel beam, ksi.
fbot-st The maximum tensile stress at the bottom of the steel

section (including cover plate, if it exists), ksi.
fc The maximum concrete compressive stress, ksi.
ftop-st The maximum stress at the top of the steel beam (may be
tension or compression depending on the location of the
ENA), ksi.

fv Shear stress, ksi.
f'c Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi.
g Acceleration of gravity, in/seconds2.
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet of corner ra-

dius for rolled shapes and clear distance between flanges
for other shapes, in.
hr Height of metal deck rib, in.
h *r Height of the metal deck ribs above the elastic neutral axis
(i.e., that is in compression) used for calculating the
transformed section properties, in. Note that this could be
different on the left and right sides of the beam.
If the deck ribs are oriented perpendicular to the beam

span, h *r = 0.
If the deck ribs are oriented parallel to the beam span, one
of the following three items applies:
1. If the ENA is below the metal deck, h *r = hr.
2. If the ENA is within the metal deck, h *r equals the

height of the metal deck above the ENA.
3. If the ENA is above the metal deck, h *r = 0.
kc Unitless factor used in AISC-ASD89 specification Equation

F1-4.
l Laterally unbraced length of the compression flange, in.
lh The distance from the center of a bolt hole to the end of

the beam web, in. The program assumes this distance to
be 1.5 inches as shown in Figure 2 of Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 24 Beam Shear Checks.

lv The distance from the center of the top bolt hole to the top
edge of the beam web (at the cope), in. The program as-
sumes this distance to be 1.5 inches as shown in Figure 2
of Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 24
Beam Shear Checks.
n The number of bolts as determined from Table 1 of Com-

posite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 24 Beam
Shear Checks, unitless.
q Allowable shear load for one shear stud, kips.
rT Radius of gyration of a section comprising the compression

flange plus one-third of the compression web area taken
about an axis in the plane of the web, in. The cover plate,
if it exists, is ignored by the program when calculating r T.
sb Beam spacing, in.
t Thickness, in.
tc Thickness of concrete slab, in. If there is metal deck, this

is the thickness of the concrete slab above the metal deck.
If there is a solid slab, this is the thickness of that slab.
This item may be different on the left and right sides of the
beam.
t *c Height of the concrete slab above the metal deck (or solid
slab) that lies above the elastic neutral axis (i.e., is in
compression) that is used for calculating the transformed
section properties, in. Note that this could be different on
the left and right sides of the beam.
One of the following three items applies:
1. If the ENA is below the top of the metal deck

(bottom of the concrete slab), t *c = tc.
2. If the ENA is within the concrete slab, t *c equals

the height of the concrete slab above the ENA.

3. If the ENA is above the concrete slab, t *c = 0
tcp Thickness of cover plate, in.
tf Thickness of steel beam flange, in.
tf-bot Thickness of steel beam bottom flange, in.
tf-top Thickness of steel beam top flange, in.
tO Time to the maximum initial displacement of a single

beam due to a heel drop impact, seconds.
tw Thickness of steel beam web, in.
wc Weight per unit volume of concrete, kips/in3. This item

may be different on the left and right sides of the beam.
wd Weight per unit area of metal deck, ksi. This item may
be different on the left and right sides of the beam.
wr Average width of the metal deck ribs, in. This item may
ws Weight per unit volume of steel, kips/in3.
y Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the

steel beam section to the ENA of the fully composite
beam, in.
ybare Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the

steel section to the ENA elastic neutral axis of the steel
beam (plus cover plate, if it exists), in.
ye The distance from the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover
plate, if it exists) alone to the ENA of the fully composite
beam, in.
yeff The distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange
to the ENA of a partially composite beam, in.

y1 Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the

steel beam section to the centroid of an element of the
beam section, in.
z Distance from the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover

plate, if it exists) alone to the top of the concrete slab,
in. Note that this distance may be different on the left
and right sides of the beam.
ΣA Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the steel beam

section (including the cover plate, if it exists), in2.
ΣAtr Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the composite

steel beam section, in2.
Σ(Ay1) Sum of the product A times y1 for all of the elements of

the steel beam section (including the cover plate, if it
exists), in3.
Σ(Atry1) Sum of the product Atr times y1 for all of the elements of
the composite steel beam section, in3.
Σ(Ay12) Sum of the product A times y12 for all of the elements of
the steel beam section (including the cover plate, if it
exists), in4.
Σ(Atry12) Sum of the product Atr times y12 for all of the elements of
the composite steel beam section, in4.
ΣIO Sum of the moments of inertia of each element of the

beam section taken about the center of gravity of the
element, in4.
β Unitless factor used in calculating the number of shear

studs between a point load and a point of zero moment
equal to Str/Sbare for full composite connection and
Seff/Sbare for partial composite connection.

Technical Note 17
Preferences
General
The composite beam design preferences are basic assignments that apply to
all composite beams. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Composite
Beam Design command to access the Preferences form where you can view
and revise the composite beam design preferences. The Composite Beam De-
sign Preferences form has five separate tabs: Factors, Beam, Deflection, Vi-
bration, and Price.
Default values are provided for all composite beam design preference items.
Thus, it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. You
should, however, at least review the default values for the preference items
to make sure they are acceptable to you.
Note:
Default values are provided for all preference items. Thus, if you are happy with the de-
faults, you do not need to specify any of the composite beam preferences.
Using the Preferences Form

To view preferences, select the Options menu > Preferences > Composite
Beam Design. The Preferences form will display. The first time you enter the
Preferences form, review and, if necessary, change the specified design code
in the drop-down box near the bottom of the form.
Click on the desired tab: Factors, Beam, Deflection, Vibration or Price. The
preference options included under each of the tabs are displayed in a two-
column spreadsheet. The left column of the spreadsheet displays the prefer-
ence item name. The right column of the spreadsheet displays the preference
item value.
To change a preference item, left click the desired preference item in either
the left or right column of the spreadsheet. This activates a drop-down box or

Preferences Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
highlights the current preference value. If the drop-down box appears, select
a new value. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The prefer-
ence value will update accordingly. You cannot overwrite values in the drop-
down boxes.
When the preference item is clicked in either column, a short description of

that item displays in the large text box just below the list of items. This de-
scription helps you remember the purpose of each preference item without
referring to the documentation.
To set all of the composite beam preference items on a particular tab to their
default values, click on that tab to view it and then click the Reset Tab but-
ton. This button resets the preference values on the currently selected tab.
To set all of the composite beam preference items on all tabs to their default
values, click the Reset All button. This button immediately resets all of the
composite beam preference items.
Important note about resetting preferences: The defaults for the prefer-
ence items are built into the program. The composite beam preference values
that were in a .edb file that you used to initialize your model may be different
from the built-in default values. Clicking a reset button resets the preference
values to built-in values, not to the values that were in the .edb file used to
initialize the model.
When you have finished making changes to the composite beam preferences,
click the OK button to close the form. You must click the OK button for the
changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit
the form, any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is
closed.
Preferences
For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the preference items are
presented in tables. The column headings in these tables are described as
follows:
Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the
left side of the Preferences form.
Technical Note 17 - 2 Preferences

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Preferences
Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference item
can have.
Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for
the associated preference item.
Description: A description of the associated preference item.
Factors Tab
For AISC-ASD89 design there are no items on the Factors tab. Thus, if you
click this tab, it will appear blank.
Beam Tab
Table 1 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Beam tab
in the Preferences form.
Table 1: Composite Beam Preferences on the Beam Tab

Possible Default
Item Values Value Description
Toggle for shored or unshored con-
Shored? Yes/No No
struction.
Length in the middle of the beam over
which the program checks the effective
Middle Range
≥ 0% 70% width on each side of the beam, ex-
(%)
pressed as a percentage of the total
beam length.
Factor applied to live load for special
Pattern Live
≥0 0.75 pattern live load check for cantilever
Load Factor
back spans and continuous spans.
The acceptable stress ratio limit. This
Stress Ratio
>0 0.95 item only applies to design optimiza-
Limit
tion.
The Shored item affects both the deflection calculations and the flexural cal-
culations for the beam. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam
Deflection and Camber for a description of beam deflection. Flexural calcula-
tions are described in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20
Transformed Section Moment of Inertia, Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses
Factors Tab Technical Note 17 - 3

with Partial Composite Connection, Technical Note 22 Allowable Bending

Stresses, and Technical Note 23 Bending Stress Checks. If the beam is
shored, checks are performed for the construction loading design load combi-
nation (see Composite Beam Design Technical Note 10 Design Load Combina-
tions ).
The Middle Range item is described in "Location Where Effective Slab Width is
Checked" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the
Concrete Slab.
The Pattern Live Load Factor item is described in "Special Live Load Patterning
for Cantilever Back Spans" and "Special Live Load Patterning for Continuous
Spans" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 10 Design Load Combina-
tion.
Deflection Tab
Table 2 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Deflection
tab in the Preferences form.
Table 2: Composite Beam Preferences on the Deflection Tab

Possible Default
Live load deflection limitation denomi-
Live Load
>0 360 nator (inputting 360 means that the de-
Limit, L/
flection limit is L/360).
Total load deflection limitation denomi-
Total Load
Limit, L/
Percentage of dead load (not including
Camber DL
>0 100% superimposed dead load) on which
(%)
camber calculations are based.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber
for a description of beam deflection and camber.
Technical Note 17 - 4 Deflection Tab

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Preferences
Vibration Tab
Table 3 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Vibration
Table 3: Composite Beam Preferences on the Vibration Tab

Possible Default
Percentage of live load plus reduced
live load considered (in addition to full
Percent Live dead load) when computing weight
≥0 25%
Load (%) supported by the beam for use in
calculating the first natural frequency of
the beam.
Toggle to consider the frequency as
Consider
Yes/No No one of the criteria to be used for deter-
Frequency?
mining if a beam section is acceptable.
Minimum acceptable first natural
Minimum frequency for a floor beam. This item is
> 0 Hz 8 Hz
Frequency used when the Consider Frequency
item is set to Yes.
Toggle to consider Murray's minimum
Consider
damping requirement as one of the
Murray Damp- Yes/No No
criteria to be used for determining if a
ing?
beam section is acceptable.
Percentage of critical damping that is
Inherent inherent in the floor system. This item is
> 0% 4%
Damping (%) used when the Consider Murray
Damping item is set to Yes.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 12 Beam Vibration for a descrip-
tion of beam vibration.
Vibration Tab Technical Note 17 - 5

Price Tab
Table 4 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Price tab
Table 4: Composite Beam Preferences on the Price Tab

Possible Default
Toggle to consider price rather than
Optimize for steel weight when selecting the opti-
Yes/No No
Price? mum beam section from an auto select
section list.
Installed price for a single shear stud
Stud Price ($) ≥0 $0
connector.
Camber price per unit weight of steel
Camber Price
≥0 $0 beam (including cover plate, if it
($)
exists).
See "Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections" in Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 1 General Design Information for additional information
on the "Optimize for Price?" item.
Note that the price per unit weight for the steel beam (plus cover plate, if ap-
plicable) is input as part of the material property specification for the beam.
The material properties can be reviewed or defined using the Define menu >
Material Properties command. Be sure that you use the same currency
units (for example, U.S. dollars) for the steel price in the material properties,
the stud price in the preferences, and the camber price in the preferences.
Technical Note 17 - 6 Price Tab

Technical Note 18
Overwrites
This Technical Note provides instructions on how to use the Composite Beam
Overwrites form and describes the items available on each of the tabs in the
form. One section is devoted to each of the tabs.
General
The composite beam design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only
to those composite beams to which they are assigned. After selecting one or
more composite beams, use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design
> View\Revise Overwrites command to access the Composite Beam Over-
writes form where you can view and revise the composite beam design over-
writes.
Note:
There are default values provided for all overwrite items. Thus, if you are happy with the
defaults, you do not need to specify any of the composite beam overwrites.
The Composite Beam Overwrites form has eight separate tabs. They are
Beam, Bracing (C), Bracing, Deck, Shear Studs, Deflection, Vibration and Mis-
cellaneous. Descriptions of the various overwrite options available on each tab
are provided later in this Technical Note.
Default values are provided for all composite beam overwrite items. Thus, it is
not required that you specify or change any of the overwrites. However, at
least review the default values for the overwrite items to make sure they are
acceptable. When changes are made to overwrite items, the program applies
the changes only to the elements to which they are specifically assigned; that
is, to the elements that are selected when the overwrites are changed.

Overwrites Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Using the Composite Beam Overwrites Form

After selecting one or more composite beams, use the Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > View\Revise Overwrites command to access
the Composite Beam Overwrites form. Click on the desired tab.
The Composite Beam Overwrites are displayed on each tab with a column of
check boxes and a two-column spreadsheet. The left column in the spread-
sheet contains the name of the overwrite item. The right column in the
spreadsheet contains the overwrite value.
Initially, the check boxes are all unchecked and all of the cells in the spread-
sheet have a gray background to indicate they are inactive and that the items
in the cells currently cannot be changed. The names of the overwrite items in
the first column of the spreadsheet are visible. The values of the overwrite
items in the second column of the spreadsheet are visible if only one beam
was selected before the Composite Beam Overwrites form was accessed. If
multiple beams were selected, no values show for the overwrite items in the
second column of the spreadsheet.
After selecting one or multiple beams, check the box to the left of an over-
write item to change it. Then left click in either column of the spread sheet to
activate a drop-down box or to highlight the contents of the cell in the right
column of the spreadsheet. If the drop-down box appears, select a value from
the box. If the cell contents becomes highlighted, type in the desired value.
The overwrite will reflect the change. You cannot change the values in the
drop-down boxes.
When you check a check box or left click in one of the columns in the spread-
sheet, a short description of the item in that row displays in the large text box
just below the list of items. This description helps you recall the purpose of
the overwrite item without referring to the manual.
When changes to the composite beam overwrites have been made, click the
OK button to close the form. The program then changes all of the overwrite
items whose associated check boxes are checked for the selected beam(s).
You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program.
If you click the Cancel button to exit the form, any changes made to the
overwrites will be ignored and the form will be closed.
Technical Note 18 - 2 Using the Composite Beam Overwrites Form

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Overwrites
Resetting Composite Beam Overwrites to Default Values

To set all of the composite beam overwrite items on a particular tab to their
default values, click on the tab and then click the Reset Tab button. This
button resets the overwrite values on the tab currently selected.
To set all of the composite beam overwrite items on all tabs to their default
composite beam overwrite items. Alternatively, you can click the Design
menu > Composite Beam Design > Reset All Composite Beam Over-
writes command to accomplish the same thing.
Important note about resetting overwrites: The defaults for the over-
write items are built into the program. The composite beam overwrite values
from the built-in program default values. When you reset overwrites, the pro-
gram resets the overwrite values to its built-in values, not to the values that
were in the .edb file used to initialize the model.
Overwrites
For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the overwrite items are
follows.
Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the cells at the left
side of the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Possible Values: The possible values for the associated overwrite item.
the associated overwrite item.
Description: A description of the associated overwrite item.
Overwrites Technical Note 18 - 3

Beam Tab
Table 1 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Beam tab in
the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Table 1: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Beam Tab
Possible Default
Shored? Yes/No No Toggle for shored or unshored con-

(unshored) struction.
Beam type Composite, Composite Type of beam design. NC w studs is

NC w studs, or short for Noncomposite with minimum
NC w/o studs shear studs. NC w/o studs is short for
Noncomposite without shear studs.
b-eff left Program Program Toggle specifying how the effective

Condition calculated or calculated width of the concrete slab on the left
user-defined side of the beam is determined
b-eff left ≥0 Program User-defined effective width of concrete

calculated slab on left side of beam, beff left.
value
b-eff right Program Program Toggle specifying how the effective

Condition calculated or calculated width of the concrete slab on the right
b-eff right ≥0 Program User-defined effective width of concrete

calculated slab on right side of beam, beff right
value
Beam Fy ≥0 Specified in Yield stress of the beam, Fy. Specifying

Material 0 in the overwrites means that Fy is as
Properties specified in the material properties
Beam Fu ≥0 Specified in Minimum tensile strength of the beam,

Material Fu. Specifying 0 means that Fu is as
Technical Note 18 - 4 Beam Tab

Possible Default
Cover Plate Yes/No No Toggle switch indicating if a full length

Present? cover plate exists on the bottom of the
beam bottom flange.
Plate width ≥0 0 Width of cover plate, bcp.
Plate thickness ≥0 0 Thickness of cover plate, tcp.
Plate Fy >0 0 Cover plate yield stress, Fycp. Specify-

ing 0 means that Fycp is set to that
specified in the beam material proper-
ties
The Shored item affects both the deflection calculations and the flexural
stress calculations for the beam. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note
11 Beam Deflection and Camber for a description of beam deflection. If the
beam is shored, no checks are performed for the construction loading design
load combination.
Note:
The Middle Range item is specified on the Beam tab in the composite beam preferences
and is described in "Location Where Effective Slab Width is Checked" in Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete Slab.
Typically, when a beam is designed using the Composite Beam Design post-
processor that beam is designed as a composite beam if it has a deck section
(not slab section) assigned along the full length of the specified Middle Range
on at least one side of the beam. The Beam Type overwrite allows you to
specify that a beam that would ordinarily be designed as a composite beam
be designed as a noncomposite beam. The overwrite does not and cannot
force a beam that has been designed as a noncomposite beam because there
is no deck section along at least one side to be designed as a composite
beam. When using the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, a beam that
does not have a deck section along at least one side is always designed as a
Beam Tab Technical Note 18 - 5

noncomposite beam, regardless of what is specified in the Beam Type over-

write.
When a beam is designed as noncomposite with minimum shear studs, the

beam is designed as a noncomposite beam. Then shear studs are specified for
the beam with as large a spacing as possible, without exceeding the specified
maximum longitudinal spacing. The maximum longitudinal spacing can be
overwritten on the Shear Studs tab.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete
Slab for a description of the beam effective width.
The beam yield stress and the cover plate yield stress both default to the
yield stress specified for the material property associated with the beam sec-
tion. When the Define menu > Frame Sections command is used to define
a beam section, the material property associated with the beam section
should also be defined. The material property is defined using the Define
menu > Material Properties command.
In this program, the cover plate can have a yield stress that is different from
that of the beam, if desired. The cover plate width, thickness and Fy items are
not active unless the "Cover Plate Present" item is set to Yes. See "Cover
Plates" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 7 Composite Beam Proper-
ties for a description of cover plates.
Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab

The unbraced length overwrite items included on the Bracing (C) tab and the
Bracing tab are exactly the same. The items on the Bracing (C) tab apply to
construction loading design load combinations. The items on the Bracing tab
apply to final condition design load combinations.
The first two items that appear in the Bracing (C) tab and the Bracing tab are
shown in Table 2a. Additional items may also appear in the tabs, depending
on your choice for the Bracing Condition item. These additional items are
shown in Tables 2b and 2c.
Technical Note 18 - 6 Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab

Table 2a: First Two Composite Beam Overwrite Items on the

Bracing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab
Possible Default
Cb factor ≥0 Program Unitless factor used in determining al-

calculated lowable bending stress, Cb. Specifying
0 in the overwrites means that this
value is program calculated
Bracing Program Program This item defines how the unbraced
Condition calculated, calculated lengths are determined for buckling
bracing about the beam local 2-axis. They are
specified or program calculated, based on user-
length specified uniform and point bracing, or
specified based on a user-specified maximum
unbraced length.
When the Cb factor is program calculated, the program uses Equation 1 to

calculate it unless you have specified the Bracing Condition as Length Speci-
fied.
2
M  M 
C b = 1.75 + 1.05  1  + 0.3  1  ≤ 2.3 Eqn. 1
 M2   M2 
where,
M1 and M2 are the end moments of any unbraced span of the beam. M1 is
numerically less than M2.
The ratio M1/M2 is positive for double curvature bending and negative for
single curvature bending within the unbraced beam span.
If any moment within the unbraced beam span is greater than M2, the
numeric value of Cb is 1.0.
The numeric value of Cb is 1.0 for cantilever overhangs.
When the Cb factor is program calculated and the Bracing Condition is set in
the overwrites to Length Specified, the programs uses 1.0 for Cb.
Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab Technical Note 18 - 7

When the Bracing Condition is specified as Program Calculated, the program

assumes the beam is braced as described in "Determination of the Braced
Points of a Beam" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Un-
braced Length. Note that the program automatically considers the bracing for
construction loading and for the final condition separately. For the construc-
tion loading condition, the program assumes that the concrete fill does not
assist in bracing the beam.
When the Bracing Condition is specified as Bracing Specified, two items ap-
pear in the tab in addition to those shown in Table 2a. The two additional
items are shown in Table 2b.
Table 2b: Additional Composite Beam Overwrite Items On the

Bracing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab When the Bracing
Condition Is Specified As Bracing Specified
Possible Default
No. Point ≥0 0 The number of user-specified point

Braces brace locations. Clicking in this box
opens the Point Braces form where you
specify the point braces.
No. Uniform ≥0 0 The number of user-specified uniform
Braces braces. Clicking in this box opens the
Uniform Braces form where you specify
the uniform braces.
The No. Point Braces and No. Uniform Braces items allow you to specify actual
bracing for the beam. These items are described in "User-Specified Uniform
and Point Bracing" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Un-
braced Length.
When the Bracing Condition is specified as Length Specified, two items appear
in the tab in addition to those shown in Table 2a. The two additional items are
shown in Table 2c.
Technical Note 18 - 8 Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab

Table 2c: Additional Composite Beam Overwrite Items On the Brac-

ing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab When the Bracing Condi-
tion Is Specified As Length Specified
Possible Default
Absolute Yes/No No Toggle switch for whether the maxi-
Length? mum unbraced length is given as an
absolute length or a relative length.
Unbraced L22 ≥ 0 and ≤ Length of Maximum unbraced length for buckling
beam length beam about the beam local 2 axis.
When the maximum unbraced length is specified as an absolute length, the

actual maximum unbraced length is specified. When the maximum unbraced
length is specified as a relative length, the value specified is equal to the
maximum unbraced length divided by the length of the beam. The relative
length specified is always between 0 and 1, inclusive.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Unbraced Length for ad-
ditional information about the unbraced length of the beam.
Deck Tab
Table 3 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Deck tab in
Table 3: Composite Beam Overwrites On the Deck Tab
Possible Default
Deck ID Left Program Program Deck ID assigned to left side of beam.

calculated, any calculated
defined deck
property, or
None
Deck Tab Technical Note 18 - 9

Table 3: Composite Beam Overwrites On the Deck Tab
Possible Default
Deck direction Program Program Span direction of the metal deck ribs on
Left calculated, calculated left side of beam relative to the span
parallel, or direction of the beam.
perpendicular
Deck ID Right Program Program Deck ID assigned to right side of beam.
defined deck
property, or
None
Right calculated, calculated the right side of beam relative to the
parallel, or span direction of beam.
perpendicular
When the Deck ID is program calculated, you must refer to the output data to
see what the program assumed for this item. It is not shown in the over-
writes.
If the deck direction is program calculated, do not overlook the important

note about deck orientation in "Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the
Beam Length" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of
the Concrete Slab.
Shear Studs Tab

Table 4 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Shear
Studs tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Table 4: Composite Beam Overwrites On the Shear Studs Tab

Possible Default
User Pattern? Yes/No No Toggle to indicate if a user-defined
shear connector pattern is defined.
Technical Note 18 - 10 Shear Studs Tab

Table 4: Composite Beam Overwrites On the Shear Studs Tab

Possible Default
Uniform ≥0 0, indicating Uniform spacing of shear studs along
Spacing there are no the beam. There is one shear stud per
uniformly row along the beam.
spaced
connectors
No. Additional ≥0 0, indicating Number of sections in which additional
Sections there are no uniformly spaced shear studs are
additional specified. Clicking in this box opens the
connectors Additional Sections form where you
specified specify the section length and the num-
ber of uniformly spaced connectors in
the section.
Min Long >0 6ds Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear
Spacing (i.e., six stud studs along the length of the beam.
diameters)
Max Long >0 36 inches Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
Spacing studs along the length of the beam.
Min Tran >0 4ds Minimum transverse spacing of shear
Spacing (i.e., four stud studs across the beam flange.
diameters)
Max Studs >0 3 Maximum number of shear studs in a
per Row single row across the beam flange.
q Program Program Allowable shear load for a single shear
calculated or calculated stud. Specifying 0 in the overwrites
>0 means that this value is program cal-
culated.
The Uniform Spacing and No. Additional Sections items are only available if
the User Pattern item is set to Yes. See Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 24 Beam Shear Checks for discussion of user-defined shear
stud patterns.
The program default value for the minimum longitudinal spacing of shear
studs along the length of the beam is six shear stud diameters. Note that this
item is input as an absolute length, not as a multiplier on the stud diameter.
The program default value for the maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
studs along the length of the beam is 36 inches. The design code used may
specify the maximum longitudinal spacing is eight times the total slab thick-
Shear Studs Tab Technical Note 18 - 11

ness (rib height, hr, plus concrete slab above metal deck, tc). AISC-ASD89
Specification Section I5.2.2 specifies that the maximum longitudinal spacing
of shear studs along the length of a beam shall not exceed 36 inches for
beams when the span of the metal deck is perpendicular to the span of the
beam. If your total slab thickness is less than 36"/8 = 4.5", the program de-
fault value may be unconservative and should be revised.
The program default value for the minimum transverse spacing of shear studs
across the beam flange is four shear stud diameters. This is consistent with
the last paragraph of AISC-ASD89 Specification Section I4. Note that this
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on
a Composite Beam for additional discussion of how shear studs are distributed
on composite beams.
The "Max Studs per Row" item indicates the maximum number of shear studs
that is allowed in a row across the beam flange. For wider beams, the Min
Tran Spacing item might indicate that more studs could be accommodated
across the beam flange but the Max Studs per Row item will limit the number
of studs in any row. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribu-
tion of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam for additional discussion of how
shear studs are distributed on beams.
See "Shear Stud Connector" in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Techni-

cal Note 25 Shear Studs for discussion of how the program calculates the al-
lowable shear load for a single shear stud. Note that when a q value is speci-
fied in the overwrites, the program assumes that the specified value of q has
already been modified by any applicable reduction factors for the metal deck.
Finally, note that specifying 0 (zero) in the overwrites for this item means
that the allowable shear stud load is calculated by the program, not that it is
zero.
Shear studs are discussed in detail in Composite Beam Design Technical Note
13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam, Technical Note 14 The
Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment, and Technical
Note 15 User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns.
Technical Note 18 - 12 Shear Studs Tab

Deflection Tab
Table 5 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Deflection
tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Table 5: Composite Beam Overwrites On the Deflection Tab
Possible Default
Deflection Yes/No No Toggle to consider live load and total

Absolute? load deflection limitations as absolute
or as divisor of beam length (relative).
Live Load Limit >0 Specified in Deflection limitation for live load. For
Preferences relative deflection, inputting 360 means
that the limit is L/360.
Total Load >0 Specified in Deflection limitation for total load. For
Limit Preferences relative deflection, inputting 240 means
Calculate Yes/No Yes Toggle for the program to calculate
Camber? beam camber.
Fixed Camber ≥0 0 User-specified camber when the pro-
gram does not calculate beam camber
for discussion of beam deflection and camber.
Deflection Tab Technical Note 18 - 13

Vibration Tab
Table 6 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Vibration
Table 6: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Vibration Tab
Possible Default
Neff Condition User Defined User Defined Toggle to select user defined or pro-
or Program gram calculated based on beam spac-
Calculated ing, N effective.
No. Effective ≥1 1.0 Effective number of beams resisting a
Beams heel drop impact.
Miscellaneous Tab
Table 7 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Miscellane-
ous tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Table 7: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Miscellaneous Tab
Possible Default
Consider Yes/No No Toggle to select if beam depth is to be

Beam Depth? considered in an auto select section
list. If yes, maximum and minimum
depths must be input.
Maximum >0 44 inches Maximum actual (not nominal) beam
Depth depth to be considered in auto select
section list.
Minimum ≥0 0 Minimum actual (not nominal) beam
section list.
Maximum >0 100% Maximum percent composite connec-
PCC(%) tion considered for the beam.
Technical Note 18 - 14 Vibration Tab

Possible Default
Minimum PCC >0 25% Minimum percent composite connection

(%) considered for the beam.
LL Reduction 0<, >1.0 1.0 Reducible live load is multiplied by this
Factor factor to obtain the reduced live load. If
zero is selected, the program calcu-
lated valued is used.
Horizontal EQ 0<, >1.0 1.0 Multiplier applied to the earthquake
Factor portion of the load in a design load
combination.
EQ Factor
The EQ (earthquake) factor is a multiplier that is typically applied to the
earthquake load in a design load combination. Following are the five types of
loads that can be included in a design load combination, along with an expla-
nation of how the EQ factor is applied to each of the load types.
Static Load: The EQ factor is applied to any static loads designated as a

Quake-type load. The EQ factor is not applied to any other type of static
load.
Response Spectrum Case: The EQ factor is applied to all response

spectrum cases.
Time History Case: The EQ factor is applied to all time history cases.
Static Nonlinear Case: The EQ factor is not applied to any static nonlin-
ear cases.
Load Combination: The EQ factor is not applied to any load combination

that is included in a design load combination. For example, assume you
have two static load cases labeled DL and EQ. DL is a dead load and EQ is
a quake load.
EQ Factor Technical Note 18 - 15

Now assume that you create a design load combination named DESCOMB1
that includes DL and EQ. For design load combination DESCOMB1, the EQ
load is multiplied by the EQ factor.
Next assume that you create a load combination called COMB2 that in-
cludes EQ. Now assume that you create a design load combination called
DESCOMB3 that included DL and COMB2. For design load combination
DESCOMB3, the EQ load that is part of COMB2 is not multiplied by the EQ
factor.
The EQ factor allows you to design different members for different levels of
earthquake loads in the same run. It also allows you to specify member-
specific reliability/redundancy factors that are required by some codes. The ρ
factor specified in Section 1630.1.1 of the 1997 UBC is an example of this.
Technical Note 18 - 16 EQ Factor

Technical Note 19
Width-to-Thickness Checks
This Technical Note describes how the program checks the AISC-ASD89
specification width-to-thickness requirements for compact and noncompact
sections. The width-to-thickness requirements for compact and noncompact
sections are spelled out in AISC-ASD89 Specification Chapter B, Table B5.1.
This program checks the width-to-thickness ratios of the beam flanges and
web, and, if it exists, the cover plate.
Overview
The program classifies beam sections as either compact, noncompact or slen-
der on the basis of their width-to-thickness ratios. The program checks the
compact and noncompact section requirements for each design load combi-
nation separately. A beam section may be classified differently for different
design load combinations. For example, it may be classified as compact for
design load combination A and as noncompact for design load combination B.
One reason that a beam may be classified differently for different design load
cases is that the compression flange may be different for different design load
combinations. If the sizes of the top and bottom flanges are not the same,
classification of the section as compact or noncompact may depend on which
flange is determined to be the compression flange.
For each design load combination, the program first checks a beam section
for the compact section requirements for the compression flange, web and
cover plate (if applicable). If the beam section meets all of those require-
ments, it is classified as compact for that design load combination. If the
beam section does not meet all of the compact section requirements, it is
then checked for the noncompact requirements for the flanges, web and
cover plate (if applicable). If the beam section meets all of those require-
ments, it is classified as noncompact for that design load combination. If the
beam section does not meet all of the noncompact section requirements, it is
classified as slender for that design load combination, and the program does
not consider it for composite beam design.

Width-to-Thickness Checks Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Flanges

This section describes the limiting width-to-thickness ratios considered by the
program for beam compression flanges. The width-to-thickness ratio for
flanges is denoted b/t, and is equal to bf/2tf for I-shaped sections and bf/tf for
channel sections.
The program does not check the flange width-to-thickness ratios for compos-
ite beams with positive bending. This is consistent with the last sentence of
the first paragraph in AISC-ASD89 Specification Section I2.2.
Compact Section Limits for Flanges

For compact sections, the width-to-thickness ratio for the compression flange
is limited to that indicated by Equation 1.
b 65
≤ , for compact sections Eqn. 1
t Fy
where Fy is the specified yield stress of the beam. Equation 1 applies to both
rolled sections selected from the program's database and to user-defined
(welded) sections.
Noncompact Section Limits for Flanges

For noncompact sections, the width-to-thickness ratio for the compression
flange is limited to that indicated by Equation 2.
b 95
≤ , for noncompact sections Eqn. 2
t Fy k c
where Fy is the specified yield stress of the beam and kc is as follows:
kc is equal to one (1.0) for rolled sections selected from the program da-
tabase.
kc is equal to one (1.0) for user-defined (welded) sections with h/tw less
than or equal to 70.
kc is given by Equation 3 for user-defined (welded) sections with h/tw

greater than 70. For h/tw less than or equal to 70 kc = 1.
Technical Note 19 - 2 Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Flanges

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Width-to-Thickness Checks
4.05
kc = , for h/tw > 70, Eqn. 3
(h t w )0.46
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Webs

program for beam webs.
Compact Section Limits for Webs

When checking a beam web for compact section requirements, the width-to-
thickness ratio used is d/tw as shown in Equation 4.
d 640
≤ Eqn. 4
tw Fy
Noncompact Section Limits for Webs

When checking a beam web for noncompact section requirements, the width-
to-thickness ratio used is h/tw. Note that this is different from the width-to-
thickness ratio used for the compact section requirement check. The equation
used for checking the noncompact section limits in the web depends on the
allowable bending stress, Fb, for the noncomposite steel beam plus cover
plate, if it exists. Refer to the Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Note 22 Allowable Bending Stresses for a description of how the program cal-
culates the allowable bending stress.
Equation 5 defines the noncompact section limit for webs.
h 760
≤ Eqn. 5
tw Fb
The program makes a slight simplifying assumption when using Equation 5 by

assuming that Fb = 0.66Fy. In most cases in the Composite Beam Design
postprocessor, this assumption is exactly correct. When the assumption is not
exactly correct, it errs on the conservative side.
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Webs Technical Note 19 - 3

Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Cover Plates

Width-to-thickness checks are only performed for the cover plate when there
is negative moment in the beam. In this case, the cover plate is in compres-
sion.
The width-to-thickness checks made for the cover plate depend on the width
of the cover plate compared to the width of the beam bottom flange. Figure 1
illustrates the conditions considered.
In Case A of the figure, the width of the cover plate is less than or equal to
the width of the beam bottom flange. In this case, the width-to-thickness ra-
tio is taken as b1/tcp, and it is checked as a flange cover plate.
In Case B of Figure 1, the width of the cover plate is greater than the width of
the beam bottom flange. Two conditions are checked in this case. The first
condition is the same as that shown in Case A, where the width-to-thickness
ratio is taken as b1/tcp and is checked as a flange cover plate. The second
condition checked in Case B takes b2/tcp as the width-to-thickness ratio and
checks it as a plate projecting from a beam. This second condition is only
checked for the noncompact requirements; it is not checked for compact re-
quirements.
Beam
Beam
Cover plate
tcp
tcp
b1 b2 b1 b2
Cover plate
Case A Case B
Figure 1 Conditions Considered When Checking Width-To-Thickness

Ratios of Cover Plates
Technical Note 19 - 4 Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Cover Plates

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Width-to-Thickness Checks
Compact Section Limits for Cover Plates

The checks made for compact section requirements depend on whether the
width of the cover plate is less than or equal to that of the bottom flange of
the beam (Case A in Figure 1), or greater than that of the bottom flange of
the beam (Case B in Figure 1).
Cover Plate Width Less Than or Equal to Beam Bottom Flange Width
When the cover plate width is less than or equal to the width of the beam
bottom flange, Equation 6 applies for the compact check for the cover plate.
b1 190
≤ Eqn. 6
t cp Fycp
The term b1 in Equation 6 is defined in Figure 1.
Cover Plate Width Greater than Beam Bottom Flange Width

When the cover plate width exceeds the width of the beam bottom flange, the
program checks both Equations 6 and 7 for the compact check for the cover
plate.
b2 95
≤ Eqn. 7
t cp Fycp
Noncompact Section Limits for Cover Plates

The checks made for noncompact section requirements depend on whether
the width of the cover plate is less than or equal to that of the bottom flange
of the beam (Case A in Figure 1), or greater than that of the bottom flange of
the beam (Case B in Figure 1).
Cover Plate Width Less Than or Equal to Beam Bottom Flange Width
bottom flange, Equation 8 applies for the noncompact check for the cover
plate.
b1 238
≤ Eqn. 8
t cp Fycp
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Cover Plates Technical Note 19 - 5

Cover Plate Width Greater than Beam Bottom Flange Width

When the cover plate width exceeds the width of the beam bottom flange,
both Equations 8 and 9 apply for the noncompact check for the cover plate.
b2 95
≤ Eqn. 9
t cp Fycp
Technical Note 19 - 6 Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Cover Plates

Technical Note 20
Transformed Section Moment of Inertia
This Technical Note describes in general terms how the program calculates
the transformed moment of inertia for a composite section, Itr. The calculated
transformed moment of inertia applies for full (100%) composite connection.
See Composite Beam AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with
Partial Composite Connection for a description of partial composite connec-
tion.
The Technical Note also describes in detail a method that can be used to cal-
culate the transformed section moment of inertia by hand that will yield the
same result as the program. The exact methodology used by the program is
optimized for computer-based calculations and is unsuitable for hand calcula-
tions and for presentation in this Technical Note.
Note that for the AISC-ASD89 specification, the transformed section proper-
ties used for stress calculations for a beam may be different from those used
for deflection calculations for the same beam. For AISC-ASD89 composite
beam design stress calculations, the value of Ec is always calculated from
Equation 1, assuming that the unit weight of concrete, wc, is 150 pounds per
cubic foot, regardless of its actual specified weight.
(
E c = w1.5
c )33 fc' Eqn. 1
In Equation 1, Ec is in pounds per square inch (psi), wc is in pounds per cubic

foot (pcf) and f c' is in pounds per square inch (psi).
For AISC-ASD89 composite beam design deflection calculations, the value of

Ec is taken from the material property specified for the concrete slab.
Background Technical Note 20 - 1

Transformed Section Moment of Inertia Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Background
Figure 1 shows a typical rolled steel composite floor beam with the metal deck
ribs running parallel to the beam. Figure 2 shows a typical composite user-
defined steel beam with the metal deck ribs running parallel to the beam.
Note that the user-defined beam may have a different top and bottom flange
size, and that no fillets are assumed in this beam.
For each of these configurations the following items may or may not be
included when calculating the transformed section moment of inertia:
Concrete in the metal deck ribs: The concrete in the metal deck ribs is
included in the calculation when the deck ribs are oriented parallel to the
beam (typically the case for girders). It is not included when the deck ribs are
oriented perpendicular to the beam (typically the case for infill beams).
• Cover plate: The cover plate is only included if one is specified by you in
the composite beam overwrites.
Note that the deck type and deck orientation may be different on the two
sides of the beam as described in "Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along
the Beam Length" of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective
Width of the Concrete Slab.
Because composite behavior is only considered for positive bending, the

transformed section moment of inertia is only calculated for positive bending
(top of composite section in compression). Calculation of the transformed
section moment of inertia is greatly complicated by the requirement that the
concrete resist no tension.
The first task in calculating the transformed section moment of inertia of the
composite section is to compute properties for the steel beam alone (plus the
cover plate, if it exists). The properties required are the total area, Abare; the
location of the ENA, ybare; and the moment of inertia, Is.
Technical Note 20 - 2 Background

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia
Concrete slab
tc
hr
Metal deck
d
Rolled steel beam
tcp
Bottom cover plate bcp
Figure 1: Composite Rolled Steel Beam Shown With Metal Deck Ribs
Running Parallel To Beam
tc
tf-top
hr
Concrete slab
Metal deck bf-top
Beam top flange

h = d - tf-top - tf-bot
tw
d
Beam web
tf-bot
Beam bottom flange

tcp
Bottom cover plate bcp

bf-bot
Figure 2: Composite User-Defined Steel Beam Shown With Metal Deck

Ribs Running Parallel To Beam
Background Technical Note 20 - 3

y1 for top flange

Elastic neutral axis of steel beam
plus cover plate if applicable.
Ibare is taken about this axis.
ybare
Bottom of bottom flange of steel
beam. Ybare and y1 are
measured from here
Figure 3: Illustration of ybare and y1
Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover Plate) Alone

The location of the ENA for the steel beam alone (plus cover plate if applica-
ble) is defined by the distance ybare, where ybare is the distance from the bot-
tom of the bottom flange of the beam to the ENA, as shown in Figure 3. If
there is a cover plate, ybare is still measured from the bottom of the bottom
flange of the beam, not the bottom of the cover plate.
Figure 3 also illustrates an example of the dimension y1 that is used in Tables

1 and 2. For a given element of a steel section, the dimension y1 is equal to
the distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange to the centroid of
the element. Figure 3 illustrates the distance y1 for the beam top flange.
If the beam section is a rolled steel beam or channel chosen from the pro-
gram section database, Abare, ybare and Ibare are calculated as shown in Table 1
and Equations 1 and 2. If the beam section is a user-defined (welded) beam,
they are calculated using Table 2 and Equations 1 and 2.
Technical Note 20 - 4 Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover Plate) Alone

Table 1: Section Properties for Rolled Steel Beam Plus Cover Plate
2
Item Area, A y1 Ay1 Ay1 IO
d 2
Steel beam As Ay1 Ay1 Is
2
t cp b cp t 3cp
Cover plate bcptcp − Ay1 Ay1
2
2 12
2
Sums ΣA Σ(Ay1) Σ(Ay1 ) ΣIO
Table 2: Section Properties for User-Defined (Welded) Steel Beam Plus

Cover Plate
2
Item Area, A y1 Ay1 Ay1 IO
t f − top b f − top t 3f − top

Top flange bf-toptf-top d− Ay1 Ay1
2
2 12
d 2 t wh3
Web htw Ay1 Ay1
2 12
t f − bot 2 b f − bot t 3f − bot
Bottom flange bf-bottf-bot Ay1 Ay1
2 12
t cp b cp t 3cp
Cover plate bcptcp − Ay1 Ay1
2
2 12
2
Sums ΣA Σ(Ay1) Σ(Ay1 ) ΣIO
The area of the steel section (including the cover plate if it exists), Abare, is
given by Equation 1.
Abare = ΣA Eqn. 1
The ENA of the steel section is located a distance ybare from the bottom of the
bottom flange of the steel beam section (not bottom of cover plate) where
ybare is determined from Equation 2.
Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover Plate) Alone Technical Note 20 - 5

y bare =
∑ (Ay ) 1
Eqn. 2
∑A
The moment of inertia of the steel section (plus cover plate, if one exists)
about its ENA, Ibare, is given by Equation 3.
I bare = ∑ (Ay ) + ∑ I
1
2
O − (∑ A ) y 2
bare Eqn. 3
Following is the notation used in Tables 1 and 2 and Equations 1 through 3:
Abare = Area of the steel beam (plus cover plate, if one exists),
in2.
As = Area of rolled steel section alone (without the cover plate

even if one exists), in2.
Ibare = Moment of inertia of the steel beam (plus cover plate if

one exists), in4.
IO = The moment of inertia of an element of the beam section

taken about the ENA of the element, in4.
Is = Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone (without the

cover plate even if one exists), in4.
bcp = Width of steel cover plate, in.
bf-bot = Width of bottom flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
bf-top = Width of top flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
d = Depth of steel beam from outside face of top flange to

outside face of bottom flange, in.
h = Clear distance between flanges for user-defined (welded)

sections, in.
tcp = Thickness of cover plate, in.
tf-bot = Thickness of bottom flange of a user-defined (welded)

section, in.
Technical Note 20 - 6 Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover Plate) Alone

tf-top = Thickness of top flange of a user-defined (welded) section,

in.
tw = Thickness of web of user-defined (welded) section, in.
ybare = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel
section to the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover plate if it
exists), in.
y1 = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel

beam section to the centroid of an element of the beam
section, in.
ΣA = Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the steel beam

section, in2.
Σ(Ay1) = Sum of the product A times y1 for all of the elements of

the steel beam section, in3.
Σ(A y12 ) = Sum of the product A times y12 for all of the elements of
the steel beam section, in4.
ΣIO = Sum of the moments of inertia of each element of the

beam section taken about the ENA of the element, in4.
Properties of the Composite Section General

Calculation Method
The first step, and potentially most calculation-intensive step in the process of
determining the composite properties is to calculate the distance from the
ENA of the steel beam (plus cover plate if it exists) to the ENA of the full
composite section. This distance is designated ye in Figure 4.
Recall that concrete in tension is ignored when calculating the composite

properties. Because of the possibility that some of the concrete may be in
tension, and because the amount of concrete that is in tension is initially un-
known (if any), the process for calculating the distance ye is iterative. After
the distance ye has been determined, the other calculations to determine the
composite properties are relatively straight-forward.
Properties of the Composite Section General Calculation Method Technical Note 20 - 7

Elastic neutral axis of composite

beam
z
ye
Elastic neutral axis of steel beam
alone, including cover plate if it
exists
Figure 4: Illustration of ye and z
The program uses the following method to calculate the properties of the
composite section.
1. The location of the ENA of the composite section, defined by ye (see Fig-
ure 4), is calculated using the following iterative process:
a. The program assumes (guesses) that the ENA of the composite section
is within the height of the steel beam and uses Equation 4 to calculate
the distance ye that defines the location of the ENA for the composite
section. Note that with this assumption, all of the concrete is above
the ENA of the composite section and thus it is all in compression and
can be considered.
Σ(A element delement )

ye = Eqn. 4
ΣA element
where,
Technical Note 20 - 8 Properties of the Composite Section General Calculation Method

Aelement = Area of an element in the composite section, ignoring any

area of concrete that is in tension and ignoring any con-
crete in the metal deck ribs when the metal deck span is
perpendicular to the beam span, in2.
delement = Distance from the ENA of the element considered to the

ENA of the steel beam alone (including cover plate, if it
exists), in. Signs are considered for this distance. Ele-
ments located below the ENA of the steel beam alone (in-
cluding cover plate, if it exists) have a negative distance
and those above have a positive distance.
If the ENA as calculated is within the height of the steel beam, as as-
sumed, the assumed location of the ENA is correct and the calculation
for ye is complete.
b. If the calculated ENA is not within the height of the steel beam, as as-
sumed in Step a, the assumed location of the ENA is incorrect and cal-
culation for ye continues.
i Using the incorrect location of the ENA calculated in Step a, the

program calculates the location of ye again using Equation 4, ig-
noring any concrete that is in tension.
ii If the newly calculated location of the ENA is the same as the pre-
viously calculated location (Step i), the assumed location of the
ENA has been identified and the calculation for ye is complete.
c. If the newly calculated location of the ENA is not the same as the pre-
viously calculated location (Step i), the most recent assumed location
of the ENA is incorrect and another iteration is made.
The program repeats the iterations until the location of the ENA has
been determined. After the location of the ENA is known, the rest of
the process for calculating the composite properties is non-iterative.
2. Given that the ENA has been located, the program determines if any con-
crete is below the ENA. If so, the program ignores it in the remaining cal-
culations.
Properties of the Composite Section General Calculation Method Technical Note 20 - 9

3. The program sums the product of the area of each element of the com-
posite section (except concrete in tension) times its distance to a conven-
ient axis (such as the bottom of the beam bottom flange).
4. The program divides the sum calculated in step 3 by the sum of the areas
of each element of the composite section (except concrete in tension).
This calculation yields the distance from the convenient axis to the ENA of
the composite section.
5. After the ENA of the composite section has been determined, the section
properties of the composite section are quickly calculated using standard
methods.
A hand calculation method for determining the distance ye described in steps

1a through 1c above is presented in the next section entitled "Equivalent
Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Distance ye." A hand calculation
method for the calculation of the composite properties described in steps 2
through 5 above is presented in the section entitled "Equivalent Hand Calcu-
lation Method to Calculate the Composite Properties" later in this Technical
Note.
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the

Distance ye
The following hand calculation method for determining the distance ye is
similar to and provides the same result as the calculations performed by the
program.
After ybare has been calculated, ye is calculated by equating the forces above
and below the ENA using either Equation 5a or Equation 5b. Recall that ye is
the distance from the ENA of the steel beam alone, plus cover plate if it exits,
to the ENA of the fully composite section, as illustrated in Figure 4.
X1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 4
ye = Eqn. 5a
A bare + X 5 + X 6 + X 7 + X 8
- X10 ± X10
2
− 4X 9 (X1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 )
ye = Eqn. 5b
2X 9
Technical Note 20 - 10 Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Distance ye

Equations for use in calculating values for the variables X1 through X10 in
Equations 5a and 5b are presented in the following subsection entitled "Back-
ground Equations." The actual process to calculate ye is described in the sub-
section of this Technical Note entitled "Hand Calculation Process for ye."
Background Equations
This subsection presents the equations for the variables X1 through X10 in
Equations 5a and 5b. The exact equation to use for the variables X1 through
X10 depends on the assumed location of the ENA.
For the purposes of determining the ye distance, there are nine possible loca-
tions for the ENA. Those locations are as follows:
1. The ENA is located within the height of the steel section (including
cover plate, if it exists).
2. The ENA is located within the height of the metal deck on both the left
and the right sides of the beam.
3. The ENA is located within the height of the metal deck on the left side
of the beam and within the height of the concrete above the metal
deck (or within a solid slab) on the right side of the beam.
Note: Recall that you can have different deck properties on the two
sides of the beam.
4. The ENA is located within the height of the metal deck on the left side
of the beam and above the concrete on the right side of the beam.
5. The ENA is located within the height of the concrete above the metal
deck (or within a solid slab) on the left side of the beam and within the
height of the metal deck on the right side of the beam.
deck (or within a solid slab) on both sides of the beam.
deck (or within a solid slab) on the left side of the beam and above the
concrete on the right side of the beam.
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Distance ye Technical Note 20 - 11

8. The ENA is located above the concrete on the left side of the beam and
within the height of the metal deck on the right side of the beam.
9. The ENA is located above the concrete on the left side of the beam and
within the height of the concrete above the metal deck (or within a
solid slab) on the right side of the beam.
The first two columns in Table 3 list the nine possible locations of the ENA of
the composite section. The columns labeled Left Side and Right Side indicate
the location of the ENA relative to the left and right sides of the beam, re-
spectively. The third column of Table 3, labeled "ye Eqn" specifies whether
Equation 5a or 5b should be used to calculate ye. Columns 4 through 13 of
Table 3 list the equation numbers to be used to determine the value of the
variables X1 through X10 for the location of the ENA specified in the first two
columns of the table.
When using Table 3, the location of the ENA of the composite section and the
location of the ENA of the composite section relative to the elements that
make up the composite section are initially unknown. Thus, begin by assum-
ing a location of the ENA. It works best if you assume that the ENA of the
composite section is within the steel section. Then, calculate the actual loca-
tion of the ENA and check the validity of the assumption. This process is de-
scribed in the subsection entitled "Hand Calculation Process for ye."
Equations 7 through 16 define the terms X1 through X10 in Table 3 and Equa-
tions 5a and 5b. A term that is repeatedly used in Equations 7 through 16 is
z. As previously illustrated in Figure 4, z is the distance from the ENA of the
steel beam alone (plus cover plate, if it exists) to the top of the concrete slab.
The distance z, which can be different on the left and right sides of the beam,
is defined by Equations 6a and 6b.
zleft = d + hr left + tc left - ybare Eqn. 6a
zright = d + hr right + tc right - ybare Eqn. 6b
The equations for the variables X1 through X10 in Equations 5a and 5b and Ta-
ble 3 follow. In most cases, there are multiple equations for each variable.
See Table 3 for specification of which equation to use for any assumed loca-
tion of the ENA.

Table 3: Table Identifying Circumstances for Using Equations 5a and 5b and

Identifying Appropriate Equations to Use to Calculate the Values of
Variables X1 through X10 that Appear in Equations 5a and 5b
Left Right ye X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10

Side Side Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn Eqn
Steel section 5a 7a 8a 9a 10a 11a 12a 13a 14a N.A. N.A.
hr hr 5b 7a 8b 9a 10b 11a 12b 13a 14b 15a 16a
hr tc 5b 7a 8b 9b 0 11a 12b 13b 14c 15a 16c
hr >tc 5b 7a 8b 0 0 11a 12b 0 0 15a 16a
tc hr 5b 7b 0 9a 10b 11b 12c 13a 14b 15a 16d
tc tc 5b 7b 0 9b 0 11b 12c 13b 14c 15a 16b
tc >tc 5b 7b 0 0 0 11b 12c 0 0 15a 16b
>tc hr 5b 0 0 9a 10b 0 0 13a 14b 15a 16a
>tc tc 5b 0 0 9b 0 0 0 13b 14c 15a 16b
Table Descriptive Notes:
1. The columns labeled Left Side and Right Side indicate the assumed location of the
ENA of the composite section relative to the left and right sides of the beam. Steel
section means that the ENA falls within the height of the steel section (including the
cover plate, if it exists). The designation hr means that the ENA is within the height of
the metal deck. The designation tc means that the ENA is within the height of the
concrete slab above metal deck or within the height of a solid slab. The designation
>tc means that the ENA is above the concrete slab.
2. The column labeled "ye Eqn" tells you whether to use Equation 5a or Equation 5b to
calculate ye for the assumed location of the ENA listed in the first two columns of the
table.
3. The columns labeled "X1 Eqn" through "X10 Eqn" indicate the equation numbers that
should be used to calculate the value of the variables X1 through X10 for use in Equa-
tions 5a and 5b. If one of the cells for X1 through X8 contains a "0," the value of Xn is
zero for that location of the ENA.
4. The variables X9 and X10 are not used if the ENA falls within the height of the steel
beam.
5. The variables X2, X4, X6 and X8 are always taken as zero if the deck span is oriented
perpendicular to the beam span.
6. Using this table requires a trial and error process. You must assume a location for the
ENA and then check if the assumption is correct. See the subsection entitled "Hand
Calculation Process for ye" later in this chapter for more information.

Important note: The terms X2, X4, X6 and X8 are always taken as zero if the
deck span is oriented perpendicular to the beam span; otherwise they are
taken as given in the equations below.
 t c left 
X1 = X 5  z left − 
 Eqn. 7a
 2 
z 
X1 = X 5  left  Eqn. 7b
 2 
X2 is taken as zero if the deck span is oriented perpendicular to the beam

span; if the deck span is oriented parallel to the beam span, X2 is as specified
in the equations below.
 hr left 
X 2 = X 6  z left − t c left − 
 Eqn. 8a
 2 
(
X 2 = X 6 zleft − t c left )2 Eqn. 8b
 t c right 
X 3 = X 7  z right − 
 Eqn. 9a
 2 
 zright 
X 3 = X 7  
 Eqn. 9b
 2 

 hr right 
X 4 = X 8  z right − t c right − 
 Eqn. 10a
 2 
(
X 4 = X 8 zright − t c right )2 Eqn. 10b
b eff left E c left t c left

X5 = Eqn. 11a
Es

b eff left E c left z left

X5 = Eqn. 11b
Es

b eff left E c left wr left hr left

X6 = Eqn. 12a
E s Sr left
b eff left E c left wr left

X6 = Eqn. 12b
2E s Sr left
b eff left E c left

X6 = Eqn. 12c
2E s
b eff right E c right t c right

X7 = Eqn. 13a
Es
b eff right E c right z right

X7 = Eqn. 13b
Es

b eff right E c right wr right hr right

X8 = Eqn. 14a
E s Sr right
b eff right E c right wr right

X8 = Eqn. 14b
2E s Sr right
b eff right E c right

X8 = Eqn. 14c
2E s
X9 = X6 + X8 Eqn. 15a
X9 = X8 Eqn. 15b

X9 = X6 Eqn. 15c
(
X 10 = − A bare − X 5 − 2X 6 z left − t c left − )
Eqn. 16a
(
X 7 − 2X 8 z right − t c right )
X10 = − A bare − X 5 − X 7 Eqn. 16b
( )
X10 = − A bare − X 5 − X 6 zleft − t c left − X 7 Eqn. 16c
(
X10 = − A bare − X 5 − X 7 − X 8 zright − t c right ) Eqn. 16d
The notation used in equations 5a through 16d are as follows:
Abare = Area of the steel beam (plus cover plate), in2. This area
does not include the concrete area.
Ec = Modulus of elasticity of concrete slab, ksi. Note that this

could be different on the left and right sides of the beam.
Also note that this it may be different for stress calcula-
tions and deflection calculations.
Es = Modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi.
Sr = Center-to-center spacing of metal deck ribs, in. Note that

this may be different on the left and right sides of the
beam.
beff = Effective width of the concrete flange of the composite

beam, in. This width is code dependent. Note that this
width may be different on the left and right sides of the
beam. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Ef-
fective Width of the Concrete Slab for additional informa-
tion.

hr = Height of metal deck rib, in. Note that this may be differ-
ent on the left and right sides of the beam.

tc = Thickness of concrete slab, in. If there is metal deck, this

is the thickness of the concrete slab above the metal
deck. Note that this may be different on the left and right
sides of the beam.
wr = Average width of a metal deck rib, in. Note that this may
ybare = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the

steel beam to the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover
plate, if it exists) alone, in.
ye = The distance from the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover
plate, if it exists) alone to the ENA of the fully composite
beam, in.
z = Distance from the ENA of the steel beam (plus cover

plate, if it exists) alone to the top of the concrete slab, in.
Note that this distance may be different on the left and
right sides of the beam.
Hand Calculation Process for ye

The location of the ENA of the composite section, defined by ye, is calculated
using the following process:
1. Assume the ENA is within the height of the steel beam. Use Equation 5a to
calculate the location of the ENA. Table 3 identifies the equations to use to
determine values for the variables X1 through X8 in Equation 5a.
2. If the location of the ENA calculated in step 1 is within the height of the
steel beam, as initially assumed, the location of the ENA is correct and the
calculation for ye is complete.
3. If the calculated ENA is not within the height of the steel beam, as initially
assumed, the location is incorrect and a new assumption for the location
of the neutral axis is made. The new assumption for the location of the
ENA is wherever it was calculated to be in step 1 and is one of the choices
defined in the first two columns of Table 3.
Hand Calculation Process for ye Technical Note 20 - 17

4. Use Equation 5b to calculate the location of the ENA. Note that Table 3
identifies the equations to use to determine values for the variables X1
through X10 for use in solving Equation 5b.
5. If the calculated location of the ENA is the same as the new location as-
sumed in step 3, then the assumption is correct and the calculation for ye
is complete.
6. If the calculated location of the ENA is not the same as the location as-
sumed in step 3, the location is incorrect and another iteration is made.
The new assumption for the location of the ENA is wherever it was calcu-
lated to be in step 4 and is one of the choices defined in the first two col-
umns of Table 3.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 7 as many times as required until the assumed

location of the ENA (based on the choices in the first two columns of Table
3) and the calculated location of the ENA match.
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the

Composite Properties
After the location of the ENA has been calculated, the other calculations to
determine the composite section moment of inertia are non-iterative and
relatively straightforward. The other calculation steps are as follow.
8. Calculate the transformed section properties for full composite connection

as illustrated in Table 4. When reviewing Table 4 note:
a. If the deck spans perpendicular to the beam span, the concrete in the
metal deck ribs is ignored. If the deck spans parallel to the beam span,
the concrete in the metal deck ribs is considered.
b. The cover plate may or may not be present.
c. The concrete slab and metal deck may not exist on one side of the
beam or the other.
Technical Note 20 - 18 Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Composite Properties
Table 4: Transformed Section Properties for a Fully Composite Beam
Transformed
2
Item Area, Atr y1 Atry1 Atry1 IO
Concrete
b eff t *c E c t *c b eff E c t *c 3
d + hr + tc − Atry1 Atry1
2
slab, left side Es 2 12E s
Concrete b eff t *c E c t* b eff E c t *c 3

slab, right d + hr + tc − c Atry1 Atry1
2
Es 2 12E s
side
Concrete in b eff h *r w r E c b eff w r E c h *r 3
h *r
metal deck d + hr − Atry1 Atry1
2
Sr E s 2 12S r E s
ribs, left side
Concrete in b eff h *r w r E c b eff w r E c h *r 3
h*
metal deck d + hr − r Atry1 Atry1
2
Sr E s 2 12S r E s
ribs, right side
Steel beam
2
plus cover Abare ybare Atry1 Atry1 Ibare
plate
2
Sums ΣAtr Σ(Atry1) Σ(Atry1 ) ΣIO
d. The top of the concrete slab may be at a different elevation on the two
sides of the beam.
e. Any concrete that is below the ENA of the composite section is not in-
cluded in the calculation.
Following is a list of the variables introduced in Table 4 that have not been
mentioned previously in this Technical Note.
Atr = Area of an element of the composite steel beam section, in2.
h *r = Height of the metal deck ribs above the ENA (i.e., that is in
compression) used for calculating the transformed section
properties, in. Note that this could be different on the left and
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Composite Properties Technical Note 20 - 19
If the deck ribs are oriented perpendicular to the beam span,

h *r = 0.
If the deck ribs are oriented parallel to the beam span, one of
the following three items applies:
1. If the ENA is below the metal deck, h r = hr.

*
2. If the ENA is within the metal deck, h r equals the height of

*
the metal deck above the ENA.
3. If the ENA is above the metal deck, h r = 0.

*
t *c = Height of the concrete slab above the metal deck (or solid
slab) that lies above the ENA (i.e., is in compression) that is
used for calculating the transformed section properties, in. Note
that this could be different on the left and right sides of the
beam.
One of the following three items applies:
1. If the ENA is below the top of the metal deck (bottom of the
concrete slab), t c = tc.
*
2. If the ENA is within the concrete slab, t c equals the height

*
of the concrete slab above the ENA.
3. If the ENA is above the concrete slab, t c = 0

*
ΣAtr = Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the composite steel
beam section, in2.
Σ(Atry1) =Sum of the product Atr times y1 for all of the elements of the
composite steel beam section, in3.
Σ(Atry12) =Sum of the product Atr times y12 for all of the elements of the
Technical Note 20 - 20 Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Composite Properties
The neutral axis of the transformed composite section is located

a distance y from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel
beam section (not bottom of cover plate). The distance y can
be determined from either Equation 17a or from Equation 17b.
They both give the same result.
y=
∑ (A y ) tr 1
Eqn. 17a
∑A tr
y = ybare + ye Eqn. 17b
The distance y is illustrated in Figure 5.
The transformed section moment of inertia about the ENA of

the composite beam, Itr, is calculated using Equation 18.
I tr = ∑A 2
tr y1 + ∑I O − (∑ A ) y
tr
2
Eqn. 18
Figure 5 illustrates the axis about which Itr is taken.
Elastic neutral axis (ENA) of

composite beam. Itr is taken
about this axis.
y1 for top flange
z
ye
Elastic neutral axis (ENA) of steel

beam alone, including cover plate
y
if it exists
ybare
Bottom of bottom flange of steel

beam. The dimensions y, ybare
and y1 are measured from here.
Figure 5: Illustration of y
Equivalent Hand Calculation Method to Calculate the Composite Properties Technical Note 20 - 21
Technical Note 21
Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite Connection
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates elastic stresses in
the steel section and the concrete slab when there is partial composite con-
nection. Note that because composite action is only considered by the pro-
gram for positive bending, the description in this Technical Note only applies
to positive bending.
When there is partial composite connection, the number of shear connectors

provided controls the amount of horizontal shear that can be transferred be-
tween the steel beam and the concrete slab. For beams with partial composite
connection, the program checks for deflections and stress assuming an elastic
distribution of stress, where the strain in both the concrete and the steel is
proportional to the distance from the elastic neutral axis (ENA) of the trans-
formed section.
Effective Moment of Inertia for Partial Composite

Connection
The effective moment of inertia of the composite section for positive bending
in a partially composite beam is calculated using Equation 1:
I eff = I bare + PCC (I tr − I bare ) Eqn. 1
Note:
Equation 1 is the same as AISC-ASD89 Specification Equation I4-4.
where,
PCC = Percent composite connection, unitless. The percentage

varies between 25% and 100% inclusive.
Ibare = Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone plus cover
plate, if it exists, in4.
Effective Moment of Inertia for Partial Composite Connection Technical Note 21 - 1

Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite Connection Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Ieff = Effective moment of inertia of a partially composite

beam, in4.
Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia about ENA of the

composite beam calculated as described in Composite
Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Trans-
formed Section Moment of Inertia, in4.
Effective Section Modulus Referred to the Extreme

Tension Fiber
The effective section modulus, Seff, referred to the extreme tension fiber in a
partially composite beam is calculated using Equation 2:
Seff = Sbare + PCC (Str − Sbare ) Eqn. 2
Note:
Equation 2 is the same as AISC-ASD89 Specification Equation I2-1.
where,
PCC = Percent composite connection, unitless. The percentage

varies between 25% and 100% inclusive.
Sbare = Section modulus of the steel beam alone (plus cover

plate, if it exists) referred to the extreme tension fiber,
in3.
Seff = Effective section modulus of a partially composite beam

section (including cover plate, if it exists), in3.
Str = Section modulus for the fully (100%) composite trans-

formed section referred to the extreme tension fiber of
the steel section (including cover plate, if it exists), in3.
Referring to Figure 1, Str is calculated using Equation 3.
Note:
The section moduli Str and Seff are referenced to the bottom of the cover plate, if it exists.
Otherwise they are referenced to the bottom of the beam bottom flange.
Technical Note 21 - 2 Effective Section Modulus Referred to the Extreme Tension Fiber
Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite Connection
Elastic neutral axis (ENA) of

composite beam for full (100%)
composite connection. Itr is taken
about this axis.
d
y
tcp
Figure 1: Figure Demonstrating Variables for Calculating Str in Equation 3
I tr
Str = Eqn. 3
(y + t cp )
where,
Itr = Transformed section moment of inertia about the ENA of

the composite beam, calculated as described in Techni-
cal Note Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia, in4.
y = Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange to
the ENA of the composite beam calculated as described
in Technical Note Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Iner-
tia, in.
Location of the ENA for Partial Composite Connection

This section describes how the location of the ENA of the partially composite
section is calculated.
Location of the ENA for Partial Composite Connection Technical Note 21 - 3

Refer to Figure 2. In the figure, the distance from the bottom of the beam
bottom flange to the ENA of the partially composite beam, yeff, is given by
Equation 4:
I eff
y eff = − t cp Eqn. 4
Seff
Note:
The distance yeff is measured from the bottom of the beam bottom flange even when
there is a cover plate.
CL
beff left beff right
beff leftEc left beff rightEc right
Es Es
beff-par left beff-par right tc

hr
ENA of fully
composite beam. Itr
is taken about this
axis.
d
ENA of partially
composite beam.
y
yeff
ybare
ENA of steel beam

alone plus cover
plate if it exists.
tcp
Figure 2: Composite Beam Section
Technical Note 21 - 4 Location of the ENA for Partial Composite Connection

where,
yeff = The distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange
to the ENA of the partially composite beam, in.
Ieff = Effective moment of inertia of a partially composite

beam calculated using Equation 1, in4.
Seff = Effective section modulus of a partially composite beam

section (including cover plate, if it exists) calculated us-
ing Equation 2, in3.
tcp = Thickness of the cover plate if it exists, in.
Steel Section Stresses for Partial Composite

Connection
The steel section stresses (including those in the cover plate, if it exists) are
calculated as described below.
The steel stresses are checked at the top and bottom of the steel beam and at
the bottom of the cover plate, if it exists. Note that in this program, it is pos-
sible for the steel beam section and the cover plate to have a different yield
stress. If there is a cover plate, and if the yield stress of the cover plate is
larger than that of the beam, the allowable stress at the bottom of the cover
plate is larger than that at the bottom of the beam bottom flange. Thus, the
stress at the bottom of the beam bottom flange may control the design.
Equations 5 through 7 show the equations used to determine the stresses for
positive bending.
If a cover plate exists, Equation 5 gives the stress at the bottom of the cover
plate. Otherwise, it gives the stress at the bottom of the beam bottom flange.
M
fbot -st = Eqn. 5
Seff
If a cover plate exists, Equation 6 gives the stress at the bottom of the beam
bottom flange. If there is no cover plate, Equations 5 and 6 are the same.
Steel Section Stresses for Partial Composite Connection Technical Note 21 - 5

My eff
fbot-bm = Eqn. 6
Ieff
Equation 7 gives the stress at the top of the steel beam section.
M [Abs (d - yeff )]
ftop-st = Eqn. 7
Ieff
The term "Abs" in Equation 7 means to take the absolute value of the
(d - yeff) term. The following notation that has not been previously introduced
in this Technical Note is used in Equations 5 through 7.
M = The design moment, kip-in.

fbot-bm = The maximum tensile stress at the bottom of the bottom

flange of the steel beam, ksi.
fbot-st = The maximum tensile stress at the bottom of the steel

section (including cover plate, if it exists), ksi.
ftop-st = The maximum stress at the top of the steel beam (may
be tension or compression, depending on the location of
the ENA), ksi.
For full (100%) composite connection Ieff and yeff in Equations 6 and 7 are
modified as shown in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 23
Bending Stress Checks Equations 1e and 1f.
Concrete Slab Stresses for Partial Composite

Connection
The calculation of concrete slab stresses for partial composite connection in
the program is based on a published paper covering the topic. See Lorenz and
Stockwell (1984). The exact methodology used by this program to calculate
the concrete slab stresses for partial composite connection is optimized for
computer-based calculations and is unsuitable for hand calculations and for
presentation in this Technical Note.
Technical Note 21 - 6 Concrete Slab Stresses for Partial Composite Connection

This section describes in detail a method that can be used to calculate the
concrete slab stresses for partial composite connection by hand that will yield
the same result as the program. The method presented here parallels much
of what is done internally in the program.
Note:
Although the equation for the effective slab width of a partially composite beam is derived
by considering bounding conditions of 0% and 100% composite connection, the program
actually limits the minimum percent composite connection to 25%.
Refer to Figure 2. On each side of the beam the effective width of the slab for
the partially composite beam, beff-par left and beff-par right, varies from the value
for full composite action, beff left(Ec left /Es) and beff right(Ec right /Es), to zero as the
percent composite connection varies from 100% to 0%. Formulas for beff-par left
and beff-par right are derived from the definition of the elastic neutral axis (ENA)
together with the assumption that the ratio of the effective widths of the con-
crete slab on the left and right sides of the beam remains constant for any
percentage of composite connection. Equation 8 is a formula representing this
assumption.
beff left beff −par left

= Eqn. 8
beff right beff −par right
From the definition of the ENA, if you multiply the area of individual elements
of a composite section times their distance to the ENA (considering the sign of
the distance term), and then sum up these products for all elements of the
composite section, the result is zero. This statement is shown as a formula in
Equation 9.
X1 - beff-par left ( X2 + X4) - beff-par right ( X3 + X5) = 0 Eqn. 9
Note:
See Figures 3, 4 and 5 for illustrations of the physical distances represented by the vari-
ables a3 and a4 in Equations 9a through 9e.
where:
X1 = Abare (yeff - ybare) Eqn. 9a
a3 left
X2 = a3 left (d + hr left + tc left - - yeff) Eqn. 9b
2
Concrete Slab Stresses for Partial Composite Connection Technical Note 21 - 7

a3 right
X3 = a3 right (d + hr right + tc right - - yeff) Eqn. 9c
2
a4 left wr left  a 
X4 =  d + hr left − 4 left − yeff  Eqn. 9d
Sr left  2 
 
a4 right wr right  a 
X5 =  d + hr right − 4 right − yeff  Eqn. 9e
Sr right  2 
 
Table 1 lists the values that should be used for the variables a3 and a4 in
Equations 9a through 9e for all possible conditions. The possible conditions
are different combinations of the location of the ENA for the partially compos-
ite beam and the deck direction. Note that a3 and a4 are evaluated separately
for each side of the beam and can be different for the left and right sides of
the beam.
Table 1: Values that Should Be Used for the Variables A3 and A4 in Equa-
tions 9a through 9e. Physical Representations of A3 and A4 are
Shown in Figures 3, 4 and 5
Deck
ENA Location Direction a31, 2 a41, 3
Above the concrete slab over metal deck (or Parallel or
N.A.4 N.A.4
the solid slab) Perpendicular
In the concrete slab over metal deck (or the Parallel or
d + hr + tc - yeff N.A.4
solid slab) Perpendicular
Within the height of the metal deck Parallel tc d + hr - yeff
Within the height of the metal deck Perpendicular tc N.A.5
Within the height of the steel beam Parallel tc hr
Within the height of the steel beam Perpendicular tc N.A.5
1. When the cell for an an value indicates "N.A." a value of 0 should be used in Equations 9a through 9e
for that item. The notes below explain why the various "N.A." items are indicated.
2. The a3 dimension represents a distance within the height of the concrete slab.
3. The a4 dimension represents a distance within the height of the metal deck ribs.

4. The an dimension is not applicable because it would represent concrete below the ENA, which is in ten-
sion and thus ignored in the calculations.
5. The a4 dimension is not applicable because it represents concrete in the metal deck ribs. This concrete
is ignored in the calculations when the deck span is perpendicular to the beam span.
Figures 3, 4 an 5 illustrate the physical distances represented by the variables

a3, a4 and a5 for various locations of the ENA of the partially composite beam.
a3
tc
hr
ENA of partially
composite beam
located within
concrete slab above
yeff
the metal deck (or in
d
a solid slab)
tcp
Figure 3: Illustration of Variable a3 in Equations 9a through 9e When the

ENA is in the Concrete Slab Above the Metal Deck or in a Solid
Slab

a3 t c
a4 hr
ENA of partially
composite beam
located within metal
deck
d
eff
y
cp
t
Figure 4: Illustration of Variables a3 and a4 in Equations 9a through 9e

When the ENA is Within the Height of the Metal Deck
a3
tc
a4
hr
d
ENA of partially
composite beam
yeff
located within the

height of the steel
section
tcp
Figure 5: Illustration of Variables a3 and a4 in Equations 9a through 9e

When the ENA is Located Within the Height of the Steel Section

Next we can substitute Equation 8 into Equation 9 and solve for beff-par left and
beff-par right. The resulting equations are shown here as Equations 10a and 10b.
X1
beff −par right = Eqn. 10a
  beff left  
(X2 + X 4 )  + (X3 + X5 )
 beff right 
   
 beff left 
X1  
 beff right 
beff −par left =   Eqn. 10b
  beff left  
(X2 + X 4 )  + (X3 + X5 )
  beff right  
 
Note:
The width beff-par is the effective width of the concrete slab for partial composite connec-
tion. It is transformed to an equivalent width of steel.
The following notation is used in Equations 8 through 10b:
Abare = Area of the steel beam (plus cover plate, if one exists),
in2.
Sr = Center-to-center spacing of metal deck ribs, in. Note

that this could be different on the left and right sides of
the beam.
a3 = Whichever is smaller of the distance from the top of the

concrete slab to the ENA or the thickness of the concrete
above the metal deck (or the thickness of a solid slab),
tc, in. This item may be different on the left and right
sides of the beam.
a4 = Whichever is smaller of the distance from the top of the

metal deck to the ENA or the height of the metal deck,
hr, in. This item applies when there is metal deck (not a
solid slab) and the ENA is below the top of the metal
deck. This item may be different on the left and right
sides of the beam.

beff = The effective width of the concrete slab for full (100%)
composite action, in. Note that this may be different on
beff-par = The effective width of the concrete slab for partial com-
posite action transformed to have the same E as the
steel section, in. Note that this item may be different on
hr = Height of the metal deck ribs, in. Note that this item
tc = Thickness of concrete slab, in. If there is metal deck,

this is the thickness of the concrete slab above the
metal deck. Note that this item may be different on the
left and right sides of the beam.
wr = Average width of metal deck rib, in. Note that this item
ybare = The distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange
to the ENA of the steel beam plus cover plate, if it ex-
ists, in. See Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Tech-
nical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia.
No composite connection (concrete slab) is considered
when calculating this item.
yeff = The distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange
to the ENA of the partially composite beam, in.

The section moduli on each side of the beam referred to the top of the par-
tially composite section, St-eff left and St-eff right, are given by Equations 11a and
11b:
Ieff
St −eff left = Eqn. 11a
(d + hr left + t c left − yeff )
Ieff
St −eff right = Eqn. 11b
(d + hr right + tc right − yeff )
where,
Ieff = Effective moment of inertia of the partially composite

beam calculated using Equation 1, in4.
Finally, the concrete compressive stress, fc, for a partially composite beam is
calculated as the larger of Equations 12a and 12b:
M  beff −par left 

fc left =   Eqn. 12a
St − eff left  b 
 eff left 
M  beff −par right 

fc right =   Eqn. 12b
St −eff right  beff right 
 
where,
M = The design moment, kip-in. For unshored beams M =

MSDL + MLL + MOther. For shored beams M = MDL + MSDL +
MLL + MOther.
St-eff = The section modulus for the partial composite section

referred to the top of the equivalent transformed section
calculated using Equation 11a or 11b, as appropriate,
in3. Note that this item may be different on the left and
right sides of the beam. (For full [100%] composite con-
nection see Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Tech-
nical Note 23 Bending Stress Checks, Equations 1a and
1c instead of Equations 11a and 11b.)

beff = The effective width of the concrete slab, in. Note that
this could be different on the left and right sides of the
beam.
beff-par = The effective width of the concrete slab for partial com-
posite action transformed to have the same E as the
steel section, in. This item is calculated using Equation
10a for the slab on the right side of the beam and 10b
for the slab on the left side of the beam. (For full
[100%] composite connection see Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 23 Bending Stress
Checks, Equations 1b and 1d instead of Equations 10a
and 10b.)
fc = The maximum concrete compressive stress, ksi.

Technical Note 22
Allowable Bending Stresses
General
This Technical Note describes how the program determines the allowable
bending stresses using the AISC-ASD89 specification for composite beams.
The methodologies for determining the allowable bending stress for both the
steel beam alone and the composite beam are described.
Important note concerning cover plates: This section describes how the
allowable bending stresses are determined for steel beams. When a cover
plate is present, the program determines the allowable stresses for the beam
as if the cover plate were not present, except as noted in Note 3 for Table 1.
Based on the allowable bending stress at the bottom of the beam bottom
flange, Fb-bbf, which the program determines as described in this Technical
Note, the allowable bending stress at the bottom of the cover plate, Fb-bcp is
taken as shown in Equation 1.
 Fy cp 
Fb-bcp = Fb −bbf   Eqn. 1
 Fy 
 
where,
Fb-bbf = Allowable bending stress at the bottom of the beam

bottom flange, ksi.
Fb-bcp = Allowable bending stress at the bottom of the cover

plate, ksi.
Fy = Yield stress of beam, ksi.
Fycp = Yield stress of cover plate, ksi.

Allowable Bending Stresses Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam Alone

This section documents the allowable bending stresses that the program uses
when the steel beam alone (noncomposite) resists the bending. Allowable
bending stresses are provided for both compression and tension.
Note:
Allowable stresses for composite beams are described in the section entitled “Allowable
Bending Stresses for Positive Bending in the Composite Beam” later in this Technical
Note.
The allowable bending stress for the steel beam alone depends on the type of
beam section, whether the compression flange and the web are compact or
noncompact, the yield stress of the beam and the unsupported length of the
compression flange, Lb. Table 1 identifies the equations that are used to cal-
culate the allowable bending stress of the steel beam alone for various condi-
tions.
Table 1 is based on the requirements of Chapter F, Section F1 in the AISC-

ASD89 specification. The compact and noncompact requirements that the
programe uses for the flanges, web and the cover plate (if it exists and is in
compression) are presented in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Techni-
cal Note 19 Width-to-Thickness Checks.
In the Flange and Cover Plate column of Table 1, if the flange or the cover
plate is noncompact, the column entry is noncompact. Both the flange and
the cover plate must be compact for the entry to be compact.
Technical Note 22 - 2 Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam Alone

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Allowable Bending Stresses
Table 1 Equations Used by the Program for Allowable Bending

Stress for Steel Beam Alone
Flange Unsupported
and Length of Equation(s) for Fb,
Type of Cover Beam Compression the Allowable Bending
Beam Section Plate Web Fy Flange1 Stress
3
compact compact ≤ 65 ksi ≤ Lc
in tension or compression
6
compact compact > 65 ksi ≤ Lc
6
compact noncompact No limit ≤ Lc
Rolled I-shaped or
4
channel section noncompact compact ≤ 65 ksi ≤ Lc
from the program
6
database noncompact compact > 65 ksi ≤ Lc
6
noncompact noncompact No limit ≤ Lc
6 for tension; larger of 7 or
compact or compact or
No limit > Lc 8, as applicable and 9 for
noncompact noncompact
compression2
3
compact compact ≤ 65 ksi ≤ Lc
6
compact compact > 65 ksi ≤ Lc
User defined
6
(welded) section compact noncompact No limit ≤ Lc
that is
compact or 5
I-shaped or a noncompact ≤ 65 ksi ≤ Lc
noncompact in tension or compression
channel
compact or 6
noncompact > 65 ksi ≤ Lc
noncompact in tension or compression
6 for tension; larger of 7 or
compact or compact or
No limit > Lc 8, as applicable and 9 for
noncompact noncompact
compression2, 3
1. See Equation 2 for Lc.
2. Equations 7 and 8 do not apply to channels.
3. For I-shaped beams, Equation 9 does not apply if the area of the compression flange is less
than the area of the tension flange. For this check the area of the cover plate is included as
part of the flange area.
Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam Alone Technical Note 22 - 3

In the fifth column of Table 1, the unsupported length of the compression

flange is compared to Lc. The length Lc is defined in Equation 2.
76b f 20000
L c = smaller of and Eqn. 2
Fy (d A f )Fy
The Af and bf terms in Equation 2 are the area and width of the beam com-
pression flange (not including cover plate even if it exists), respectively.
These terms are never based on the cover plate dimensions. The Fy term is
the yield stress of the beam (not cover plate)
The equations referred to in the last column of Table 1 are listed below.
Fb = 0.66 Fy Eqn. 3
 b 
Fb = Fy 0.79 − 0.002 f Fy  Eqn. 4
 2t f 
 b Fy 
Fb = Fy 0.79 − 0.002 f  Eqn. 5
 2t f kc 

where
4.05
kc = , for h/tw > 70, otherwise kc = 1 Eqn. 5a
(h t w )0.46
Fb = 0.60 Fy Eqn. 6
In Equation 6, the program takes Fy as the yield stress of the compression

flange for hybrid beams.
102 * 10 3 C b l 510 * 10 3 C b
When ≤ ≤
Fy rT Fy
Eqn. 7
Fy (l rT )
2
2 
Fb =  − Fy ≤ 0.60Fy
 3 1,530 * 10 3 C b 
Technical Note 22 - 4 Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam Alone

l 510 * 103 Cb
When >
rT Fy
Eqn. 8
170 * 103 Cb
Fb = ≤ 0.60Fy
(l rT )2
12 * 103 Cb
Fb = ≤ 0.60Fy Eqn. 9
(ld A f )
In Equations 7 and 8, the l term in l/rT is the unbraced length of the compres-
sion flange. The rT term is based on the compression flange of the beam. This
is significant when the dimensions of the top and bottom flanges are different.
For rolled sections, the rT term is taken from the program database. For user-
defined (welded) sections, the rT term is calculated using Equation 10a or
10b. Equation 10a applies for positive bending and Equation 10b applies for
negative bending. If it exists, the cover plate is ignored when calculating rT.
For positive bending:
b 3f − top t f − top (d − y bare − t f −top ) t 3w

+
rT = 12 36 Eqn. 10a
(d − y bare − t f −top ) t w
b f − top t f − top +
3
For negative bending:
b 3f −bot t f −bot (y − t f −bot ) t 3w

+ bare
rT = 12 36 Eqn. 10b
(y − t f −bot ) t w
b f −bot t f −bot + bare
3
The Cb term in Equations 7, 8 and 9 is defined in "Bracing (C) Tab and Brac-
ing Tab" in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASC89 Technical Note 18 Over-
writes.
In Equation 9 Af is the area of the compression flange (not including the cover
plate even if it exists).
Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam Alone Technical Note 22 - 5

The derivation of ybare is provided in "Properties of Steel Beam (Plus Cover

Plate) Alone" in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20
Transformed Section Moment of Inertia.
Allowable Bending Stresses for Positive Bending in the

Composite Beam
Note:
Allowable stresses when composite connection is not considered is described earlier in
this Technical Note in the section entitled “Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam
Alone.”
Figure 1 shows a typical composite beam. When there is positive bending in

the beam there is compression at the top of the concrete and tension at the
bottom of the beam. For positive bending in a composite beam, the program
checks the stresses at the following locations:
Compression stress at the top of the concrete. This stress is limited to

0.45 f c' .
Tension or compression at the top of the top flange of the beam. See Table
2 for the allowable stress.
Tension or compression at the bottom of the bottom flange of the beam. In

practice, it is unlikely that the bottom flange of the beam will ever be in
compression for positive bending. It would require an extremely large cover
plate, beyond the bounds of practicality. See Table 2 for the allowable
stress.
Tension at the bottom of the cover plate. See Table 2 and the section enti-
tled “General” at the beginning of this Technical Note for the allowable
stress.
Table 2 defines the equations that are used to calculate the allowable bending
stress for the steel beam portion of a composite beam section for various
conditions. The equation used depends on whether the beam web is compact
and whether the yield stress is less than or equal to 65 ksi.
Technical Note 22 - 6 Allowable Bending Stresses for Positive Bending in the Composite Beam
Concrete slab
tc
hr
Metal deck
d
Steel beam
tcp
Cover plate bcp
Figure 1: Composite Beam
Table 2: Equations the Program Uses to Calculate the Allowable Bend-

ing Stress in the Steel Beam Portion of a Composite Beam
Type of Beam Equations Used for Allowable Stresses

Section Web Beam Fy Compression Tension
compact ≤ 65 ksi 11 11
non-
Any ≤ 65 ksi 12 12
compact
composite beam
compact or
> 65 ksi 12 12
noncompact
Fb = 0.66 Fy Eqn.11
Fb = 0.60 Fy Eqn. 12
Allowable Bending Stresses for Positive Bending in the Composite Beam Technical Note 22 - 7
Technical Note 23
Bending Stress Checks
This Technical Note describes how the program checks the bending stress for
AISC-ASD89 design. The bending stress checks are described for the cases
with and without composite action.
Bending Stress Checks Without Composite Action

At each output station where there is negative moment in a composite section
or there is positive or negative moment in a noncomposite section, the asso-
ciated bending stress is checked at the following positions in the beam, as
applicable.
The top of the top flange of the steel beam.
The bottom of the bottom flange of the steel beam.
The bottom of the cover plate if it exists.
Table 1 lists the equations that ETABS uses to calculate both the actual
bending stress and the allowable bending stress at each of these positions.
Table 1: Equations for Actual and Allowable Stresses for

Noncomposite Bending
Equation for Equation for
Calculating Actual Bending Calculating Allowable Bending
Location Stress Stress
Top of beam See Table 1 in Composite Beam
top flange M (d − y bare ) Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
I bare Note 22 Allowable Bending
Stresses.
Bottom of See Table 1 in Composite Beam
beam M y bare Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
bottom I bare Note 22 Allowable Bending
flange Stresses.
Bending Stress Checks Without Composite Action Technical Note 23 - 1

Bending Stress Checks Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Table 1: Equations for Actual and Allowable Stresses for

Noncomposite Bending
Equation for Equation for
Calculating Actual Bending Calculating Allowable Bending
Location Stress Stress
Bottom of See Table 1 in Composite Beam
cover plate M (y bare + t cp ) Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
I bare Note 22 Allowable Bending
Stresses.
The following notation is used in the equations in the second column of
Table 1:
Ibare = Moment of inertia of the steel beam (plus cover plate, if

one exists), in4. See Equation 3 in Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed Section
Moment of Inertia.
M = The design moment, kip-in.

ybare = Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the

steel section to the elastic neutral axis (ENA) of the steel
beam (plus cover plate, if it exists), in. See Equation 2 in
Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20
Transformed Section Moment of Inertia.
Positive Moment in a Composite Beam

At each output station where there is positive moment in the composite sec-
tion, the associated bending stress is checked at the following positions in the
composite beam, as applicable.
The top of the concrete slab. This check is performed separately on each
side of the beam.
The top of the top flange of the steel beam.
Technical Note 23 - 2 Positive Moment in a Composite Beam

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Bending Stress Checks
The bottom of the bottom flange of the steel beam.
The bottom of the cover plate, if it exists.
Table 2 lists the equations that the program uses to calculate both the actual
bending stress and the allowable bending stress at each of these positions. In
addition to the checks listed in Table 2, if the beam is unshored, the program
performs additional checks. These checks are described in the section entitled
"Important Notes Regarding Unshored Composite Beams" later in this Techni-
cal Note.
Table 2: Equations for Actual and Allowable Stresses for Positive

Bending in a Composite Beam
Equation for Calculating Equation for Calculating

Location Actual Bending Stress Allowable Bending Stress
Top of concrete 12a, 12b 0.45f'c
in Composite Beam Design AISC-
ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic
Stresses with Partial Composite
Connection.
Top of beam top 7 11 or 12 in Composite Beam
flange in Composite Beam Design AISC- Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Note 22 Allowable Bending
Stresses with Partial Composite Stresses.
Connection. See Table 2 in the same Note.
Bottom of beam 6 11 or 12 in Composite Beam
bottom flange in Composite Beam Design AISC- Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Note 22 Allowable Bending
Stresses with Partial Composite Stresses.
Connection. See Table 2 in the same Note.
Bottom of cover 5 1 together with 11 or 12 in
plate in Composite Beam Design AISC- Composite Beam Design
ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic AISC-ASD89 Technical Note
Stresses with Partial Composite 22 Allowable Bending
Connection. Stresses.
See Table 2 in the same Note.
Positive Moment in a Composite Beam Technical Note 23 - 3

The equations referred to in the second column of Table 2 for calculating ac-
tual bending stress are derived for partial composite connection. When there
is full (100%) composite connection, make the substitutions shown in Equa-
tions 1a through 1g into those equations:
Note:
The formulas shown in Equations 1a through 1g are not in general true. They only apply
as substitutions into the equations listed in Table 2 when you are considering full (100%)
composite connection rather than partial composite connection.
Equations 1a and 1b show the substitutions to make into Equation 12a of

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with
Partial Composite Connection if you are considering full (100%) composite
connection.
Itr
St −eff left = Eqn. 1a
(d + hr left + tc left − y )
beff par left = beff left (Ec left / Es) Eqn. 1b
Equations 1c and 1d show the substitutions to make into Equations 12b of

connection.
Itr
St −eff right = Eqn. 1c
(d + hr right + tc right − y )
beff par right = beff right (Ec right / Es) Eqn. 1d
Equations 1e and 1f show the substitutions to make into Equations 6 and 7 of

connection.
yeff = y Eqn. 1e
Ieff = Itr Eqn. 1f
The y term in Equations 1a, 1c and 1e is the distance from the bottom of the
beam bottom flange to the elastic neutral axis (ENA) of the composite beam.
Technical Note 23 - 4 Positive Moment in a Composite Beam

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Bending Stress Checks
The distance y can be calculated using Equation 17a or 17b of Composite

Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of
Inertia.
The Itr term in Equation 1f is the transformed section moment of inertia about
the ENA of the composite beam assuming full (100%) composite connection.
This moment of inertia can be calculated using Equation 18 of Composite
Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of
Inertia.
Equation 1g shows the substitution to make into Equation 5 of Composite

Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with Partial
Composite Connection if you are considering full (100%) composite connec-
tion.
Seff = Str Eqn. 1g
The Str term in Equation 1g is the section modulus for the fully (100%) com-
posite transformed section referred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel
section (including cover plate, if it exists). This section modulus can be calcu-
lated using Equation 3 of Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Note 21 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite Connection.
Important Notes Regarding Unshored Composite

Beams
Steel Stress Checks
For unshored composite beams, the stresses are checked as described above.
In addition, for unshored composite beams only (not shored beams and not
noncomposite beams), the program also checks that the bending stresses in
the steel beam do not exceed 0.9 Fy when stresses are computed assuming
the steel section alone resists the DL moment and the composite section re-
sists the SDL + LL + Other moment.
Equations 2a through 2c illustrate how these stress checks are performed by

the program.
At the top of the beam top flange:
Important Notes Regarding Unshored Composite Beams Technical Note 23 - 5

MDL (d − ybare ) MAll Other (d - yeff )

+ ≤ 0.9 Fy Eqn. 2a
Ibare Ieff
At the bottom of the beam bottom flange:
MDL ybare MAll Other yeff

+ ≤ 0.9 Fy Eqn. 2b
Ibare Ieff
At the bottom of the cover plate, if it exists:
(
MDL ybare + tcp ) + MAll Other ≤ 0.9 Fy Eqn. 2c
Ibare Seff
In Equations 2a through 2c, MDL is the moment due to dead load and MAll Other
is the moment due to all other loads (except dead load).
Concrete Stress Checks

For unshored composite beams, the bending stress check for the concrete
slab is determined based on the SDL + LL + All Other Loads, not the TL mo-
ment. In other words, for unshored beams, the steel beam alone is assumed
to carry all of the DL moment alone. The composite section carries the rest of
the moment.
In the above paragraph,
DL = dead load
SDL = superimposed dead load
LL = live load
TL = total load
Technical Note 23 - 6 Important Notes Regarding Unshored Composite Beams

Technical Note 24
Beam Shear Checks
This Technical Note describes how the program checks the beam end reaction
for shear for AISC-ASD89 composite beam design.
The program performs two checks for beam end shear. The first is based on
the allowable shear stress specified in AISC-ASD89 Specification Section F4.
If the beam does not pass this shear stress check, the program indicates that
the beam is inadequate. This shear check is described in the section entitled
"Shear Stress Check."
The second check the program performs is based on the allowable shear
rupture (block shear) specified in AISC-ASD89 Specification Section J4. This
check is completed based on several built-in assumptions about bolt size, bolt
spacing, cope depth, etc. If the beam does not pass this shear rupture check,
the program does not indicate that the beam is inadequate. Instead, it issues
a design warning message in the output that the block shear may be high for
the beam. This shear check is described in the section entitled "Shear Rupture
Check" in this Technical Note
Shear Stress Check

Typical Case
For h/tw ≤ 380 Fy the allowable shear stress is shown in Equation 1, which is
the same as AISC-ASD89 Specification Equation F4-1.
Fv = 0.40 Fy Eqn. 1
where,
Fv = Allowable shear stress, ksi.
Fy = Beam yield stress, ksi.
The shear stress to which Equation 1 applies is calculated using Equation 2.
Shear Stress Check Technical Note 24 - 1

Beam Shear Checks Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
V
fv = Eqn. 2
( )
d − C bot − C top t w
where,
Cbot = Cope depth at bottom of beam, in.
Ctop = Cope depth at top of beam, in.
V = Beam end shear at the inside end of the rigid end offset
along the length of the beam (if the offset exists), kips.
d = Beam depth, in.
fv = Shear stress, ksi.
tw = Beam web thickness, in.
Note:
The top and bottom copes are internally calculated by the program and reported in the
long- and short-form printed output. See the section entitled "Copes" later in this Techni-
cal Note for more information on beam copes.
Note that Equation 2 is based on the full depth of the beam minus the top and
bottom copes. The copes are internally calculated by the program and are re-
ported in the printed output. See the following section titled "Copes" for in-
formation on how the program determines the assumed copes.
Slender Web
For h/tw > 380 Fy the allowable shear stress is that shown in Equation 3.
Equation 3 is based on AISC-ASD89 Specification Equation F4-2 with kv set
equal to 5.34.
Fy
F v = Cv ≤ 0.40Fy Eqn. 3
2.89
where
45,000 * 5.34
Cv = when Cv ≤ 0.8 Eqn. 3a
Fy (h t w )
2
Technical Note 24 - 2 Shear Stress Check

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Beam Shear Checks
190 5.34
Cv = when Cv > 0.8 Eqn. 3b
h tw Fy
The shear stress to which Equation 3 applies is calculated using Equation 4.
V
fv = Eqn. 4
(d − *
C bot )
− C *top t w
where
C*bot = maximum of Cbot or tf bot Eqn. 4a
C*top = maximum of Ctop or tf top Eqn. 4b
Note that Equation 4 is based on the clear distance between the flanges of the
beam minus any portion of the top and bottom copes that extends into this
clear distance. This is different from the typical, non-slender web case.
Finally, note that the value of h/tw is limited by the requirements for a non-
compact web. See "Noncompact Section Limits for Webs" in Composite Beam
Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 19 Width-to-Thickness Checks for more
information.
Copes
The program calculates the default beam copes as follows:
If the beam frames into a column or a brace, by default, no cope is as-

sumed at either the top or the bottom of the beam.
If a beam, call it Beam A, frames into another beam, call it Beam B, the
following copes are assumed in Beam A, as shown in Figure 1:
9 The depth of the cope at the top of Beam A is equal to the thickness of
the Beam B top flange plus 1/4".
9 If the depth of Beam A is greater than the depth of Beam B minus the
bottom flange thickness of Beam B minus 1/4", the depth of the cope
at the bottom of Beam A is equal to the depth of Beam A minus the
depth of Beam B plus the bottom flange thickness of Beam B plus
1/4".
Copes Technical Note 24 - 3

tf-top + 1/4"
tf-top
Beam B Beam A
tf-bot + 1/4"
dB
dA
tf-bot
f-bot + 1/4"
dA - d +
B
Figure 1: Default Beam Copes
Important note: In some cases when you use auto select section lists and
you compare the cope dimensions reported in the output with the cope di-
mensions calculated using the above-described method considering the cur-
rent design sections for the beam and the girder, you may see different re-
sults. The reason for this is that the beam may have been designed before
the girder, and thus the cope dimensions for the beam were calculated based
on an older design section for the girder. This illustrates that the design is an
iterative process. You must cycle through your design and analysis several
times before you get final results. Also you should always run one final design
check with all auto select section lists removed; that is, with actual beam
sections assigned to all elements.
Shear Rupture Check

The program checks for shear rupture based on AISC-ASD89 Specification
Section J4. The shear rupture check is only performed at the end of a beam if
the top flange of the beam is coped at that end. Several assumptions are re-
quired for the program to perform this check. They include:
1. A single row of 7/8" diameter bolts is assumed.
2. The bolt spacing is assumed to be 3 inches.
Technical Note 24 - 4 Shear Rupture Check

3. Standard bolt holes are assumed. The diameter of the bolt hole is as-
sumed to be 15/16".
4. The number of bolts assumed is based on the T dimension of the beam as

shown in Table 1. For rolled sections, the T dimension, which is tabulated
in the AISC manual, is equal to d -2k. For welded sections, the program
assumes that the T dimension equals d - tf-top - tf-bot - 1 inch.
where,
d = Beam depth, in.
k = Distance from outside face of rolled beam flange to toe

of web fillet, in.
tf-bot = Thickness of beam bottom flange, in.
tf-top = Thickness of beam top flange, in.
Table 1: Assumed Number of Bolts Based on Beam T Dimension
T Dimension Range Assumed Number of Bolts

T < 6.5" Shear rupture not checked
6.5" ≤ T < 9.5" 2
9.5" ≤ T < 12.5" 3
12.5" ≤ T < 16.5" 4
16.5" ≤ T < 19.5" 5
19.5" ≤ T < 22.5" 6
22.5" ≤ T < 25.5" 7
25.5" ≤ T < 28.5" 8
28.5" ≤ T < 31.5" 9
T ≥ 31.5 10
5. The distance from the center of the top bolt hole to the top edge of the
beam web (at the cope), lv, is 1.5 inches.
6. The distance from the center of any bolt hole to the end of the beam web,
lh, is 1.5 inches.
Shear Rupture Check Technical Note 24 - 5

lv = 1.5"
Shear plane
3” typ.
Tension plane
lh = 1.5"
Figure 2: Illustration of Shear Rupture Assumptions and Terms
7. The allowable shear rupture stress is calculated based on shear fracture

along the shear plane and tension yield along the tension plane.
See Figure 2 for an illustration of the assumptions in items 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7.
The allowable beam shear (end reaction) based on shear rupture is calculated
using Equation 5.
Vall = 0.30 Fu Ans + 0.60 Fy Agt Eqn. 5
where,
Agt = Gross area along the tension plane, in2. See Equation
6.
Ans = Net area along the shear plane, in2. See Equation
7.
Fu = Minimum specified tensile strength of structural steel,

ksi.
Vall = Allowable shear at end of beam, kips.
The gross area along the tension plane, Agt, is given by Equation 6.
Agt = lh tw Eqn. 6
Technical Note 24 - 6 Shear Rupture Check

where,
lh = The distance from the center of a bolt hole to the end of

the beam web, in. The program assumes this distance to
be 1.5 inches, as shown in Figure 2.
The net area along the shear plane, Ans, is given by Equation 7.
Ans = [lv + 3(n - 1) - (15/16)(n - 0.5)] tw Eqn. 7
where,
lv = The distance from the center of the top bolt hole to the
top edge of the beam web (at the cope), in. The pro-
gram assumes this distance to be 1.5 inches, as shown
in Figure 2.
n = The number of bolts as determined from Table 1,

unitless.
If the allowable shear at the end of the beam, Vall, is less than the beam end
reaction, the program prints a design warning message in the output.
Limitations of Shear Check

Following are some limitations of the program check for beam end shear in
the Composite Beam Design postprocessor.
1. You cannot specify transverse web stiffeners.
2. No check is made for shear on the net section considering the bolt holes,
except as noted in the following item 3.
3. The shear rupture (block shear) check specified in AISC-ASD89 Specifica-

tion Section J4 is performed as described in the section above entitled
"Shear Rupture Check." If the beam does not satisfy the shear rupture
check, only a warning suggesting you should check shear rupture (block
Limitations of Shear Check Technical Note 24 - 7

shear) is issued in the output. The program does not fail the beam be-
cause it does not pass the shear rupture check.
4. Tension field action, as described in AISC-ASD89 specification Chapter G

is not considered.
Technical Note 24 - 8 Limitations of Shear Check

Technical Note 25
Shear Studs
Overview
This Technical Note begins by defining the program default allowable shear
stud horizontal loads for AISC-ASD89 composite beam design. Next some of
the basic equations used for determining the number of shear studs on the
beam are provided.
Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 26 Calculations for

Number of Shear Studs describes how the program determines the distribu-
tion of shear studs on a composite beam. It also introduces the concept of
composite beam segments. It is very important that you understand the defi-
nition of a composite beam segment so that you can properly interpret the
reported number of shear studs in the composite beam output.
Composite Beam Design Technical Note 14 The Number of Shear Studs that
Fit in a Composite Beam Segment describes how the program determines the
maximum number of shear studs that fit in a composite beam segment. The
program also checks that the shear studs it specifies can fit on the beam. See
also Composite Beam Design Technical Note 15 User-Defined Shear Stud
Patterns for more information.
Shear Stud Connectors

The unmodified allowable horizontal load for shear studs is calculated using
Equation 1. As described later, this allowable load may be modified if there is
formed metal deck.
q = 0.25Asc f c' E c ≤ 0.5AscFu Eqn. 1
where,
Asc = Cross-sectional area of shear stud, in2.

Shear Studs Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
f'c = Compressive strength of concrete slab, ksi.
Ec = Young’s modulus for the concrete slab as specified in the

material property definition associated with the slab, ksi.
Fu = Minimum specified tensile strength of shear stud, ksi.
Equation 1 is based on AISC-LRFD93 Specifications Equation I5-1 with a

safety factor of 2 applied to it. Note that this equation is also discussed in the
AISC-ASD89 specifications commentary for Chapter I. Equation 1 gives allow-
able shear stud loads similar, but not exactly the same, to those obtained
using Tables I4.1 and I4.2 in the AISC-ASD89 specification. If you want to
use values that are exactly the same as those obtained from AISC-ASD89 Ta-
bles I4.1 and I4.2, you should assign a value of q in the overwrites.
If there is formed metal deck, the value of q obtained from Equation 1 is re-
duced by a reduction factor, RF, whose value depends on the direction of the
deck span relative to the beam span. The reduction factor is different de-
pending on whether the span of the metal deck ribs is oriented parallel or
perpendicular to the span of the beam. The subsections below entitled “Re-
duction Factor when Metal Deck is Perpendicular to Beam” and “Reduction
Factor when Metal Deck is Parallel to Beam” describe the reduction factors for
the two deck directions.
Important note #1: The metal deck reduction factor, RF, only applies to the
0.25Asc f c' E c term in Equation 1. It does not apply to the 0.5AscFu term.
Important note #2: When there is slab on both sides of the beam, the pro-
gram calculates q for each side of the beam separately using Equation 1 and
the appropriate metal deck reduction factor if applicable. The program then
uses the smaller of the two q values in the calculations.
Important note #3: When you specify a q value in the composite beam
overwrites, the program assumes that the specified value of q already in-
cludes a metal deck reduction factor, if applicable. Thus the program does not
modify the specified q value based on the metal deck configuration.
Reduction Factor when Metal Deck is Perpendicular to Beam

When the span of the metal deck is perpendicular to the beam span, the al-
lowable horizontal load per shear stud specified in Equation 1 is multiplied by
Technical Note 25 - 2 Shear Stud Connectors

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Shear Studs
the reduction factor specified in Equation 2 to yield the final allowable hori-
zontal load for a single shear stud.
 0.85   wr   Hs 
RF =   
h


 
 h − 1.0  ≤ 1.0 Eqn. 2
 N   r   r 
 r 
where,
RF = Reduction factor for the allowable horizontal load for a

shear stud, unitless.
hr = Height of metal deck rib, in.
Hs = Length of shear stud after welding, in.
Nr = Number of shear studs in one metal deck rib, but not

more than 3 in the calculations even if more than 3 studs
exist in the rib, unitless. The program uses whatever
value is specified for the Max Studs per Row item on the
Shear Studs tab in the composite beam overwrites for Nr,
unless that value exceeds 3, in which case the program
uses 3. Note that the default value for the Max Studs per
Row item in the overwrites is 3.
Reduction Factor when Metal Deck is Parallel to Beam

When the ratio wr/hr is less than 1.5, the allowable horizontal load per shear
stud specified in Equation 1 is multiplied by the reduction factor specified in
Equation 3.
w   Hs 
RF = 0.6  r   − 1.0  ≤ 1.0 Eqn. 3
 hr  h
 r 
where,
RF = Reduction factor for the allowable horizontal load for a

shear stud, unitless.
hr = Height of metal deck rib, in.
Shear Stud Connectors Technical Note 25 - 3

Hs = Length of shear stud after welding, in.
Horizontal Shear for Full Composite Connection

The total horizontal shear to be resisted between the point of maximum posi-
tive moment (where the concrete is in compression) and the points of zero
moment for full composite connection, Vh, is given by the smaller of Equations
4, 5a or 5b as applicable. Note that Equation 4 applies to both rolled beams
and user-defined (welded) beams. Equation 5a only applies to rolled beams
and Equation 5b only applies user-defined (welded) beams.
0.85fc' left A c left + 0.85fc' right A c right

Vh = Eqn. 4
2
where,
f’c = Compressive strength of the concrete slab, ksi. This item

Ac = Area of the concrete slab, in2. When the deck span is per-
pendicular to the beam span, this is the area of concrete in
the slab above the metal deck that is above the elastic
neutral axis (ENA) of the fully composite beam. When the
deck span is parallel to the beam span, this is the area of
concrete in the slab, including the concrete in the metal
deck ribs, that is above the ENA of the fully composite
beam. This item may be different on the left and right
sides of the beam.
For rolled beams only:
A sFy + bcptcpFycp
Vh = Eqn. 5a
2
For user-defined (welded) beams only:
Technical Note 25 - 4 Horizontal Shear for Full Composite Connection

bf -topt f -topFy ht wFy

Vh = + +
2 2 Eqn. 5b
bf -bot t f -botFy bcp t cpFycp
+
2 2
The following notation is used in Equations 5a and 5b:
As = Area of a rolled steel section (not including the cover

plate, if it exists), in2.
Fy = Minimum specified yield stress of steel beam, ksi.
Fycp = Minimum specified yield stress of cover plate, ksi.
bf-bot = Width of bottom flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
bf-top = Width of top flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
h = Clear distance between flanges for a user-defined

(welded) steel beam, in.
tf-bot = Thickness of bottom flange of a user-defined (welded)

steel beam, in.
tf-top = Thickness of top flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
Number of Shear Studs

The program determines the required number of shear studs on the compos-
ite beam based on the moment at each output station. The calculation is
completed separately at each output station. The program uses (reports) the
maximum number of shear studs required on the beam based on the calcula-
tion at any output station. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13
Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam for more details.
Number of Shear Studs Technical Note 25 - 5

Between the Output Station with Maximum Moment and the Point of Zero Moment
For full (100%) composite action, the number of shear studs required be-
tween the output station with the maximum positive moment and adjacent
points of zero moment, N1, for a given design load combination is given by
Equation 6.
Vh
N1 = Eqn. 6
q
In Equation 6, Vh is determined as described in the previous section entitled

"Horizontal Shear for Full Composite Connection" and q is determined as de-
scribed in the previous section entitled "Shear Stud Connectors."
For partial composite connection, the number of shear studs required be-
tween the output station with the maximum positive moment and adjacent
points of zero moment, N1, is given by Equation 7.
Vh'
N1 = Eqn. 7
q
In Equation 7, V'h is equal to the percent composite connection times Vh. For
example, if there is 70% composite connection, V'h = 0.7 Vh. Thus, the per-
cent composite connection, PCC, for AISC-ASD89 design is given by Equation
8.
Vh'
PCC = Eqn. 8
Vh
Between Other Output Stations and Points of Zero Moment

The program uses Equation 9 to determine the number of shear studs, N2,
required in a positive bending region between other output stations and adja-
cent points of zero moment for a given design load combination using AISC-
ASD89 design. Note that the program checks Equation 9 at each output sta-
tion.
 M β 
N1  station − 1
N2 =  Mstation max  ≥0 Eqn. 9
β −1
where,
Technical Note 25 - 6 Number of Shear Studs

Mstationmax = Maximum moment at any output station for a given

design load combination, k-in.
Mstation = Moment at the output station considered for the de-

sign load combination, k-in.
N1 = Number of shear studs required between the output

station with the maximum positive moment and ad-
jacent points of zero moment for the design load
combination, unitless.
N2 = Number of shear studs required between the output

station considered and adjacent points of zero mo-
ment for the design load combination, unitless.
β = A term equal to Str/Sbare for full (100%) composite

connection and Seff/Sbare for partial composite con-
nection, unitless.
The Str term is the section modulus for the fully (100%) composite trans-
formed section referred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel section
(including cover plate, if it exists), in3. This section modulus can be calcu-
lated using Equation 3 of Composite Bean Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
The Sbare term is the section modulus for the steel section alone (plus
cover plate, if it exists) referred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel
section, in3. This section modulus can be calculated as Ibare/ybare where Ibare
is calculated using Equation 3 of Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia and ybare is cal-
culated using Equation 2 of Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Techni-
cal Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia.
The Seff term is the effective section modulus of the partially composite
beam referred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel beam section (in-
cluding cover plate, if it exists), in3. This section modulus can be calcu-
lated using Equation 2 of Composite Bean Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Number of Shear Studs Technical Note 25 - 7

Technical Note 26
Calculation of the Number of Shear Studs
This Technical Note describes algorithms for determining the placement of

shear studs on a composite beam, including providing three example prob-
lems. Also see Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of
Shear Studs on a Composite Beam, Technical Note 14 The Number of Shear
Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment, and Technical Note 15 User-
Defined Shear Stud Patterns for more information.
Basic Equations
Equation 1 applies at the output station with the maximum positive moment
when there is full (100%) composite connection.
Vh
N1 = Eqn. 1
q
where,
Vh is the total horizontal shear to be resisted between the point of maximum

positive moment (where the concrete is in compression) and the points of
zero moment for full composite connection. Vh is derived by the smaller of
Equations 1a, 1b or 1c as applicable. Note that Equation 1a applies to both
rolled beams and user-defined (welded) beams. Equation 1b only applies to
rolled beams and Equation 1c only applies to user-defined (welded) beams.
0.85f c' left A c left + 0.85f c' right A c right

Vh = Eqn. 1a
2
where,
f’c = Compressive strength of the concrete slab, ksi. This item may
Ac = Area of the concrete slab, in2.
Basic Equations Technical Note 26 - 1

Calculation of the Number of Shear Studs Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
When the deck span is perpendicular to the beam span, Ac is the area of con-
crete in the slab above the metal deck that is above the elastic neutral axis
(ENA) of the fully composite beam. When the deck span is parallel to the
beam span, Ac is the area of concrete in the slab, including the concrete in the
metal deck ribs, that is above the ENA of the fully composite beam. This item
For rolled beams only:
A s Fy + b cp t cp Fycp
Vh = Eqn. 1b
2
For user-defined (welded) beams only:
b f - top t f - top Fy ht wFy

Vh = + +
2 2
Eqn. 1c
b f - bot t f - bot Fy b cp t cpFycp
+
2 2
The following notation is used in Equations 1b and 1c:
As = Area of a rolled steel section (not including the cover plate, if

it exists), in2.
Fy = Minimum specified yield stress of steel beam, ksi.
bf-bot = Width of bottom flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
bf-top = Width of top flange of a user-defined (welded) steel beam, in.
h = Clear distance between flanges for a user-defined (welded)

steel beam, in.
Fycp = Minimum specified yield stress of cover plate, ksi.
tf-bot = Thickness of bottom flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
Technical Note 26 - 2 Basic Equations

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Calculation of the Number of Shear Studs
tf-top = Thickness of top flange of a user-defined (welded) steel

beam, in.
Equation 2 applies at the output station with the maximum positive moment
when there is partial composite connection.
Vh'
N1 = Eqn. 2
q
In Equation 2, V'h is equal to the percent composite connection times Vh. For
example, if there is 70% composite connection, V'h = 0.7 Vh.
Equation 3 applies at any other output station regardless of the percent com-
posite connection.
 M β 
N1  station − 1
 Mstation max 
N2 = ≥0 Eqn. 3
β −1
where,
N2 = Number of shear studs required between the output sta-

tion considered and adjacent points of zero moment for
the design load combination, unitless.
N1 = Number of shear studs required between the output sta-

tion with the maximum positive moment and adjacent
points of zero moment for the design load combination,
unitless.
Mstation = Moment at the output station considered for the design

load combination, k-in.
β = A term equal to Str/Sbare for full (100%) composite con-

nection and Seff/Sbare for partial composite connection,
unitless. Str is the section modulus for fully (100%) com-
posite transformed section referred to the extreme tension
fiber of the steel section (including cover plate, if it ex-
ists), in3. Sbare is the section modulus of the steel beam
alone (plus cover plate, if it exists) referred to the ex-
Basic Equations Technical Note 26 - 3

treme tension fiber, in3. Seff is the effective section

modulus of a partially composite beam referred to the ex-
treme tension fiber of the steel beam section (including
cover plate, it if exists), in3.
Mstationmax = Maximum moment at any output station for a given de-

sign load combination, k-in.
Shear Stud Distribution Example 1

Shear stud distribution example 1 is shown in Figure 1. It is a 30-foot-long
simply supported beam. It has 1 klf uniform loading and a 50 k-ft moment at
the right end. For this example, assume the following:
Output stations occur at every 2 feet along the beam.
The allowable horizontal load for a single shear stud, q, is 12.4 kips.
The horizontal shear to be resisted between the point of maximum mo-

ment and adjacent points of zero moment, Vh', is 245 kips.
The support distance, S, plus the gap distance, G, is equal to 0.50 foot (6
inches) at each end of the beam.
The maximum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the length of the
beam is 36 inches.
As shown in Figure 1, this beam has one composite beam segment that has a
length, LCBS, of 29 feet.
Note:
Use the Assign menu > Frame/ Line >Frame Output Stations command to modify the
number of output stations for a beam.
Technical Note 26 - 4 Shear Stud Distribution Example 1

1 klf
50 k-ft
30'
13.33 k 16.67 k
13.33 k
Shear
13.33'
16.67 k
50 k-ft
Moment
3.33'
88.89 k-ft (actual Mmax) Actual point of

zero moment
from left end of beam
point of zero moment

Output station 14 ft
End of beam flange
End of beam flange

ETABS calculated
Center of support
Center of support
L1 and
LCBS
0.5' L1 left = 13.50' L1 right = 12.63' 2.87' 0.5'
LCBS = 29'
L = 30'
Figure 1 Example 1, Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam
Shear Stud Distribution Example 1 Technical Note 26 - 5

Table 1 illustrates how the bending moment is calculated by the program for
this beam at each output station. Note the following about Figure 1 and Table
1:
The actual maximum moment for this beam of 88.89 k-ft occurs at a dis-
tance of 13.33 feet from the left end of the beam, as shown in the mo-
ment diagram in Figure 1. As shown in Table 1, since the program only
calculates moment at the designated output stations, it picks up the
maximum moment as 88.67 k-ft at the station located 14 feet from the
(center of the support at the) left end of the beam. Increasing the number
of output stations will decrease the difference between the program-
calculated maximum moment and the actual maximum moment.
The actual point of zero moment near the right end of the beam occurs
26.67 feet from the left end of the beam (3.33 feet from the right end of
the beam), as shown in the moment diagram in Figure 1. Referring to Ta-
ble 1, the program calculates the point of zero moment by assuming a lin-
ear variation of moment between output stations located 26 and 28 feet
from the left end of the beam. This assumption yields a point of zero mo-
ment that is 26.63 feet from the left end of the beam (3.37 feet from the
right end of the beam). The dimensions shown in the bottom sketch of
Figure 1 reflect this program-calculated point of zero moment.
Table1 Example 1, Distribution of Shear Studs on a

Composite Beam
Station Moment
(ft) (k-ft)
0 0.00
2 24.67
4 45.33
6 62.00
8 74.67
10 83.33
12 88.00
14 88.67
16 85.33
18 78.00
20 66.67

Table1 Example 1, Distribution of Shear Studs on a

Composite Beam
Station Moment
(ft) (k-ft)
22 51.33
24 32.00
26 8.67
28 -18.67
30 -50.00
The program calculates the maximum moment as 88.67 k-ft at the output
station located 14 feet from the left end of the beam. Multiplying Mmax by
0.999 yields 0.999 *88.67 = 88.58 k-ft. Because no other output station has
a moment that exceeds 0.999Mmax (88.58 k-ft) and no point loads are on this
beam (for any load case), the only output station that is considered when
determining the shear stud distribution is the station 14 feet from the left end
of the beam (the maximum moment location).
The required number of shear studs between the maximum moment and ad-
jacent points of zero moment, N1, is calculated using Equation 2 as:
Vh' 245 kips

N1 = = = 19.76 studs
q 12.4 kips per stud
The distances L1 left and L1 right for the output station located 14 feet from the
left end of the beam are shown in Figure 1.
  N N  
NCBS1 = Roundup Max  ,  * L CBS1 
  L 1 left L 1 right  
 
  19.76 studs 19.76 studs  

NCBS1 = Roundup Max  ,  * 29 ft 
  13.50 ft 12.63 ft  
19.76 studs 
NCBS1 = Roundup  * 29 ft 
 12.63 ft 
NCBS1 = Roundup (45.37 studs)

NCBS1 = 46 studs
The minimum number of studs required in the composite beam segment for
this beam is calculated using Equation 5 of Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam as:
 L 
MS CBS = Roundup  CBS 
 MaxLS 
 29 ft   12 in 
MS CBS = Roundup     = 10 studs
 36 in   1 ft 
Thus, the number of shear studs does not need to be increased to meet the
minimum requirements. Assuming that the shear studs are found to fit on the
beam, the final number of uniformly spaced shear studs specified for the
beam is 46.

Shear stud distribution example 2 is shown in Figure 2. It is a 30-foot-long
simply supported beam. It has point loads at the beam one-third points. For
this example, assume the following:
The point loads do not come from other beams in the program model.
Thus, this beam has one composite beam segment instead of three com-
posite beam segments.

The ratio β = Seff/Sbare is equal to 1.40.

5k 20 k
10' 10' 10'

10 k 15 k
30'
10 k
5k
Shear
15 k
Moment
100 k-ft
150 k-ft (Mmax)
End of beam flange
End of beam flange

Center of support
Center of support
0.5' L1 left = 9.5' L1 right = 19.5' 0.5'
L1 left = 19.5' L1 right = 9.5'
LCBS = 29'
L = 30'
Figure 2: Example 2, Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam

beam is 36 inches.
As shown in Figure 2, this beam has one composite beam segment that has a
length, LCBS, of 29 feet.
Table 2 shows the bending moment calculated by the program for this beam
at each output station.
Table 2: Example 2, Distribution of Shear Studs on a

Composite Beam
Station Moment L1 left L1 right
(ft) (k-ft) (ft) (ft)
0 0.00 N.A. N.A.

2 20.00 N.A. N.A.
4 40.00 N.A. N.A.
6 60.00 N.A. N.A.
8 80.00 N.A. N.A.
10 100.00 9.5 19.5
12 110.00 N.A. N.A.
14 120.00 N.A. N.A.
16 130.00 N.A. N.A.
18 140.00 N.A. N.A.
20 150.00 19.5 9.5
22 120.00 N.A. N.A.
24 90.00 N.A. N.A.
26 60.00 N.A. N.A.
28 30.00 N.A. N.A.
30 0.00 N.A. N.A.

The required number of shear studs between the maximum moment (located
at the output station 20 feet from the left end of the beam) and adjacent
points of zero moment, N1, is calculated using Equation 2 as:
Vh' 124 kips

N1 = = = 10.00 studs
q 12.4 kips per stud
The required number of shear studs between the point load located at the
output station 10 feet from the left end of the beam and adjacent points of
zero moment, N2, is calculated using Equation 3 as:
 Mstationβ 
N1  − 1
N2 =  Mstation max  =≥0
β −1
100 k - ft * 1.40 
10.00 studs  − 1
 150 k - ft 
N2 = = Negative
1.40 − 1
N2 = 0 studs
The distances L1 left and L1 right for the output stations located 10 feet and 20
feet from the left end of the beam are shown in Figure 2.
For the output station located 10 feet from the left end of the beam:
  N N  
  L 1 left L 1 right  
 
  0 studs 0 studs  
  9.50 ft 19.50 ft  
NCBS1 = 0 studs
For the output station located 20 feet from the left end of the beam:
  N N  
  L 1 left L 1 right  
 

  10.00 studs 10.00 studs  

  19.50 ft 9.50 ft  
10.00 studs 
NCBS1 = Roundup  * 29 ft 
 9.50 ft 
NCBS1 = Roundup (30.53 studs)
NCBS1 = 31 studs
The minimum number of studs required in the composite beam segment for
this beam is calculated using Equation 5 of Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam as:
 L 
MS CBS = Roundup  CBS 
 MaxLS 
 29 ft   12 in 
MS CBS = Roundup     = 10 studs
 36 in   1 ft 
beam is 31.


Shear stud distribution example 3 is shown in Figure 3. It is identical to Ex-
ample 2, except that the point loads are assumed to come from end reactions
of other beams that are included in the program model. Thus, three compos-
ite beam segments are in this example instead of the one composite beam
segment that was in Example 2. For this example, assume the following:

The ratio β = Seff/Sbare is equal to 1.40.
beam is 36 inches.
As shown in Figure 3, this beam has three composite beam segments labeled
1, 2 and 3 from the left end of the beam to the right end of the beam. The
lengths of these composite beam segments are LCBS1 = 9.5 feet, LCBS2 = 10
feet and LCBS3 = 9.5 feet.
Table 2 shows the bending moment calculated by the program for this beam
at each output station. Table 3 summarizes how the shear stud distribution is
determined for this beam.

5k 20 k
10' 10' 10'

10 k 15 k
30'
10 k
5k
Shear
15 k
Moment
100 k-ft
150 k-ft (Mmax)
End of beam flange
End of beam flange

Center of support
Center of support
0.5' L1 left = 9.5' L1 right = 19.5' 0.5'
L1 left = 19.5' L1 right = 9.5'
LCBS1 = 9.5' LCBS2 = 10' LCBS3 = 9.5'
L = 30'
Figure 3 Example 3, Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam

Table 3: Example 3, Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam

Left to Right Along the Beam
Station Moment L1 left L1 right Studs NCBS1 NCBS2 NCBS3
10 ft 100 k-ft 9.5 ft 19.5 ft 0.00 0 (1) N.A. N.A.
20 ft 150 k-ft 19.5 ft 9.5 ft 10.00 5 (2a) 5 (2b) N.A.
Right to Left Along the Beam

Station Moment L1 left L1 right Studs NCBS1 NCBS2 NCBS3
20 ft 150 k-ft 19.5 ft 9.5 ft 10.00 5 (3b) 5 (3b) 10 (3a)
10 ft 100 k-ft 9.5 ft 19.5 ft 0.00 5 (4d) 5 (4b) 10 (4a)
The numbers in parenthesis identify equations from Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam.
The number of shear studs listed in the Studs column of Table 3 is calculated
exactly as described for Example 2. Equation 3 is used at the station 10 feet
from the left end of the beam, and Equation 2 is used at the station 20 feet
from the left end of the beam.
The columns labeled NCBS1, NCBS2 and NCBS3 show the number of studs required
in composite beam segments 1, 2 and 3, respectively, along with the equation
used to calculate that number of studs. The equation number is shown in pa-
renthesis.
The calculation proceeds from left to right along the beam and then back
along the beam from right to left. The detailed calculations associated with
Table 3 are shown in the next subsection entitled "Detailed Calculations."
The final required number of shear studs for each of the composite beam
segments is shown in the last row of Table 3. Composite beam segments 1, 2
and 3 require 5, 5 and 10 shear studs, respectively. This is a total of 20 shear
studs. This compares with 31 studs required in Example 2, where a uniform
intensity of shear studs is assumed over the entire beam rather than over
each of the three composite beam segments.
Detailed Calculations
This subsection shows the calculations required to obtain the values in the
columns labeled NCBS1, NCBS2 and NCBS3 in Table 3.

Left to Right at 10 Feet from Left End

We begin by working from left to right along the beam. The first output sta-
tion considered is 10 feet from the left end of the beam. This output station is
considered to be in composite beam segment 1. Equation 1 of Composite
Beam is used to calculate the studs required in composite beam segment 1.
  N N  
  L 1 left L 1 right  
 
NCBS1 = Roundup Max  ,  * 9.5 ft 
  9.5 ft 19.5 ft  
NCBS1 = 0 studs
Thus, NCBS1 is calculated as zero studs. Because the output station considered
is in composite beam segment 1 and we are working from left to right along
the beam, NCBS2 and NCBS3 are not yet applicable.
Left to Right at 20 Feet from Left End

The next output station considered is 20 feet from the left end of the beam.
This output station is considered to be in composite beam segment 2. Equa-
tion 2a of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear
Studs on a Composite Beam is used to calculate the studs required in com-
posite beam segment 1.
 N 
NCBS1 = Roundup  * L CBS1  ≥ NCBS1 Prev
 L 1 left 
 
 10.00 studs 
NCBS1 = Roundup  * 9.5 ft  ≥ 0 studs
 19.5 ft 
NCBS1 = 5 studs
Next, we need to determine whether to use Equation 2b or Equation 2c of

Composite Beam for composite beam segment 2.

n −1 ? n −1
N
L 1 left
* ∑
i =1
L CBSi < ∑N
i =1
CBSi
1 ? 1
10.00 studs
19.5 ft
* ∑i =1
L CBSi < ∑N
i =1
CBSi
?
10.00 studs
* L CBS1 < NCBS1
19.5 ft
?
10.00 studs
* 9.5 ft < 5 studs
19.5 ft
4.87 studs < 5 studs → Use Equation 2b of Composite Beam De-

sign Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite
Beam.
Thus, Equation 2b of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution

of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam is used to calculate the studs required
in composite beam segment 2.
 1 
 N-

i =1
NCBSi ∑ 

NCBS2 = Roundup  1
* L CBS2  ≥ NCBS2 Prev
 
 L 1 left − L CBSi∑ 
 i =1 
 10.00 studs - 5 studs 

NCBS2 = Roundup  * 10 ft  ≥ 0 studs
 19.5 ft − 9.5 ft 
NCBS2 = 5 studs
Because the output station considered is in composite beam segment 2 and

we are working from left to right along the beam, NCBS3 is not yet applicable.
Right to Left at 20 Feet from Left End

Now we work back along the beam from right to left. Thus, the next output
station considered is the one 20 feet from the left end of the beam. This out-
put station is now considered to be in composite beam segment 3.

Equation 3a of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of

Shear Studs on a Composite Beam is used to calculate the shear studs re-
quired in composite beam segment 3.
  N N  
N CBS3 = Roundup Max  ,  * L CBS3  ≥ N CBS3 Prev
   
 L1 left L1 right 
N CBS 3 = Roundup Max  ,  * 9.5 ft  ≥ 0 studs
  19.5 ft 9.5 ft  
 10 studs 
N CBS 3 = Roundup  * 9.5 ft  ≥ 0 studs
 9.5 ft 
NCBS3 = 10 studs
Equation 3b of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of

quired in composite beam segments 1 and 2.
NCBS1 = NCBS1 Prev = 5 studs
Right to Left at 10 Feet from Left End

The final output station considered is 10 feet from the left end of the beam.
This output station is now considered to be in composite beam segment 2.
Equation 4a of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of

 N 
 L 1 right 
 
 0 studs 
NCBS3 = Roundup  * 9.5 ft  ≥ 10 studs
 19.5 ft 
NCBS3 = 0 studs but must be at least 10 studs.

Therefore, use 10 studs.
Next we determine whether to use Equation 4b or Equation 4c of Composite

Beam for composite beam segment 2.
rightmost ? rightmost
N
L 1 right
* ∑ L CBSi <
i =n +1
∑N
i =n +1
CBSi
?
0 studs
* L CBS3 < NCBS3
19.5 ft
?
0 studs
* 9.5 ft < 10 studs
19.5 ft
0 studs < 10 studs → Use Equation 7b.
Thus, Equation 4b of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution

of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam is used to calculate the studs required
in composite beam segment 2.
 rightmost 
 N-

i=3
∑
NCBSi 

NCBS2 = Roundup  rightmost
* L CBS2  ≥ NCBS2 Prev
 
 L 1 right − ∑
L CBSi 
 i=3 
 N - NCBS3 
 L 1 right − L CBS3 
 
 0 - 10 
NCBS2 = Roundup  * 10 ft  ≥ 5 studs
 19.5 ft − 9.5 ft 
NCBS2 = Negative ≥ 5 studs, use 5 studs
Equation 4d of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of


Minimum Studs Required

The minimum number of studs required in the three composite beam seg-
ments for this beam is calculated using Equation 5 of Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam.
 L   9.5 ft   12 in 
MS CBS1 = Roundup  CBS1  =     = 4 studs
 MaxLS   36 in   1 ft 
 L   10 ft   12 in 
 MaxLS   36 in   1 ft 
 L   9.5 ft   12 in 
 MaxLS   36 in   1 ft 
beam is 5 in composite beam segment 1, 5 in composite beam segment 2 and
10 in composite beam segment 3, for a total of 20 shear studs.

Technical Note 27
Input Data
This Technical Note describes the composite beam design input data for AISC-
ASD89. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you click
the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command. A
printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully
review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which
program design is based. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 5 Input
Data for further information about using the print Composite Beam Design
Tables Form, as well as other non-code-specific input data for composite
beam design.

The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. The
tables typically correspond to the tabs used in the Composite Beam Over-
writes form. The column headings for input data and a description of what is
included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical
Note.
Recall that the composite beam overwrites apply to all beams to which they
have been specifically assigned. To access the composite beam overwrites,
select one or more beams and then click the Design menu > Composite
Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Information about
composite beam overwrites is available in Composite Beam Design AISC-
ASD89 Technical Note 18 Overwrites.
Beam Overwrites Input Data Technical Note 27 - 1

Input Data Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89
Table 1 Beam Overwrites Input Data

Beam Location Information
This information does not correspond to one of the tabs in the composite beam over-
writes. This data is provided to help identify the beam to which printed overwrites apply.
Global X coordinate of the center of the beam to which the
X
overwrites apply.
Global Y coordinate of the center of the beam to which the
Y
overwrites apply.
Length Length of the beam to which the overwrites apply.
Beam Properties
Composite Type Type of beam design. The choices are Composite, NC w/ studs
and NC w/o studs. NC w/ studs is short for noncomposite with
minimum shear studs. NC w/o studs is short for noncomposite
without shear studs. Note that this option allows you to design a
noncomposite floor beam in the Composite Beam Design post-
processor.
Shoring Provided This item is Yes if the composite beam is shored. Otherwise, it
is No. Note that this item supersedes the Shored Floor item in
b-eff Left If the beff left width is program calculated, this item reads "Prog
Calc." Otherwise, this item is the user-defined width for beff left.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width
of the Concrete Slab for description of the effective width of the
slab.
b-eff Right If the beff right width is program calculated, this item reads "Prog
Calc." Otherwise, this item is the user-defined width for beff right.
slab.
Beam Fy If the beam yield stress is based on the material property speci-
fied for the beam, this item reads "Prog Calc." Otherwise, this
item is the user-defined yield stress of the beam.
Beam Fu If the beam minimum tensile strength is based on the material
property specified for the beam, this item reads "Prog Calc."
Otherwise, this item is the user-defined minimum tensile
strength of the beam.
Technical Note 27 - 2 Table 1 Beam Overwrites Input Data

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Input Data

Cover Plate
This information is included on the Beam tab of the overwrites.
Plate Width Width of the cover plate.
Plate Thick Thickness of the cover plate.
Plate Fy Yield stress of the cover plate.
Consider Cover Plate If this item is "Yes," the specified cover plate is considered in
the design of the beam. Otherwise, the cover plate is not con-
sidered in the beam design.
Beam Unbraced Length
Beam unbraced length data is provided for both the construction condition and the final
condition. The headings for these two types of beam unbraced lengths are “Beam Un-
braced Length (Construction Loading)” and “Beam Unbraced Length (Final Loading).”
The types of data provided in each of these tables is identical and is documented once
here.
Bracing State This item can be "Prog Calc," "User Bracing," or "Length
Given." Prog Calc means that the program determines the
braced points of the beam. User Bracing means that you have
specified the actual bracing for the beam. The user-defined
bracing may be point or uniform bracing along the top and bot-
tom flange of the beam. Length Given means that you have
specified a single maximum unbraced length for the beam.
Unbraced L22 If the Bracing State item is "Length Given," this item is the user-
specified maximum unbraced length of the beam. Otherwise,
this item is specified as N/A.
L22 Absolute If the Bracing State item is "Length Given," this item indicates
whether the user-specified maximum unbraced length of the
beam (the Unbraced L22 item) is an absolute (actual) length or
a relative length. A relative length is the maximum unbraced
length divided by the length of the beam. If the Bracing State
item is not Length Given, this item is specified as N/A.
Cb Factor If the Cb factor is calculated by the program, this item reads
"Prog Calc." Otherwise, the user-defined Cb factor that is used
in determining the allowable bending stress is displayed. (Note
that when the Cb factor is program calculated, it may be differ-
ent for each design load combination, and, for a given design
load combination, it may be different for each station consid-
ered along the length of the beam.)
Table 1 Beam Overwrites Input Data Technical Note 27 - 3


Point Braces
The heading of the point braces data table specifies whether the point braces are pro-
gram calculated or user-defined, and whether the distances used to locate the point
braces (Location item) are absolute (actual) distances or relative distances. A relative
distance is the distance divided by the length of the beam.
Location This is the distance from the I-end of the beam to the point
brace. As described in the preceding paragraph, it may be an
absolute or a relative distance.
Type The choices for this item are TopFlange, BotFlange or
BothFlngs. TopFlange means only the top flange is braced at
this point. BotFlange means only the bottom flange is braced at
this point. BothFlngs means both the top and bottom flanges
are braced at this point.
Uniform Braces
The heading of the uniform braces data table specifies whether the point braces are pro-
gram calculated or user-defined, and whether the distances used to define the extent of
the uniform braces (Start and End items) are absolute (actual) distances or relative dis-
tances. A relative distance is the distance divided by the length of the beam.
Note:
Details about the location and type of program calculated point and uniform
braces is only reported after you have run the design. Before you run the de-
sign, this information is not available.
Start This is the distance from the I-end of the beam to the starting
point of the uniform brace. As described in the preceding para-
graph, it may be an absolute or a relative distance.
End This is the distance from the I-end of the beam to the ending
point of the uniform brace. This distance is always larger than
the Start item. As described previously, it may be an absolute
or a relative distance.
BothFlngs. TopFlange means only the top flange is uniformly
braced along the specified length. BotFlange means only the
bottom flange is uniformly braced along the specified length.
BothFlngs means both the top and bottom flanges are uniformly
braced along the specified length.


Deck Properties
Beam Side This item is either Left or Right. It indicates to which side of the
beam the deck label and deck direction specified in the same
row apply.
Deck Label This item is either “Prog Calc,” if the deck label is determined
by the program, or it is the label (name) of a defined deck sec-
tion, if this is a user-specified overwrite, or it is "None" if no
composite deck has been specified on the side of the beam.
Deck Direction This item is “Prog Calc,” “Parallel,” or “Perpendclr.” Prog Calc
means that the direction of the deck span (parallel or perpen-
dicular to the beam span) is program determined. Parallel
means that the span of the metal deck is parallel to the beam
span. Perpendclr means that the span of the metal deck is per-
pendicular to the beam span.
Min Long Spacing Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the beam.
Max Long Spacing Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the beam.
Min Tran Spacing Minimum transverse spacing of shear studs across the beam
flange.
Max Conn in a Row Maximum number of shear studs in a single row across the
beam flange.
Stud q This item is “Prog Calc” if the allowable horizontal load for a
single shear stud is determined by the program, or it is a user-
defined allowable horizontal load for a single shear stud.
User-Defined Shear Stud Pattern
Uniform Spacing The uniform spacing of single shear studs along the length of
the beam.
User-Defined Uniform Stud Sections
The heading of the uniform stud sections data table specifies whether the distances used
to define the extent of the stud sections (Start, End and Length items) are absolute (ac-
tual) distances or relative distances. A relative distance is the distance divided by the
length of the beam.
Note:
User-defined shear stud patterns are described in Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 15 User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns.


point of the uniform stud section. As described previously, it
may be an absolute or a relative distance.
Length This is the length of the uniform stud section. As described pre-
viously, it may be an absolute or a relative distance.
Number The number of uniformly spaced shear studs in the uniform
stud section.
Deflection, Camber and Vibration
Deflection Absolute If the live load and total load deflection limits are specified as
absolute (actual) distances, this item is Yes. If they are speci-
fied as a divisor of beam length (relative), this item is No.
Live Load Limit The live load deflection limit for the beam.
Total Load Limit The total load deflection limit for the beam.
Calculate Camber If this item is Yes, the program calculates the camber for the
beam. If it is No, the program does not calculate a camber, but
if desired, the user can specify the camber.
Specified Camber User-specified camber when the program does not calculate
the beam camber.
Neff Beams This item is “Prog Calc” if the number of effective beams for
vibration calculations is determined by the program, or it is a
user-defined number of effective beams.
Other Restrictions
Limit Beam Depth This item is Yes if the beam depth limitations (Minimum Depth
and Maximum Depth items) are considered by the program for
beams with auto select section lists. This item is No if the beam
depth limitations are not considered.
Minimum Depth Minimum actual (not nominal) beam depth considered in the
auto select section list if the Limit Beam Depth item is Yes.
Maximum Depth Maximum actual (not nominal) beam depth considered in the


Minimum PCC Minimum percent composite connection considered by the pro-
gram for the beam.
Maximum PCC Maximum percent composite connection considered by the
program for the beam.
RLLF This represents the reducible live load factor. A reducible live
load is multiplied by this factor to obtain the reduced live load.
This item is “Prog Calc” if the reducible live load factor is de-
termined by the program, or it is a user-defined reducible live
load factor.
EQF The EQ Factor is a multiplier applied to earthquake loads. This
item corresponds to the EQ Factor item in the composite beam
design overwrites. More information about the EQ Factor is
available from Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Note 18 Overwrites.
1/3 Increase This item is “Active” if the one-third increase in allowable
stresses for design load combinations, including wind or seis-
mic loads, is considered for the beam. The item is “Inactive” if
the one-third increase is not considered.

Technical Note 28
Output Details
This Technical Note describes the composite beam output for AISC-ASD89
that can be printed to a printer or to a text file in either short form or long
form. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 6 Output Data for informa-
tion about using the Print Composite Beam Design Tables Form, as well as the
Summary of Composite Beam Output.
The program provides the output data in a series of tables. The column
headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns
of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note.
Short Form Output Details

This output is printed when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Com-
posite Beam Design command and select Short Form in the Output Details
area of the resulting form. Similar output also appears on screen if you click
the Details button in the Show Details area of the Interactive Composite
Beam Design and Review form. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 3
Interactive Composite Beam Design for more details on the interactive design.
Table 1 Output Details

Basic Beam Information
A typical label beam would appear as "B23." Do not confuse
this with the Section Label, which would be identified as
"W18X35."
Group Name of the design group (if any) to which the beam has been
assigned.
Beam Beam section label (name).
Short Form Output Details Technical Note 28 - 1

Output Details Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89

Fy Beam yield stress, Fy.
Fu Beam minimum tensile strength, Fu.

of the beam.
Seg. Length Length of each composite beam segment separated by com-

mas. The lengths are listed starting with the composite beam
of the beam.
Stud Ratio This item has a slightly different meaning, depending on

whether the shear studs are user-defined or calculated by the
program.
When the number of shear studs is calculated by the program,

a stud ratio is reported for each composite beam segment. It is
equal to the number of shear studs required in the segment
divided by the maximum number of studs that fit in the seg-
ment.
When the shear studs are user-defined, the total number of

studs is reported instead of the stud ratio
Story Story level associated with the beam.
Length Length of the beam.
Loc X Global X coordinate of the center of the beam.
Loc Y Global Y coordinate of the center of the beam.
RLLF A reducible live load is multiplied by this factor to obtain the re-
duced live load.
Shored This item is Yes if the beam is shored and No if it is unshored.
Technical Note 28 - 2 Table 1 Output Details

Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Output Details

Camber The camber for the beam. This item may be calculated by the
program or it may be user-specified.
Comparative Price of the beam using the input price parameters for steel,
shear studs and camber. This price is intended for comparison
of alternative designs only. It is not intended to be used for cost
estimating purposes.
Stud Diam Diameter of shear studs.
EQ Factor A multiplier applied to earthquake loads. This item corresponds

to the EQ Factor item in the composite beam design overwrites.
More information about the EQ Factor is available Composite
Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 18 Overwrites.
Overwrites If this item is Yes, one or more items have been overwritten for
this beam. If it is No, nothing has been overwritten. The values
for all overwrite items are included in the long form output.
Thus, if this item is "Yes," you may want to print the long form
output.
b-cp Width of the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by the

user, N/A is reported for this item.
t-cp Thickness of the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by

the user, N/A is reported for this item.
Fy-cp Yield stress for the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by
Consider-cp This item is Yes if the specified cover plate is considered in the
design. Otherwise, it is No.
Deck Left and Deck The deck section labels (names) on the left and right sides of
Right the beam.
Dir. Left and Dir. Right The deck directions on the left and right sides of the beam.
Perpendclr means that the deck span is perpendicular to the
beam span. Parallel means that the deck span is parallel to the
beam span.
Table 1 Output Details Technical Note 28 - 3


beff Left and beff Right The slab effective widths on the left and right sides of the beam.
Ctop Left and Ctop The program calculated cope of the beam top flange at the left
Right and right ends of the beam. Do not confuse the left and right
ends of the beam with the left and right sides of the beam. The
left end of the beam is the I-end and the right end of the beam
is the J-end.
Cbot Left and Cbot The program calculated cope of the beam bottom flange at the
Right left and right ends of the beam. Do not confuse the left and right
is the J-end.
Itrans Transformed section moment of inertia for full (100%) compos-

ite connection for positive bending, Itr.
Ibare Moment of inertia of the steel beam, including cover plate, if it

exists.
Is Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone, not including cover

plate, even if it exists.
Ieff Effective moment of inertia for partial composite connection.
PCC Percent composite connection.
ytrans Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
tom of cover plate, even if it exists) to the elastic neutral axis
(ENA) of the beam, with full (100%) composite connection, y .
ybare Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
tom of cover plate, even if it exists) to the ENA of the beam,
plus cover plate alone (if it exists).
yeff Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
with partial composite connection.
q Allowable horizontal shear load for a single shear stud.


Moment Design
This table of output data reports the controlling moments for both construction loads and
final loads.
Pmax The largest axial load in the beam for any design load combi-
nation.
Important note: This value is not used in the Composite Beam
Design postprocessor design. It is reported to give you a sense
of how much axial load, if any, is in the beam. If there is a sig-
nificant amount of axial load in the beam, you may want to de-
sign it noncompositely using the Steel Frame Design postpro-
cessor. The Steel Frame Design postprocessor does consider
axial load.
Pmax Combo The design load combination associated with Pmax.
Type This item is either Constr Pos, Constr Neg, Final Pos or Final
Neg. Const Pos means it is a positive moment for construction
loading. Const Neg means it is a negative moment for con-
struction loading. Final Pos means it is a positive moment for
final loading. Final Neg means it is a negative moment for final
loading.
Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling moment for
the moment type considered in the table row.
Location The critical location over the height of the beam section for
bending stress. Possible values for this are:
ConcLeft: The top of the concrete slab on the left side of the
beam.
ConcRight: The top of the concrete slab on the right side of

the beam.
TopFlange: The top of the beam top flange.
BotFlange: The bottom of the beam bottom flange.
CoverPlate: The bottom of the cover plate.


M The controlling moment for the moment type considered in the
table row.
fb The bending stress associated with the controlling moment.

The location over the height of the beam where this bending
stress occurs is given in the Location column.
Fb The allowable bending stress associated with the controlling

bending stress. The location where this allowable bending
stress applies is given in the Location column. This allowable
stress reported here never includes the 1/3 increase that may
apply.
1/3 Factor This item is either Yes or No. It indicates whether a 1/3 allow-
able stress increase was used for the ratio calculated in this
row in the table.
Ratio This is the bending stress, fb, divided by the allowable bending
stress, Fb. If the 1/3 allowable stress increase applies to the
design load combination, the result is further divided by 1.33.
Shear Design
This table of output data reports the controlling shears for both construction loads and
final loads.
Type This item is either Constr Left, Constr Right, Constr Worst, Final
Left or Final Right. Constr Left means it is a construction load-
ing shear at the left end of the beam. Constr Right means it is a
construction loading shear at the right end of the beam. Constr
Worst means it is a construction loading shear somewhere in
the middle of the beam and it is the worst-case shear.
Final Left means it is a final loading shear at the left end of the
beam. Final Rght means it is a final loading shear at the right
end of the beam. Final Worst means it is a construction loading
shear somewhere in the middle of the beam and it is the worst-
case shear.


The Constr Worst and Final Worst items only appear when they
control the design. The shear checks at the left and right ends
of the beam always appear.
Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling shear for
the shear type considered in the table row.
Block This item is either OK or NG. It indicates whether the program

check for block shear (shear rupture) passed or failed. OK
means that the beam passes the Check, and NG (no good)
means it did not. If the item indicates NG, you should check the
block shear by hand for the beam.
V The controlling shear for the shear type considered in the table
row.
fv The shear stress associated with the controlling shear.
Fv The allowable shear stress associated with the controlling

bending stress. This allowable stress never includes the 1/3
increase that may apply.
1/3 Factor This item is either Yes or No. It indicates whether a 1/3 allow-
able stress increase was used for the ratio calculated in this
row in the table.
Ratio This is the bending stress, fv, divided by the allowable bending
stress, Fv. If the 1/3 allowable stress increase applies to the
design load combination, the result is further divided by 1.33.
Deflection Design
This table of output data reports the controlling deflections for both live load and total
load.
Type This item is either Live Load or Total Load.
Consider This item is always Yes, indicating that deflection is one of the
criteria checked when determining if a beam section is consid-
ered acceptable.


Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling deflection
for the deflection type considered in the table row.
Deflection The controlling deflection for the deflection type considered in

the table row. The computed camber is subtracted from the to-
tal load deflection before the total load deflection is reported.
Note:
Deflection is described in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam De-
flection and Camber.
Limit The deflection limit for the deflection type considered in the ta-
ble row.
Ratio This is the controlling deflection divided by the deflection limit.

COMPOSITE BEAM DESIGN AISC-LRFD93
Technical Note 29
General and Notation
This Technical Note provides an overview of composite beam design using the
AISC-LRFD93 design specification.
AISC-LRFD93 Design Methodology

The flowchart in Figure 1 shows the general methodology for composite beam
design of a single beam element using the AISC-LRFD93 specification. The
numbered boxes in the flowchart correspond to the "Box" identifiers used in
the text of this Technical Note. The flowchart is intended to convey the im-
portant features of the AISC-LRFD93 design methodology. It should not be
literally construed as a flowchart for the actual computer code included in the
program.
Box 1 - Start Here

Before you begin, note that the flowchart is set up for a single beam. Thus
you must apply the flow process shown to each beam designed. Do not con-
fuse the beam that is being designed with a trial section for that beam. The
beam that is being designed is an actual element in the model. A trial section
is simply a beam section size that is checked for the beam that is being de-
signed.
Box 2 - Design Load Combinations

The program creates default design load combinations for composite beam
design using the AISC-LRFD93 specification. Also any user-specified design
load combinations can be interpreted and implemented. Refer to Composite
Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 32 Design Load Combinations for a
description of the AISC-LRFD93 default design load combinations.
Box 3 - Design Check Locations

The program determines all of the design check locations for a given beam.
Also refer Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Unbraced Length
and Design Check Locations.

General and Notation Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
Determine design Determine design Start here to design

check locations. load combinations. a beam element.
3 2 1
Determine checking
order for beams. Is there another trial
section available that The design for this
4 may qualify as the beam element is
optimum beam complete.
Select a trial beam Yes section? No
section.
5 19 20
Determine if trial
On the basis of Is the section section is the current
Yes No
compact section compact or optimum section.
requirements, noncompact? 18
determine whether 6
to use a plastic or Determine price of
an elastic stress section.
distribution to Determine
transformed section 17
calculate the
moment capacity, properties for full
Calculate required
Mn. composite action.
camber.
7 8
16
Yes
Considering full No Is beam shear
composite acceptable?
connection, are the No 15
maximum moment Yes
and deflection Do the required
No
acceptable? shear connectors fit
on the beam?
9
Yes 14
Determine the
Is the vibration No required number of
criteria satisfied? shear connectors.
10 13
Yes
Determine the
minimum acceptable
percent composite
Considering full No
connection
composite action, is considering
the interaction for the combined stresses
combined stresses Yes and deflection
acceptable? criteria.
11 12
Figure 1: Flowchart for AISC-LRFD93 Design of a Single Beam

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 General and Notation
Box 4 - Checking Order for Beams

You must determine the checking order for a beam if the beam is assigned an
auto selection property. The program considers the beams in the auto select
list in the order described in the section entitled “How ETABS Optimizes De-
sign Groups” in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 1 General Design In-
formation.
Box 5 - Trial Beam Section

The program allows you to select the next trial beam section to be checked
for conformance with the AISC-LRFD93 specification and any additional user-
defined criteria. Refer to the section entitled “How ETABS Optimizes Design
Groups” in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 1 General Design Infor-
mation for a description of this selection process.
Box 6 - Compact and Noncompact Requirements

For AISC-LRFD93 design of composite beams, the program requires that the
beam section be either compact or noncompact. Slender sections are not de-
signed. The program checks to make sure the beam is not slender. Refer to
Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 33 Compact and Non-
compact Requirements for a description of how the program checks compact
and noncompact requirements.
Box 7 - Stress Distribution Used to Calculate Moment Capacity

The program determines whether to use a plastic or an elastic stress distribu-
tion when calculating the moment capacity for AISC-LRFD93 design. See
Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 33 Compact and Non-
compact Requirements for more information.
Box 8 - Transformed Section Properties

The program computes the transformed section properties of the trial beam
section. If there is only positive bending in the beam, only the transformed
section properties for positive bending are calculated. Similarly, if there is
only negative bending in the beam, only the transformed section properties
for negative bending are calculated. If there is both positive and negative
bending in the beam, transformed section properties for both positive and
negative bending are calculated.
Refer to Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Con-
crete Slab for a description of how the program calculates the effective width
of the concrete slab for the composite beam. Refer to Composite Beam De-

sign AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia

for description of how the program calculates the transformed section proper-
ties.
In AISC-LRFD93 design, the transformed section properties are used for cal-
culating deflection, and they are used when the moment capacity is deter-
mined based on an elastic stress distribution; that is, when the web is non-
compact.
Box 9 - Initial Moment Capacity and Deflection Check

The program checks that the moment capacity of the beam using full com-
posite connection is greater than or equal to the applied factored moment. It
also checks if the deflection using full composite connection is acceptable. The
main purpose of this check is to quickly eliminate inadequate beam sections.
Refer to Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 38 Bending
and Deflection Checks for more information.
Box 10 - Vibration Criteria Check

The program calculates the vibration parameters. If vibration is specified to
be used as one of the tools for selecting the optimum beam size, the program
checks if the vibration parameters satisfy the specified limits. If the vibration
check is satisfied, the design using the current trial section continues; other-
wise, the design for this section is terminated. For more detailed information
on the vibration checks, refer to Composite Beam Design Technical Note 12
Beam Vibration.
Box 11 - P-M Interaction Check

If there is axial load on the beam, the program checks the P-M interaction
equations. If the interaction check is satisfied, the design using the current
trial section continues; otherwise, the design for this section is terminated.
Refer to Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 36 Moment
Capacity for Steel Section Alone for more information.
Box 12 - Partial Composite Action

A significant amount of design is performed at this point in the process. The
program determines the smallest amount of composite connection for which
the beam is adequate. Both flexural checks and deflection checks are made at
this point. Flexural checks are also made for the construction loads.

For more information refer to Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical

Note 37 Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution and
Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 38 Bending and Deflec-
tion Checks. Also refer to Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical
Box 13 - Required Number of Shear Connectors

The program calculates the required number of shear connectors on the beam
and the distribution of those shear connectors. For more information refer to
Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 39 Shear Connectors.
Also refer to Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear
Studs on a Composite Beam and Composite Beam Design Technical Note 14
The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment. Finally
refer to Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Con-
crete Slab for limitations associated with composite beams and formed metal
deck.
Box 14 - Checking if Shear Connectors Fit on the Beam

The program checks if the number of shear connectors calculated (box 14)
actually fit on the beam. For more information refer to Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 14 The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite
Beam Segment. If the connectors fit on the beam, the design using the cur-
rent trial section continues; otherwise, the design for this section is termi-
nated.
Box 15 - Beam Shear

The program checks the beam shear for the reactions at each end of the
beam. See Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 40 Beam
Shear Capacity for more information. If the beam shear check is satisfied, the
design using the current trial section continues; otherwise, the design for this
section is terminated.
Box 16 - Camber
The program determines the camber for the beam, if it is specified to have
camber. Refer to Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam Deflection
and Camber for more information.
Box 17 - Section Price

Determination of price of section applies only when price has been specified
by the user as the method of selecting the optimum section. In such cases,

the program determines the price of the current beam. Refer to “Using Price
to Select Optimum Beam Sections” in Composite Beam Design Technical Note
1 General Design Information for more information.
Box 18 - Check if a Section is the Current Optimum Section

This check applies only if price has been specified as the method of selecting
the optimum section. The program checks if the price of the current trial
beam is less than that of any other beam that satisfied the design criteria. If
so, the current beam section becomes the current optimum beam section.
Refer to “Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections” in Composite Beam
Design Technical Note 1 General Design Information for more information
If the optimum beam size is to be selected by weight, this check becomes ir-
relevant because the beams are checked in order from the lightest to the
heaviest beams and thus the first beam found to work is the optimum beam.
Box 19 - Checking for Possible Additional Optimum Sections

This check applies only if the beam has been assigned an auto selection prop-
erty. The program checks if another section in the auto selection list might
qualify as the optimum beam section. Refer to the section titled “How ETABS
Optimizes Design Groups” in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 1 Gen-
eral Design Information for more information.
Box 20 - Design Complete

At this point, the design for this particular beam element is complete. If the
beam has been assigned an auto selection property, the current optimum
section, assuming one has been found, is the optimum section for the beam.
The program will indicate if no beam with an optimum section is included in
the auto selection list.
If the beam is assigned a regular, non-auto selection property, the design for
that beam property will be provided or the beam will be indicated to be in-
adequate.
There are some additional aspects included in the composite beam design
module that are not directly addressed in the flowchart shown in Figure 1.
Those include designing beams in groups and designing beams with partial
length cover plates.

For more information on the design by group feature, refer to the section
"How the Program Optimizes Design Groups" in Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 1 General Design Informaiton. The extension of the methodol-
ogy described in Part 3 to designing by groups is relatively simple and is as-
sumed to be apparent to the reader.
Notation
Abare Area of the steel beam (plus coverplate) alone, in2.
Ac Area of concrete within slab effective width that is above the

elastic neutral axis (ENA) for full composite action, in2. For
beams with metal deck ribs running perpendicular to the beam
span, only the concrete above the metal deck and above the
ENA is included. For beams with metal deck ribs running par-
allel to the beam span, the concrete above the metal deck and
the concrete in the deck ribs are included if it is above the
ENA. This value may be different on the left and right sides of
the beam.
Af Area of compression flange, in2.
Ag Gross area of steel member, in2.
As Area of rolled steel section, or the total area (excluding cover

plate) of a user-defined steel section, in2. Note that the total
area of a user-defined steel section is found by summing the
area of the top flange, web and bottom flange.
ASb Initial displacement amplitude of a single beam resulting from

a heel drop impact, in.
Asc Cross-sectional area of a shear stud connector, in2.
Atr Area of an element of the composite steel beam section, in2.
Aw Area of the web equal to the overall depth d times the web
thickness tw, in2.
B1 Moment magnifier, unitless.

Cb Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient, unitless.
Cbot Cope depth at bottom of beam, in.
CC1 Compressive force in concrete slab above metal deck, kips. If

no metal deck exists, this is the compressive force in the slab.
CC2 Compressive force in concrete that is in the metal deck ribs,

kips. This force only occurs when the metal deck ribs are ori-
ented parallel to the steel beam, and the plastic neutral axis is
below the top of the metal deck.
CFT Compressive force in the top flange of the steel beam, kips.
This force only occurs when the plastic neutral axis is below
the top of the beam.
CKT Compressive force in the top fillets of a rolled steel beam,

kips. This force only occurs when the plastic neutral axis is
below the bottom of the top flange of the beam.
CR Compressive force in the slab rebar, kips. This force only oc-
curs when the plastic neutral axis is below the rebar, and you
have specified the rebar to be considered.
Ctop Cope depth at top of beam, in.
Cw Warping constant for a section, in6.
CWeb Compressive force in the steel beam web, kips. This force only
occurs when the plastic neutral axis is within the beam web.
D Damping ratio, percent critical damping inherent in the floor

system, unitless.
Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete slab, ksi. Note that this could

be different on the left and right sides of the beam. Also note
that this is different for stress calculations and deflection cal-
culations.
Es Modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi.

Fcr Critical stress for columns in compression, ksi.
FL Smaller of (Fyf - Fr) or Fyw, ksi.
Fr Compressive residual stress in flange, ksi. Taken as 10 kips

per square inch for rolled shapes and 16.5 kips per square
inch for welded shapes converted to the appropriate.
Fu Minimum specified tensile strength of structural steel or shear

stud, ksi.
Fy Minimum specified yield stress of structural steel, ksi.
Fycp Minimum specified yield stress of cover plate, ksi.
Fyf-bot Minimum specified yield stress of steel in beam bottom flange,

ksi.
Fyf-top Minimum specified yield stress of steel in beam top flange, ksi.
Fyw Minimum specified yield stress of steel in beam web, ksi.
G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi.
Hs Length of shear stud connector after welding, in.
Ieff Effective moment of inertia of a partially composite beam, in4.
IO Moment of inertia of an element of the composite steel beam

section taken about its own center of gravity, in4.
Is Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone plus cover plate if

applicable, in4.
Itr Transformed section moment of inertia about elastic neutral

axis of the composite beam, in4.
Ix, Iy Moment of inertia about the x and y axes of the beam respec-
tively, in4.
Iyc Moment of inertia of compression flange about the y-axis, or if

there is both positive and negative bending in the beam, the

smaller moment of the two flanges, in4.
J Torsional constant for a section, in4.
K Effective length factor for prismatic member, unitless.
Kf A unitless coefficient typically equal to 1.57 unless the beam is

the overhanging portion of a cantilever with a backspan, in
which case Kf is as defined in Figure 1 of Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 12 Beam Vibration, or the beam is a can-
tilever that is fully fixed at one end and free at the other end,
in which case Kf is 0.56.
L Center-of-support to center-of-support length of the beam, in.
Lb Laterally unbraced length of beam; length between points that

are braced against lateral displacement of the compression
flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.
Lc Limiting unbraced length for determining allowable bending

stress, in.
LCBS Length of a composite beam segment, in. A composite beam

segment spans between any of the following: (1) physical end
of the beam top flange; (2) another beam framing into the
beam being considered; (3) physical end of concrete slab. Fig-
ure 1 Composite Beam Design Technical Note Distribution of
Shear Studs on a Composite Beam illustrates some typical
cases for LCBS.
Lcsc Length of channel shear connector, in.
Lp Limiting laterally unbraced length of beam for full plastic

bending capacity, uniform moment case (Cb = 1.0), in.
Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length of beam for inelastic lateral-

torsional buckling, in.
Ls Distance between two points used when the program is calcu-

lating the maximum number of shear studs that can fit be-
tween those points, in. If the deck span is oriented parallel to

the beam span and at least one of the points is at the end of
the beam, then Ls is taken as the distance between the two
points minus 3 inches.
L1 Distance from point of maximum moment to the closest point

of zero moment or physical end of beam top flange, or physi-
cal end of concrete slab, in.
L2 Distance from point of maximum moment to the nearest point

of zero moment or physical end of beam top flange, or physi-
cal end of concrete slab measured on the other side of the
point of maximum moment from the distance L1, in.
L3 Distance from point load to the point of zero moment, physical

end of beam top flange, or physical end of concrete slab
measured on the appropriate side of the point load, in. If the
point load is located on the left side of the point of maximum
moment, the distance is measured from the point load toward
the left end of the beam. If the point load is located on the
right side of the point of maximum moment, the distance is
measured toward the right end of the beam.
M Moment, kip-in.
MA Absolute value of moment at the quarter point of the unbraced

beam segment, kip-in.
MB Absolute value of moment at the centerline of the unbraced

beam segment, kip-in.
MC Absolute value of moment at the three-quarter point of the

unbraced beam segment, kip-in.
Mcr Elastic buckling moment, kip-in.
Mmax Maximum positive moment for a beam, kip-in.
Mn Nominal flexural strength, kip-in.
Mp Plastic bending moment, kip-in.

Mpt load Moment at the location of a point load, kip-in.
Mr Limiting buckling moment, Mcr, when λ = λr and Cb = 1.0, kip-

in.
Mu Required flexural strength, kip-in.
MPFconc Maximum possible force that can be developed in the concrete

slab, and rebar in slab, if applicable, kips.
MPFsteel Maximum possible force that can be developed in the steel

section, and cover plate, if applicable, kips.
NCBS The number of uniformly distributed shear connectors the pro-

gram specifies for a composite beam segment, unitless.
Neff The effective number of beams resisting the heel drop impact,
unitless.
Nr Number of shear stud connectors in one rib at a beam inter-

section; not to exceed three in computations, although more
than three studs may be installed, unitless.
N1 Required number of shear connectors between the point of

maximum moment and an adjacent point of zero moment (or
end of slab), unitless.
N2 Required number of shear connectors between a point load

and a point of zero moment (or end of slab), unitless.
NR Available number of metal deck ribs between two points,

unitless.
NSmax Maximum number of shear stud connectors between two

points a distance of Ls apart, unitless.
P Axial load, kips.
Pe Euler buckling load, kips.
Pn Nominal axial strength (tension or compression), kips.

Pnc Nominal compressive axial strength, kips.
Pnt Nominal tensile axial strength, kips.
PO Heel drop force, kips. This force is taken as 0.6 kips.
Pu Required axial strength (tension or compression), kips.
Py Axial compressive yield strength , kips.
PCC Percent composite connection, unitless. The exact formula for

this term is code dependent.
Qn Nominal strength of one shear connector (shear stud or chan-

nel), kips.
R Wiss-Parmelee rating factor, unitless.
RF Reduction factor for horizontal shear capacity of shear con-

nectors, unitless.
RSmax Maximum number of rows of shear stud connectors that can fit
between two points a distance of Ls apart, unitless.
Sed Minimum edge distance from midheight of a metal deck rib to

the center of a shear stud, in. For an example see paragraph
1b of the section Solid Slab or Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to
Beam Span in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 14
Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Seg-
ment. The default value is 1 inch. You can change this in the
preferences and the overwrites.
Seff Effective section modulus of a partially composite beam re-

ferred to the extreme tension fiber of the steel beam section
(including cover plate), in3.
Sr Center to center spacing of metal deck ribs, in.
Ss Section modulus of the steel beam alone plus cover plate if

applicable referred to the tension flange, in3.

St-eff The section modulus for the partial composite section referred
to the top of the equivalent transformed section, in3.
Stop Section modulus for the fully composite uncracked trans-

formed section referred to the extreme compression fiber, in3.
Str Section modulus for the fully composite uncracked trans-

formed section referred to the the extreme tension fiber of the
steel beam section (including cover plate), in3.
S x, S y Section modulus about the x and y axes of the beam respec-

tively, in3.
Sxc Section modulus about the x axis of the outside fiber of the
compression flange, in3.
Sxt Section modulus about the x axis of the outside fiber of the
tension flange, in3.
SRmax Maximum number of shear stud connectors that can fit in one
row across the top flange of a composite beam, unitless.
TB Tensile force in a composite rolled steel beam when the plastic

neutral axis is above the top of the beam, kips.
TCP Tensile force in the cover plate, kips.
TFB Tensile force in the bottom flange of a steel beam, kips.
TFT Tensile force in the top flange of a steel beam, kips.
TKB Tensile force in the bottom fillets of a rolled steel beam, kips.
TKT Tensile force in the top fillets of a rolled steel beam, kips.
TWeb Tensile force in the web of a steel beam, kips.
V Shear force, kips.
Vn Nominal shear strength, kips.
Vu Required shear strength, kips.

W Total load supported by the beam, kips. You specify a load

combination that the program uses to determine this weight.
X1 Beam buckling factor defined by AISC-LRFD93 equation F1-8.
X2 Beam buckling factor defined by AISC-LRFD93 equation F1-9.
Z Plastic section modulus of the steel beam alone plus cover

plate if applicable, in3.
Z x, Z y Plastic section modulus about the x and y axes of the beam

respectively, in3.
a clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in.
ar For a user-defined section, ratio of web area to flange area,

but not more than 10, unitless.
a1 Distance from top of concrete to bottom of effective concrete

for partial composite connection when bottom of effective con-
crete is within the slab above the metal deck (or there is a
solid slab with no metal deck), in.
a2 Distance from top of metal deck to bottom of effective con-

crete for partial composite connection when bottom of effec-
tive concrete is within the height of the metal deck, in.
a3 Distance from top of metal deck to elastic neutral axis when

elastic neutral axis is located in slab above metal deck, in.
a4 Distance from top of concrete slab to elastic neutral axis when

elastic neutral axis is located in slab above metal deck, in.
a5 Distance from bottom of metal deck to elastic neutral axis

when elastic neutral axis is located within height of metal
deck, in.
a6 Distance from top of metal deck to elastic neutral axis when

elastic neutral axis is located within height of metal deck, in.
b Width, in.

bcp Width of steel cover plate, in.
beff Effective width of concrete flange of composite beam, in.
bf Width of flange of a rolled steel beam, in.
bf-bot Width of bottom flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
bf-top Width of top flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
d Depth of steel beam from outside face of top flange to outside

face of bottom flange, in.
davg Average depth of concrete slab, including the concrete in the

metal deck ribs, in.
dsc Diameter of a shear stud connector, in.
f First natural frequency of the beam in cycles per second.
f'c Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi.
g Acceleration of gravity, in/seconds2.
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius

at each flange for rolled shapes and clear distance between
flanges for other shapes, in.
hc For rolled shapes, twice the distance from the beam centroid
to the inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or
corner radius. In a user-defined section, twice the distance
from the centroid of the steel beam alone, not including the
cover plate even if it exists, to the inside face of the compres-
sion flange, in.
hr Height of metal deck rib, in.
k Distance from outer face of a rolled beam flange to the web

toe of a fillet, in.
kc Unitless factor used in AISC-LRFD93 Table B5.1, 0.35 ≤ kc ≤

0.763.

kdepth Distance from inner face of a rolled beam flange to the web
toe of a fillet, in.
kwidth Width of idealized fillet of rolled beam section, in.
l Controlling laterally unbraced length of a member, in.
l22, l33 Laterally unbraced length of a member for buckling about the
local 2 and 3 axes of the beam respectively, in.
l x, l y Laterally unbraced length of a member for buckling about the

x and y axes of the beam respectively, in.
m For a user-defined section, ratio of web yield stress to flange

yield stress, unitless.
r Governing radius of gyration, in.
rd Distance from top of beam flange to bottom of metal deck, in.
r22, r33 Radius of gyration about the local 2 and 3 axes of the beam
respectively, in.
rT Radius of gyration of a section comprising the compression

flange plus one-third of the compression web area taken about
an axis in the plane of the web, in.
rx, ry Radius of gyration about the x and y axes of the beam respec-
tively, in.
ryc Radius of gyration of the compression flange about the y-axis,

in.
sb Beam spacing, in.
t Thickness, in.
tc Thickness of concrete slab, in. If there is metal deck this is the

thickness of the concrete slab above the metal deck.
tcp Thickness of cover plate, in.

tf Thickness of steel beam flange, in.
tf-bot Thickness of bottom flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
tf-top Thickness of top flange of a user-defined steel beam, in.
tO Time to the maximum initial displacement of a single beam

resulting from a heel drop impact, seconds.
tw Thickness of web of user-defined steel beam, in.
wa Additional metal deck rib width, in. This term is used to specify
metal deck ribs that are split over the beam. The width wa is
added to the width wr when determining the width of deck rib
available for shear studs.
wc Unit weight per volume of concrete, pounds/feet3.
wd Unit weight per area of metal deck, ksi.
wr Average width of metal deck rib, in.
x1 The assumed gap distance from the supporting beam or col-

umn flange to the end of the beam flange, in. The default
value for this length is 0.5 inches.
y Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel

beam section to the elastic neutral axis of the fully composite
beam, in.
ybare The distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel
beam to the neutral axis of the noncomposite steel beam plus
cover plate if applicable, in.
ye The distance from the elastic neutral axis of the bare steel
beam alone (plus cover plate, if applicable) to the elastic neu-
tral axis of the fully composite beam, in.
yeff The distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel
beam to the neutral axis of the partially composite beam, in.

y1 Distance from the bottom of the bottom flange of the steel

beam section to the centroid of an element of the composite
beam section, in.
y2 Distance from the top of the top flange of the steel beam sec-
tion to the plastic neutral axis when the plastic neutral axis is
within the beam top flange, in.
y3 Distance from the bottom of the top flange of a rolled steel

beam section to the plastic neutral axis when the plastic neu-
tral axis is within the fillets, in.
y4 For a rolled steel beam, the distance from the bottom of the
top fillet to the plastic neutral axis when the plastic neutral
axis is within the beam web, in. For a user-defined steel beam,
the distance from the bottom of the top flange to the plastic
neutral axis when the plastic neutral axis is within the beam
web, in.
yp Distance from the plastic neutral axis of composite section to

the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not cover plate), in.
z Distance from the elastic neutral axis of the steel beam (plus
cover plate, if it exists) alone to the top of the concrete slab,
in. Note that this distance may be different on the left and
zp Distance from the plastic neutral axis of composite section to

the top of the concrete slab, in. Note that this distance may be
different on the left and right sides of the beam.
ΣA Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the steel beam sec-
tion, in2.
ΣAtr Sum of the areas of all of the elements of the composite steel
beam section, in2.
Σ(Atry1) Sum of the product Atr times y1 for all of the elements of the

Σ(Ay1) Sum of the product A times y1 for all of the elements of the
Σ(Ay12) Sum of the product A times y12 for all of the elements of the
Σ(Atry12)= Sum of the product Atr times y12 for all of the elements of the
ΣIO Sum of the moments of inertia of each element of the com-

posite steel beam section taken about the center of gravity of
the element, in4.
ΣQn Sum of nominal strength of shear connectors (shear stud or

channel) between point considered and point of zero moment,
kips.
ΣQn-pcc Required nominal strength of shear connectors (shear stud or

channel) between point considered and point of zero moment
for partial composite connection percentage, PCC, kips.
ΣQn-100 Required nominal strength of shear connectors (shear stud or

channel) between point considered and point of zero moment
for full (100%) composite action, kips.
β Unitless factor used in calculating number of shear studs be-

tween a point load and a point of zero moment equal to Str/Ss
for full composite connection and Seff/Ss for partial composite
connection.
φ Resistance factor, unitless.
φb Resistance factor for bending in a noncomposite beam,

unitless. The default value is 0.9.
φbcne Resistance factor for negative bending in a composite beam

when Mn is determined from an elastic stress distribution,
φbcnp Resistance factor for negative bending in a composite beam

when Mn is determined from a plastic stress distribution,

φbcpe Resistance factor for positive bending in a composite beam

when Mn is determined from an elastic stress distribution,
φbcpp Resistance factor for positive bending in a composite beam

when Mn is determined from a plastic stress distribution,
φbs Resistance factor for strength of shear studs, unitless. Note

that this is a resistance factor that is not defined by AISC. It is
included by CSI to give you more control over the strength of
the composite section. The default value is 1.0.
φc Resistance factor for axial compression, unitless. The default

value is 0.85.
φt Resistance factor for axial tension, unitless. The default value

is 0.9.
φv Resistance factor for beam shear, unitless. The default value is

0.9.
λ Controlling slenderness parameter, unitless. It is the minor

axis slenderness ratio Lb/ry for lateral-torsional buckling. It is
the flange width-thickness ratio b/t as defined in AISC LRFD
Manual Specification section B5.1 for flange local buckling. It is
the web depth-thickness ratio h/tw as defined in AISC LRFD
Manual Specification section B5.1 for web local buckling.
λc Column slenderness parameter, unitless.
λp Limiting slenderness parameter for a compact element, largest

value of λ for which Mn = Mp, unitless.
λr Limiting slenderness parameter for a noncompact element,

largest value of λ for which buckling is inelastic, unitless.

Technical Note 30
Preferences
General
The composite beam design preferences are basic assignments that apply to
all composite beams. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Composite
Beam Design command to access the Preferences form where you can view
and revise the composite beam design preferences. The Composite Beam De-
sign Preferences form has five separate tabs: Factors, Beam, Deflection, Vi-
bration, and Price.
Default values are provided for all composite beam design preference items.
Thus, it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. You
should, however, at least review the default values for the preference items
to make sure they are acceptable to you.
Using the Preferences Form

To view preferences, select the Options menu > Preferences > Composite
Beam Design. The Preferences form will display. The first time you enter the
Preferences form, review and, if necessary, change the specified design code
in the drop-down box near the bottom of the form.
Click on the desired tab: Factors, Beam, Deflection, Vibration or Price. The
preference options included under each of the tabs are displayed in a two-
column spreadsheet. The left column of the spreadsheet displays the prefer-
ence item name. The right column of the spreadsheet displays the preference
item value.
To change a preference item, left click the desired preference item in either
the left or right column of the spreadsheet. This activates a drop-down box or
highlights the current preference value. If the drop-down box appears, select
a new value. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The prefer-
ence value will update accordingly. You cannot overwrite values in the drop-
down boxes.
Preferences Technical Note 30 - 1

Preferences Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
When the preference item is clicked in either column, a short description of

that item displays in the large text box just below the list of items. This de-
scription helps you remember the purpose of each preference item without
referring to the documentation.
To set all of the composite beam preference items on a particular tab to their
default values, click on that tab to view it and then click the Reset Tab but-
ton. This button resets the preference values on the currently selected tab.
To set all of the composite beam preference items on all tabs to their default
composite beam preference items.
Important note about resetting preferences: The defaults for the prefer-
ence items are built into the program. The composite beam preference values
from the built-in default values. Clicking a reset button resets the preference
values to built-in values, not to the values that were in the .edb file used to
initialize the model.
When you have finished making changes to the composite beam preferences,
click the OK button to close the form. You must click the OK button for the
changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit
the form, any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is
closed.
Preferences
For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the preference items are
follows:
• Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the
left side of the Preferences form.
• Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference

item can have.
• Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for
the associated preference item.

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Preferences
• Description: A description of the associated preference item.
Factors Tab
Phi Factors
Table 1 lists the preference items available for phi factors in AISC-LRFD93 de-
sign. Some of those phi factors are specified by the AISC specification. Others
have been created by CSI to give you more control over the capacities for the
composite section.
Table 1 AISC-LRFD93 Phi Factor Preferences

Possible Default
phi-b >0 0.9 Resistance factor for bending capacity
in a steel beam alone, φb. See AISC-
LRFD93 Composite Beam Design
Technical Note 36 Moment Capacity for
Steel Section Alone.
phi-bcne >0 0.9 Resistance factor applied to the nega-
tive bending capacity in a composite
beam section when the bending capac-
ity, Mn, is determined from an elastic
stress distribution, φbcne. See AISC-
Technical Note 35 Composite Section
Elastic Moment Capacity.
phi-bcnp >0 0.85 Resistance factor applied to the nega-
ity, Mn, is determined from a plastic
stress distribution, φbcnp.
phi-bcpe >0 0.9 Resistance factor applied to the posi-
ity, Mn, is determined from an elastic
stress distribution, φbcne. See AISC-
Technical Note 35 Composite Section
Elastic Moment Capacity.

Table 1 AISC-LRFD93 Phi Factor Preferences

Possible Default
phi-bcpp >0 0.85 Resistance factor applied to the posi-
ity, Mn, is determined from a plastic
stress distribution, φbcnp. See AISC-
Technical Note 34 Composite Plastic
Moment Capacity for Positive Bending.
phi-v >0 0.9 Resistance factor for shear capacity in
steel beam, φv. See AISC-LRFD93
Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 40 Beam Shear Capacity.
Refer to the Technical Notes mentioned in the Description column of the table
for more information.
Beam Tab
Table 2 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Beam tab
Table 2: Composite Beam Preferences on the Beam Tab

Possible Default
Toggle for shored or unshored con-
Shored? Yes/No No
struction.
Length in the middle of the beam over
which the program checks the effective
Middle Range
≥ 0% 70% width on each side of the beam, ex-
(%)
pressed as a percentage of the total
beam length.
Factor applied to live load for special
Pattern Live
≥0 0.75 pattern live load check for cantilever
Load Factor
back spans and continuous spans.
The acceptable stress ratio limit. This
Stress Ratio
>0 0.95 item only applies to design optimiza-
Limit
tion.

Deflection Tab
Table 3 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Deflection
Table 3: Composite Beam Preferences on the Deflection Tab

Possible Default
Live load deflection limitation denomi-
Live Load
Limit, L/
Total load deflection limitation denomi-
Total Load
Limit, L/
Percentage of dead load (not including
Camber DL
>0 100% superimposed dead load) on which
(%)
camber calculations are based.
for description of beam deflection and camber.
Vibration Tab
Table 4 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Vibration

Possible Default
Percentage of live load plus reduced
live load considered (in addition to full
Percent Live dead load) when computing weight
≥0 25%
Load (%) supported by the beam for use in
calculating the first natural frequency of
the beam.
Toggle to consider the frequency as
Consider
Yes/No No one of the criteria to be used for deter-
Frequency?
mining if a beam section is acceptable.


Possible Default
Minimum acceptable first natural
Minimum frequency for a floor beam. This item is
> 0 Hz 8 Hz
Frequency used when the Consider Frequency
item is set to Yes.
Toggle to consider Murray's minimum
Consider
damping requirement as one of the
Murray Damp- Yes/No No
criteria to be used for determining if a
ing?
beam section is acceptable.
Percentage of critical damping that is
Inherent inherent in the floor system. This item is
> 0% 4%
Damping (%) used when the Consider Murray
Damping item is set to Yes.
Price Tab
Table 5 lists the composite beam preference items available on the Price tab
Table 5: Composite Beam Preferences on the Price Tab

Possible Default
Toggle to consider price rather than
Optimize for steel weight when selecting the opti-
Yes/No No
Price? mum beam section from an auto select
section list.
Installed price for a single shear stud
Stud Price ($) ≥0 $0
connector.
Camber price per unit weight of steel
Camber Price
≥0 $0 beam (including cover plate, if it
($)
exists).
See "Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections" in Composite Beam De-
sign Technical Note 1 General Design Information for additional information
on the "Optimize for Price?" item.

Note that the price per unit weight for the steel beam (plus cover plate, if ap-
plicable) is input as part of the material property specification for the beam.
The material properties can be reviewed or defined using the Define menu >
Material Properties command. Be sure that you use the same currency
units (for example, U.S. dollars) for the steel price in the material properties,
the stud price in the preferences, and the camber price in the preferences.

Technical Note 31
Overwrites
This Technical Note provides instructions on how to use the Composite Beam
Overwrites form and describes the items available on each of the tabs in the
form. One section is devoted to each of the tabs.
General
The composite beam design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only
to those composite beams to which they are assigned. After selecting one or
more composite beams, use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design
> View\Revise Overwrites command to access the Composite Beam Over-
writes form where you can view and revise the composite beam design over-
writes.
Note:
There are default values provided for all overwrite items. Thus, if you are happy with the
defaults, you do not need to specify any of the composite beam overwrites.
The Composite Beam Overwrites form has eight tabs. They are Beam, Bracing
(C), Bracing, Deck, Shear Studs, Deflection, Vibration and Miscellaneous. De-
scriptions of the various overwrite options available on each tab are provided
later in this Technical Note.
Default values are provided for all composite beam overwrite items. Thus, it is
not required that you specify or change any of the overwrites. However, at
least review the default values for the overwrite items to make sure they are
acceptable. When changes are made to overwrite items, the program applies
the changes only to the elements to which they are specifically assigned; that
is, to the elements that are selected when the overwrites are changed.

Overwrites Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
Using the Composite Beam Overwrites Form

After selecting one or more composite beams, use the Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > View\Revise Overwrites command to access
the Composite Beam Overwrites form. Click on the desired tab.
The Composite Beam Overwrites are displayed on each tab with a column of
check boxes and a two-column spreadsheet. The left column in the spread-
sheet contains the name of the overwrite item. The right column in the
spreadsheet contains the overwrite value.
Initially, the check boxes are all unchecked and all of the cells in the spread-
sheet have a gray background to indicate they are inactive and that the items
in the cells currently cannot be changed. The names of the overwrite items in
the first column of the spreadsheet are visible. The values of the overwrite
items in the second column of the spreadsheet are visible if only one beam
was selected before the Composite Beam Overwrites form was accessed. If
multiple beams were selected, no values show for the overwrite items in the
second column of the spreadsheet.
After selecting one or multiple beams, check the box to the left of an over-
write item to change it. Then left click in either column of the spread sheet to
activate a drop-down box or to highlight the contents of the cell in the right
column of the spreadsheet. If the drop-down box appears, select a value from
the box. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The overwrite will
reflect the change. You cannot change the values in the drop-down boxes.
When you check a check box or left click in one of the columns in the spread-
sheet, a short description of the item in that row displays in the large text box
just below the list of items. This description helps you recall the purpose of
the overwrite item without referring to the manual.
When changes to the composite beam overwrites have been made, click the
OK button to close the form. The program then changes all of the overwrite
items whose associated check boxes are checked for the selected beam(s).
You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program.
If you click the Cancel button to exit the form, any changes made to the
overwrites will be ignored and the form will be closed.
Technical Note 31 - 2 Overwrites

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Overwrites
Resetting Composite Beam Overwrites to Default

Values
To set all of the composite beam overwrite items on a particular tab to their
default values, click on the tab and then click the Reset Tab button. This
button resets the overwrite values on the tab currently selected.
To set all of the composite beam overwrite items on all tabs to their default
composite beam overwrite items. Alternatively, you can click the Design
menu > Composite Beam Design > Reset All Composite Beam Over-
writes command to accomplish the same thing.
Important note about resetting overwrites: The defaults for the over-
write items are built into the program. The composite beam overwrite values
from the built-in program default values. When you reset overwrites, the pro-
gram resets the overwrite values to its built-in values, not to the values that
were in the .edb file used to initialize the model.
Overwrites
For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the overwrite items are
follows.
Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the cells at the left
side of the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Possible Values: The possible values for the associated overwrite item.
the associated overwrite item.
Description: A description of the associated overwrite item.

Beam Tab
Table 1 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Beam tab in
Possible Default
Shored? Yes/No No Toggle for shored or unshored con-

(unshored) struction.
Beam type Composite, Composite Type of beam design. NC w studs is

NC w studs, or short for Noncomposite with minimum
NC w/o studs shear studs. NC w/o studs is short for
Noncomposite without shear studs.
b-eff left Program Program Toggle specifying how the effective

Condition calculated or calculated width of the concrete slab on the left
b-eff left ≥0 Program User-defined effective width of concrete

calculated slab on left side of beam, beff left.
value
b-eff right Program Program Toggle specifying how the effective

Condition calculated or calculated width of the concrete slab on the right
b-eff right ≥0 Program User-defined effective width of concrete

calculated slab on right side of beam, beff right
value
Beam Fy ≥0 Specified in Yield stress of the beam, Fy. Specifying

Material 0 in the overwrites means that Fy is as
Beam Fu ≥0 Specified in Minimum tensile strength of the beam,

Material Fu. Specifying 0 means that Fu is as

Possible Default
Cover Plate Yes/No No Toggle switch indicating if a full length

Present? cover plate exists on the bottom of the
beam bottom flange.
Plate width ≥0 0 Width of cover plate, bcp.
Plate thickness ≥0 0 Thickness of cover plate, tcp.
Plate Fy >0 0 Cover plate yield stress, Fycp. Specify-

ing 0 means that Fycp is set to that
specified in the beam material proper-
ties
The Shored item affects both the deflection calculations and the flexural
stress calculations for the beam. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note
11 Beam Deflection and Camber for a description of beam deflection. If the
beam is shored, no checks are performed for the construction loading design
load combination.
Note:
The Middle Range item is specified on the Beam tab in the composite beam preferences
and is described in "Location Where Effective Slab Width is Checked" of Composite
Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete Slab.
Typically, when a beam is designed using the Composite Beam Design post-
processor that beam is designed as a composite beam if it has a deck section
(not slab section) assigned along the full length of the specified Middle Range
on at least one side of the beam. The Beam Type overwrite allows you to
specify that a beam that would ordinarily be designed as a composite beam
be designed as a noncomposite beam. The overwrite does not and cannot
force a beam that has been designed as a noncomposite beam, because there
is no deck section along at least one side, to be designed as a composite
beam. When using the Composite Beam Design postprocessor, a beam that
does not have a deck section along at least one side is always designed as a

noncomposite beam, regardless of what is specified in the Beam Type over-

write.
When a beam is designed as noncomposite with minimum shear studs, the

beam is designed as a noncomposite beam. Then shear studs are specified for
the beam with as large a spacing as possible, without exceeding the specified
maximum longitudinal spacing. The maximum longitudinal spacing can be
overwritten on the Shear Studs tab.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete Slab for
a description of the beam effective width.
The beam yield stress and the cover plate yield stress both default to the
yield stress specified for the material property associated with the beam sec-
tion. When the Define menu > Frame Sections command is used to define
a beam section, the material property associated with the beam section
should also be defined. The material property is defined using the Define
menu > Material Properties command.
In this program, the cover plate can have a yield stress that is different from
that of the beam, if desired. The cover plate width, thickness and Fy items are
not active unless the "Cover Plate Present" item is set to Yes. See "Cover
Plates" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 7 Composite Beam Proper-
ties for a description of cover plates.
Bracing (C) Tab and Bracing Tab

The unbraced length overwrite items included on the Bracing (C) tab and the
Bracing tab are exactly the same. The items on the Bracing (C) tab apply to
construction loading design load combinations. The items on the Bracing tab
apply to final condition design load combinations.
The first two items that appear in the Bracing (C) tab and the Bracing tab are
shown in Table 2a. Additional items may also appear in the tabs, depending
on your choice for the Bracing Condition item. These additional items are
shown in Tables 2b and 2c.

Table 2a: First Two Composite Beam Overwrite Items on the

Bracing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab
Possible Default
Cb factor ≥0 Program Unitless factor used in determining al-

calculated lowable bending stress, Cb. Specifying
0 in the overwrites means that this
value is program calculated
Bracing Program Program This item defines how the unbraced
Condition calculated, calculated lengths are determined for buckling
bracing about the beam local 2-axis. They are
specified or program calculated, based on user-
length specified uniform and point bracing, or
specified based on a user-specified maximum
unbraced length.
When the Cb factor is program calculated, the program uses Equation 1 to

calculate it unless you have specified the Bracing Condition as Length Speci-
fied.
12.5 M max
Cb = Eqn. 1
2.5 M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
where,
Mmax is the maximum moment.
MA is the moment at the one-quarter point.
MB is the moment at the center or one-half point.
MC is the moment at the three-quarter point.
When the Bracing Condition is specified as Program Calculated, the program

assumes the beam is braced as described in "Determination of the Braced
Points of a Beam" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Un-
braced Length. Note that the program automatically considers the bracing for
construction loading and for the final condition separately. For the construc-

tion loading condition, the program assumes that the concrete fill does not
assist in bracing the beam.
When the Bracing Condition is specified as Bracing Specified, two items ap-
pear in the tab in addition to those shown in Table 2a. The two additional
items are shown in Table 2b.
Table 2b: Additional Composite Beam Overwrite Items on the

Bracing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab When the Bracing
Condition Is Specified as Bracing Specified
Possible Default
No. Point ≥0 0 The number of user-specified point

Braces brace locations. Clicking in this box
opens the Point Braces form where you
specify the point braces.
No. Uniform ≥0 0 The number of user-specified uniform
Braces braces. Clicking in this box opens the
Uniform Braces form where you specify
the uniform braces.
The No. Point Braces and No. Uniform Braces items allow you to specify actual
bracing for the beam. These items are described in "User-Specified Uniform
and Point Bracing" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Un-
braced Length.
When the Bracing Condition is specified as Length Specified, two items appear
in the tab in addition to those shown in Table 2a. The two additional items are
shown in Table 2c.

Table 2c: Additional Composite Beam Overwrite Items on the Brac-

ing (C) Tab and the Bracing Tab When the Bracing Condi-
tion Is Specified as Length Specified
Possible Default
Absolute Yes/No No Toggle switch for whether the maxi-
Length? mum unbraced length is given as an
absolute length or a relative length.
Unbraced L22 ≥ 0 and ≤ Length of Maximum unbraced length for buckling
beam length beam about the beam local 2 axis.
When the maximum unbraced length is specified as an absolute length, the

actual maximum unbraced length is specified. When the maximum unbraced
length is specified as a relative length, the value specified is equal to the
maximum unbraced length divided by the length of the beam. The relative
length specified is always between 0 and 1, inclusive.
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 9 Beam Unbraced Length for ad-
ditional information about the unbraced length of the beam.
Deck Tab
Table 3 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Deck tab in
Table 3: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Deck Tab
Possible Default
Deck ID Left Program Program Deck ID assigned to left side of beam.

defined deck
property, or
None

Table 3: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Deck Tab
Possible Default
Left calculated, calculated left side of beam relative to the span
parallel, or direction of the beam.
perpendicular
Deck ID Right Program Program Deck ID assigned to right side of beam.
defined deck
property, or
None
Right calculated, calculated the right side of beam relative to the
parallel, or span direction of beam
perpendicular
When the Deck ID is program calculated, you must refer to the output data to
see what the program assumed for this item. It is not shown in the over-
writes.
If the deck direction is program calculated, do not overlook the important

note about deck orientation in "Multiple Deck Types or Directions Along the
Beam Length" in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of
the Concrete Slab.
Shear Studs Tab

Table 4 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Shear
Studs tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Table 4: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Shear Studs Tab

Possible Default
User Pattern? Yes/No No Toggle to indicate if a user-defined
shear connector pattern is defined.

Table 4: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Shear Studs Tab

Possible Default
Uniform ≥0 0, indicating Uniform spacing of shear studs along
Spacing there are no the beam. There is one shear stud per
uniformly row along the beam.
spaced
connectors
No. Additional ≥0 0, indicating Number of sections in which additional
Sections there are no uniformly spaced shear studs are
additional specified. Clicking in this box opens the
connectors Additional Sections form where you
specified specify the section length and the num-
ber of uniformly spaced connectors in
the section.
Min Long >0 6ds Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear
Spacing (i.e., six stud studs along the length of the beam.
diameters)
Max Long >0 36 inches Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
Spacing studs along the length of the beam.
Min Tran >0 4ds Minimum transverse spacing of shear
Spacing (i.e., four stud studs across the beam flange.
diameters)
Max Studs >0 3 Maximum number of shear studs in a
per Row single row across the beam flange.
Qn Program Program Capacity of a single shear stud. Speci-
calculated or calculated fying 0 in the overwrites means that this
>0 value is program calculated.
The Uniform Spacing and No. Additional Sections items are only available if
the User Pattern item is set to Yes. See Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 15 User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns for a more information.
The program default value for the minimum longitudinal spacing of shear
studs along the length of the beam is six shear stud diameters. Note that this
The program default value for the maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
studs along the length of the beam is 36 inches. The design code used may
specify the maximum longitudinal spacing is eight times the total slab thick-
ness (rib height, hr, plus concrete slab above metal deck, tc). AISC-LRFD-93
Specification Section I5 specifies that the maximum longitudinal spacing of

shear studs along the length of a beam shall not exceed 36 inches for beams
when the span of the metal deck is perpendicular to the span of the beam. If
your total slab thickness is less than 36"/8 = 4.5", the program default value
may be unconservative and should be revised.
The program default value for the minimum transverse spacing of shear studs
across the beam flange is four shear stud diameters. This is consistent with
the last paragraph of AISC-LRFD-93 Specification Section I5. Note that this
See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on
a Composite Beam for an additional description of how shear studs are dis-
tributed on composite beams.
The "Max Studs per Row" item indicates the maximum number of shear studs
that is allowed in a row across the beam flange. For wider beams, the Min
Tran Spacing item might indicate that more studs could be accommodated
across the beam flange but the Max Studs per Row item will limit the number
of studs in any row. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 13 Distribu-
tion of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam for an additional description of how
shear studs are distributed on beams.
See "Shear Stud Connector" in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Techni-

cal Note 25 Shear Studs for a description of how the program calculates the
allowable shear load for a single shear stud. Note that when a q value is
specified in the overwrites, the program assumes that the specified value of q
has already been modified by any applicable reduction factors for the metal
deck. Finally, note that specifying 0 (zero) in the overwrites for this item
means that the allowable shear stud load is calculated by the program, not
that it is zero.
Shear studs are described in more detail in Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite Beam, Technical Note 14
The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a Composite Beam Segment, and
Deflection Tab
Table 5 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Deflection

Table 5: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Deflection Tab
Possible Default
Deflection Yes/No No Toggle to consider live load and total

Absolute? load deflection limitations as absolute
or as divisor of beam length (relative).
Live Load Limit >0 Specified in Deflection limitation for live load. For
Preferences relative deflection, inputting 360 means
Total Load >0 Specified in Deflection limitation for total load. For
Limit Preferences relative deflection, inputting 240 means
Calculate Yes/No Yes Toggle for the program to calculate
Camber? beam camber.
Fixed Camber ≥0 0 User-specified camber when the pro-
gram does not calculate beam camber
for a description of beam deflection and camber.
Vibration Tab
Table 6 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Vibration
Table 6: Composite Beam Overwrites on the Vibration Tab
Possible Default
Neff Condition User Defined User Defined Toggle to select user defined or pro-
or Program gram calculated based on beam spac-
Calculated ing, N effective.
No. Effective ≥1 1.0 Effective number of beams resisting a
Beams heel drop impact.

Miscellaneous Tab
Table 7 lists the composite beam overwrite items available on the Miscellane-
ous tab in the Composite Beam Overwrites form.
Possible Default
Consider Yes/No No Toggle to select if beam depth is to be

Beam Depth? considered in an auto select section
list. If yes, maximum and minimum
depths must be input.
Maximum >0 44 inches Maximum actual (not nominal) beam
section list.
Minimum ≥0 0 Minimum actual (not nominal) beam
section list.
Maximum >0 100% Maximum percent composite connec-
PCC(%) tion considered for the beam.
Minimum PCC >0 25% Minimum percent composite connection
(%) considered for the beam.
LL Reduction 0<, >1.0 1.0 Reducible live load is multiplied by this
Factor factor to obtain the reduced live load. If
zero is selected, the program calcu-
lated valued is used.
Horizontal EQ 0<, >1.0 1.0 Multiplier applied to the earthquake
Factor portion of the load in a design load
combination.
Ignore Similar- Yes/No No Defines if the story level similarity to a
ity master story level is to be ignored when
designing the beam.

Technical Note 32
This Technical Note defines the default AISC-LRFD93 composite beam design
load combinations. General information about composite beam design load
combinations is provided by Composite Beam Design Technical Note 10 De-
sign Load Combinations.
You may use the default composite beam design load combinations for your
design, or you may define your own design load combinations, or you can use
both default combinations and your own combinations. You can modify the
default design load combinations and you can delete them if you wish. Use
the Design Menu > Composite Beam Design > Select Design Combo
command to access the design load combinations selection form.
Strength Check for Construction Loads

The program only performs the check using the construction load design load
combination if the beam is unshored. If the beam is shored, the check for
construction loads is not performed and any specified design load combina-
tions for construction loads are not relevant.
The automatically created design load combination, using the AISC-LRFD93

specification, for checking the strength of an unshored beam subjected to
construction loads is given by Equation 1.
1.6 (ΣWDL) + 1.6 [0.2 (ΣLL + ΣRLL)] Eqn. 1
where,
ΣWDL = The sum of all wet dead load (WDL) load cases defined for
the model. Note that if a load case is simply defined as dead
load, it is assumed to be a WDL load case.
ΣLL = The sum of all live load (LL) load cases defined for the
model.
Design Load Combinations Technical Note 32 - 1

Design Load Combinations Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
ΣRLL = The sum of all reducible live load (RLL) load cases defined
for the model.
In Equation 1 the term 0.2 (ΣLL + ΣRLL) is an assumed construction live load.
Note that the load factor for dead loads is assumed the same as that for live
load when considering construction loads (e.g., placing of concrete, etc.). See
R. Vogel (1991).
Strength Check for Final Loads

The automatically created design load combinations for checking the strength
of a composite beam under final loads are given by Equations 2 and 3.
1.4 (ΣWDL + ΣSDL) Eqn. 2
1.2 (ΣWDL + ΣSDL) + 1.6 (ΣLL + ΣRLL) Eqn. 3
where,
ΣSDL = The sum of all superimposed dead load (SDL) load cases
defined for the model.
and the remainder of the terms are as defined for Equation 1.
Deflection Check for Final Loads

The automatically created design load combination for checking the deflection
of a composite beam under final loads is given by Equation 4.
ΣWDL + ΣSDL + ΣLL + ΣRLL Eqn. 4
where all of the terms are as described for Equations 1 through 3. Note that
all of the load factors for this servicability check are 1.0.
If the beam is unshored, the WDL portion of the deflection is based on the
moment of inertia of the steel beam alone and the remainder of the deflection
is based on the effective moment of inertia of the composite section. If the
beam is shored, the entire deflection is based on the effective moment of in-
ertia of the composite section.
Technical Note 32 - 2 Design Load Combinations

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Design Load Combinations
Reference
Vogel, R. 1991. “LRFD-Composite Beam Design with Metal Deck,” Steel Tips,
Technical Information & Product Service, Steel Committee of Califor-
nia, March.
Design Load Combinations Technical Note 32 - 3

Technical Note 33
Compact and Noncompact Requirements
This Technical Note describes how the program checks the AISC-LRFD93
specification requirements for compact and noncompact beams. The basic
compact and noncompact requirements checked are in AISC-LRFD93 specifi-
cation Chapter B, Table B5.1. The program checks the width-to-thickness ra-
tios of the beam compression flange, beam web, and, if it exists and is in
compression, the cover plate. When a singly symmetric beam is designed for
noncomposite behavior, it is also checked for lateral torsional buckling re-
quirements.
Overview
The program classifies beam sections as either compact, noncompact or slen-
der. It checks the compact and noncompact section requirements at each de-
sign location along the beam for each design load combination separately. A
beam section may be classified differently for different design load combina-
tions. For example, a beam may be classified as compact for design load
combination A and as noncompact for design load combination B. Two rea-
sons that a beam may be classified differently for different design load cases
are:
The compact section requirements for beam webs depend on the axial
load in the beam. Different design load combinations may produce differ-
ent axial loads in the beam.
The compression flange may be different for different design load combi-
nations. If the sizes of the top and bottom flanges are not the same, clas-
sification of the section may depend on which flange is determined to be
the compression flange.
At each design location, for each design load combination, the program first
checks a beam section for the compact section requirements for the compres-
sion flange, web, cover plate (if applicable) and lateral torsional buckling (if
applicable) described herein. If the beam section meets all of those require-
Compact and Noncompact Requirements Technical Note 33 - 1

Compact and Noncompact Requirements Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
ments, it is classified as compact for that design load combination. If the

beam section does not meet all of the compact section requirements, it is
checked for the noncompact requirements for the flanges, web, cover plate (if
applicable) and lateral torsional buckling (if applicable) described herein. If
the beam section meets all of those requirements, it is classified as noncom-
pact for that design load combination. If the beam section does not meet all
of the noncompact section requirements, it is classified as slender for that de-
sign load combination and the program does not consider it for composite
beam design.
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Flanges

program for beam compression flanges. The width-to-thickness ratio for
flanges is denoted b/t, and is equal to bf/2tf for I-shaped sections and bf/tf for
channel sections.
Compact Section Limits for Flanges

For compact sections, the width-to-thickness ratio for the compression flange
is limited to that indicated by Equation 1.
b 65
≤ , for compact sections Eqn. 1
t Fyf
where Fyf is the specified yield stress of the flange considered. Equation 1 ap-
plies to both rolled sections selected from the program's database and to
user-defined sections.
Noncompact Section Limits for Flanges

I-Shaped Rolled Beams and Channels
For noncompact I-shaped rolled beams and channels, the width-to-thickness
ratio for the compression flange is limited to that indicated by Equation 2.
b 141
t Fy - 10
where Fy is the specified yield stress of the beam or channel.
Technical Note 33 - 2 Compact and Noncompact Requirements

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Compact and Noncompact Requirements
User-Defined and Hybrid Beams

For noncompact user-defined and hybrid beams, the width-to-thickness ratio
for the compression flange is limited to that indicated by Equation 3.
b 162
t Fyf - 16.5
kc
where Fyf is the yield stress of the compression flange and,
4
kc = but not less than 0.35 ≤ k c ≤ 0.763 Eqn. 4
h
tw
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Webs

program for beam webs.
Compact Section Limits for Webs

When checking a beam web for compact section requirements, the width-to-
thickness ratio used is h/tw. The equation used for checking the compact sec-
tion limits in the web depends on the magnitude of the axial compression
stress ratio, (Pu / φbPy) in the beam. When calculating the axial compression
stress ratio, the following two rules are used:
The program takes Py as AsFy for rolled sections and bf-toptf-topFyf-top +

htwFyw + bf-bottf-botFyf-bot for user-defined sections.
The program uses φb = 0.85 if a plastic stress distribution is used for mo-
ment and φb = 0.9 if an elastic stress distribution is used for moment.
The program computes the axial compression stress ratio (Pu / φbPy) based
on the area of the steel beam alone not including the cover plate, even if
it exists, and not including the concrete slab.
When (Pu / φbPy) ≤ 0.125, Equation 5a defines the compact section limit for
webs. When (Pu / φbPy) > 0.125, Equation 5b defines the compact section limit
for webs.

h 640  2.75Pu 
, when Pu ≤ 0.125
≤ 1− Eqn. 5a
tw Fy  φ b Py  φ b Py

h 191  P  253
≥
≤ 2.33 − u ,
tw Fy  φ b Py 
 Fy
Eqn. 5b
P
when u > 0.125
φ b Py
In Equations 5a and 5b, the value of Fy used is the largest of the Fy values for
the beam flanges and the web.
If there is no axial force, or if there is axial tension only (i.e., no axial com-
pressive force), only Equation 5a applies.
Noncompact Section Limits for Webs

When checking a beam web of a beam for noncompact section requirements,
the width-to-thickness ratio checked is h/tw. The noncompact section limits
depend on whether the flanges of the beam are of equal or unequal size.
Beams with Equal Sized Flanges

Equation 6 defines the noncompact section limit for webs in beams with equal
sized flanges.
h 970  0.74Pu 

≤ 1− Eqn. 6
tw Fy  φ b Py 

In Equation 6, the value of Fy used is the largest of the Fy values for the beam
flanges and the web.
Beams with Unequal Sized Flanges

Equation 7 defines the noncompact section limit for webs in beams with une-
qual sized flanges

h 253   h  0.74Pu 
≤ 1 + 2.83  1 −  ,
Fy   φ b Py 
tw  hc  
where, Eqn. 7
3 h 3
≤ ≤
4 hc 2
In Equation 7, the value of Fy used is the largest of the Fy values for the beam
flanges and the web. Equation 7 is Equation A-B5-1 in the AISC-LRFD93
specification.
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Cover Plates

The width-to-thickness checks made for the cover plate depend on the width
of the cover plate compared to the width of the beam bottom flange. Figure 1
illustrates the conditions considered.
In Case A of the figure, the width of the cover plate is less than or equal to
the width of the beam bottom flange. In that case, the width-to-thickness ra-
tio is taken as b1/tcp, and it is checked as a flange cover plate.
In Case B of Figure 1, the width of the cover plate is greater than the width of
the beam bottom flange. Two conditions are checked in that case. The first
condition is the same as that shown in Case A, where the width-to-thickness
ratio is taken as b1/tcp and is checked as a flange cover plate. The second
condition checked in Case B takes b2/tcp as the width-to-thickness ratio and
checks it as a plate projecting from a beam. This second condition is only
checked for the noncompact requirements; it is not checked for compact re-
quirements.
Compact Section Limits for Cover Plates

For both cases A and B shown in Figure 1, the cover plate is checked for com-
pact section requirements as shown in Equation 8.
b1 190
≤ Eqn. 8
t cp Fycp
where b1 is defined in Figure 1.

Beam
Beam
Cover plate
tcp
tcp
b1 b2 b1 b2
Cover plate
Case A Case B
Figure 1: Conditions Considered When Checking Width-to-Thickness

Ratios of Cover Plates
Noncompact Section Limits for Cover Plates

The checks made for noncompact section requirements depend on whether
the width of the cover plate is less than or equal to that of the bottom flange
of the beam, Case A in Figure 1, or greater than that of the bottom flange of
the beam, Case B in Figure 1.
Cover Plate Width ≤ Beam Bottom Flange Width

bottom flange, Equation 9 applies for the noncompact check for the cover
plate.
b1 238
≤ Eqn. 9
t cp Fycp

Cover Plate Width > Beam Bottom Flange Width

When the cover plate width exceeds the width of the beam bottom flange,
both Equations 9 and 10 apply for the noncompact check for the cover plate.
b2 95
≤ Eqn. 10
t cp Fycp

Technical Note 34
Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for
Positive Bending
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates the positive bend-
ing moment capacity for a composite section assuming a plastic stress distri-
bution.
Overview
Figure 1 illustrates a generic plastic stress distribution for positive bending.
Note that the concrete is stressed to 0.85 f'c and the steel is stressed to Fy.
The distance yp is measured from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not
cover plate) to the plastic neutral axis (PNA). The distance zp is measured
from the top of the concrete slab to the PNA; it can be different on the two
sides of the beam as described later. The illustrated plastic stress distribution
is the basic distribution of stress used by the program when considering a
plastic stress distribution for positive bending. Note that if the metal deck ribs
are parallel to the beam, the concrete in the ribs is also considered.
0.85f’c
CConc
a
zp
CSteel
Fy
Plastic neutral axis (PNA)
TSteel
yp
Fy
Beam Section Beam Elevation Plastic Stress

Distribution
Figure 1: Generic Plastic Stress Distribution for Positive Bending
Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending Technical Note 34 - 1

Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
Figure 2 illustrates how the program idealizes a steel beam for calculating the
plastic stress distribution. Two different cases are shown, one for a rolled
section and the other for a user-defined section. The idealization for the rolled
section considers the fillets whereas the idealization for the user-defined sec-
tion assumes there are no fillets because none are specified in the section
definition. Although not shown in those figures, the deck type and orientation
may be different on the left and right sides of the beam as shown in Figure 2
of Composite Beam Design Technical Note 8 Effective Width of the Concrete
Slab.
For a rolled steel section, the fillets are idealized as a rectangular block of
steel. The depth of this rectangular block, kdepth, is:
kdepth = k - tf Eqn. 1
The width of this rectangular block, kwidth, is:
kwidth = (As - 2bftf - twh) / 2kdepth Eqn. 2
The basic steps in computing the positive plastic moment capacity are:
Determine the location of the PNA using Equations 3a through 10.
Calculate the plastic moment capacity of the composite section using Equa-
tion 11 together with the appropriate table chosen from Tables 2 through
11 depending on the location of the PNA. Note that for user-defined sec-
tions, the terms related to the top and bottom fillets are ignored.
Location of the Plastic Neutral Axis

The program determines the location of the PNA by comparing the maximum
possible compressive force that can be developed in the concrete, MPFconc,
with the maximum possible tensile force that can be developed in the steel
section (including the cover plate, if applicable), MPFsteel.
The maximum concrete force, MPFconc, is calculated from Equation 3a if there

is no metal deck, or if the metal deck ribs are oriented perpendicular to the
beam span. Equation 3b is used if the deck ribs are oriented parallel to the
beam span. Note that the maximum concrete force has contributions from the
left and right sides of the beam that are treated separately and may be dif-
ferent.
Technical Note 34 - 2 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending
tc
tf-top
hr
k
kwidth
kdepth
bf-top
tw
d
h
kdepth
tf-bot
kwidth
k
tcp
bcp
bf-bot
Idealization for Rolled Section
tc
tf-top
hr
bf-top
h
tw
d
tf-bot
tcp
bcp
bf-bot
Idealization for User-Defined Section
Figure 2: Idealization of a Rolled Section and a User-Defined Section used

for Calculating the Plastic Stress Distribution

MPFconc = [(0.85f'c beff tc)left + (0.85f'c beff tc)right] Eqn. 3a
 wrhr 
MPFconc = [(0.85f'c beff  t c +  )left +

 Sr 
 wrhr 
(0.85f'c beff  t c +  )right Eqn. 3b

 Sr 
The maximum steel force, MPFsteel, is calculated from Equation 4a if the beam
is a rolled section or Equation 4b if it is a user-defined section.
MPFsteel = (AsFy + bcp tcp Fycp) Eqn. 4a
MPFsteel = (bf-toptf-topFyf-top + twh +
bf-bottf-botFyf-bot + bcp tcp Fycp) Eqn. 4b
When computing the location of the PNA, it important to remember that the
concrete is assumed to take no tension. Also, the concrete in the metal deck
ribs is only considered effective in compression if the metal deck ribs are ori-
ented parallel to the beam span.
The maximum concrete and steel forces are compared to determine whether
the PNA is within the concrete slab or the steel section. If MPFconc > MPFsteel,
the PNA is within the concrete slab. If MPFsteel > MPFconc, the PNA is within the
steel section. If MPFsteel = MPFconc, the PNA is at the top of the steel beam if
there is full composite connection and within the steel beam if there is partial
composite connection.
If the PNA is within the slab, the fact that the concrete slab can be different
on each side of the beam complicates locating the PNA. If the PNA is within
the steel section, there are several general locations for it. After the general
locations have been identified, it is a straightforward process to determine the
location of the PNA. The general locations are:
Within the beam top flange.
Within the beam top fillet (applies to rolled shapes from the program's
section database only).

Within the beam web.
Within the beam bottom fillet (applies to rolled shapes from the program's
section database only).
Within the beam bottom flange.
Within the cover plate (if one is specified).
Note it is very unlikely that the PNA would be below the beam web but there
is nothing in the program to prevent it. This condition would require a very
large beam bottom flange and/or cover plate. Each of the PNA locations in the
steel section is described following the description of the PNA in the concrete
slab.
PNA in the Concrete Slab Above the Steel Beam

The program considers the condition where the slab on the left and right sides
of the beam are different. When the program determines that the PNA is
above the top of the steel section, that is, when MPFconc > MPFsteel, it puts the
following four items in order, from highest elevation to lowest:
Top of concrete slab on the left side of the beam.
Top of concrete slab on the right side of the beam.
Top of metal on the left side of the beam.
Top of metal on the right side of the beam.
Next the program sums the compressive forces of those four items, starting
with the item at the highest elevation and proceeding downward. As each
item is added into the sum, the sum of compressive forces is compared with
the maximum tension value, which is the sum of MPFsteel. As soon as the sum
of forces exceeds MPFsteel, the program recognizes that the last location con-
sidered is below the PNA, and the second to last location considered is above
the PNA. Using this information, the program can solve directly for the loca-
tion of the PNA.
Figures 3a and 3b show the internal forces for a rolled steel section and a
user-defined steel section, respectively, for the condition where the PNA is in
the concrete slab above the metal deck.

zp
CC 1
TF T
TK T
yp
TWeb
TK B
TF B
TC P
Beam Section Beam Elevation Beam Internal Forces
Figure 3a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA in Concrete Slab Above Metal
Deck, Positive Bending
zp
CC 1
TF T

yp
TWeb
TF B
TC P
Figure 3b: User-Defined Steel Section with PNA in Concrete Slab Above
Metal Deck, Positive Bending

user-defined steel section, respectively, for the condition where the PNA is
within the height, hr, of the metal deck ribs.
CC 1
zp
CC 2
TF T
TK T
yp
TWeb
TK B
TF B
TC P
Figure 4a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Height, hr, of Metal Deck,
Positive Bending
CC 1
zp
CC 2
TF T

yp
TWeb
TF B
TC P
Figure 4b: User-Define Steel Section with PNA within Height, hr, of Metal
Deck, Positive Bending

Note that in Figures 3a through 4b, the concrete compression forces (CC1 and
CC2) may have different magnitudes and locations (elevations) for the left and
PNA within the Beam Top Flange

within the beam top flange. The term y2, which is the distance from the top of
the steel beam to the PNA, is shown in these figures and is defined by Equa-
tion 5.
MPFsteel − MPFconc
y2 = Eqn. 5
2b f − top Fyf − top
CC 1
zp
CC 2
y2 CF T
TF T
TK T

yp
TWeb
TK B
TF B
TC P
Figure 5a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Beam Top Flange,
Positive Bending

CC 1
zp
CC 2
y2
CF T
TF T
yp
TWeb
TF B
TC P

Figure 5b: User-Defined Steel Section with PNA within Beam Top Flange,
Positive Bending
PNA within the Beam Top Fillet

The PNA lies within the beam top fillet only if the beam section is a rolled sec-
tion. Figure 6 shows the internal forces for this condition.
CC 1
zp
CC 2
y3
CF T
CK T
TK T

yp
TWeb
TK B
TF B
TC P
Figure 6: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Beam Top Fillet, Positive
Bending

The term y3, which is the distance from the bottom side of the beam top
flange to the PNA, is shown in Figure 6 and is defined by Equation 6.
MPFsteel − MPFconc − 2b f − top t f − top Fyf − top

y3 = Eqn. 6
2k width Fyw
PNA within the Beam Web

within the beam web. The term y4, which for a rolled steel beam is the dis-
tance from the web toe of the top fillet to the PNA, and for a user-defined
beam is the distance from the bottom side of the beam top flange to the PNA,
is shown in Figures 7a and 7b and is defined by Equation 7.

y4 = −
2t w Fyw
Eqn. 7
2k width k depth Fyw
2t w Fyw
The last term in Equation 7 only applies to rolled steel beams; it reduces to
zero for user-defined beams.
CC 1
zp
CC 2
CF T
CK T
y4
CWeb
TWeb
yp
TK B
TF B
TC P
Figure 7a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Beam Web, Positive
Bending

CC 1
zp
CC 2
CF T
CWeb
y4
yp
TWeb
TF B
TC P
Figure 7b: User-Defined Steel Section with PNA within Beam Web,
Positive Bending
PNA within the Beam Bottom Fillet

The PNA is within the beam bottom fillet only if the beam section is a rolled
section. Figure 8 shows the internal forces for this condition.
CC 1
CC 2
CF T
CK T
zp
CWeb
y5
CK B
TK B
yp
TF B
Plastic neutral axis (PNA) TC P
Figure 8: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Beam Bottom Fillet, Posi-
tive Bending

The term y5, which is the distance from the top side of the beam bottom fillet
to the PNA, is shown in Figure 8 and is defined by Equation 8.

y5 = −
2k width Fyw
Eqn. 8
2k width k depth Fyw 2ht w Fyw
−
2k width Fyw 2k width Fyw
Note that it is unlikely that the PNA will be this low. It requires a very large
beam bottom flange and/or cover plate.
PNA within the Beam Bottom Flange

user-defined steel section, respectively, for the condition where the PNA lies
within the beam bottom flange.
CC 1
CC 2
CF T
CK T
zp
CWeb
CK B
y6
CF B
TF B
yp
Figure 9a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Beam Bottom Flange,
Positive Bending

CC 1
CC 2
CF T
zp
CWeb
y6
CF B
TF B
yp
Figure 9b: User-Defined Steel Section with PNA within Beam Bottom
Flange, Positive Bending
The term y6, which is the distance from the top of the beam bottom flange to
the PNA, is shown in Figure 9 and 9b and is defined by Equation 9.

y6 = −
2b f -bot Fyf -bot
Eqn. 9
−
2b f -bot Fyf -bot 2b f -bot Fyf -bot
Note that it is unlikely that the PNA will be this low. It requires a very large
beam bottom flange and/or cover plate.
PNA within the Cover Plate

user-defined steel section, respectively, for the condition where the PNA lies
within the cover plate.

CC 1
CC 2
CF T
CK T
zp
CWeb
CK B
CF B
y7
CCP
yp
Figure 10a: Rolled Steel Section with PNA within Cover Plate, Positive
Bending
CC 1
CC 2
CF T
zp
CWeb
CF B
y7
CCP
yp
Figure 10b: User-Defined Steel Section with PNA within Cover Plate, Posi-
tive Bending

The term y7, which is the distance from the top of the cover plate to the PNA,
is shown in Figure 10a and 10b and is defined by Equation 10.

y7 = −
2b cp Fycp
− − Eqn. 10
2b cp Fycp 2b cp Fycp
2b f − bot t f − bot Fyf − bot
2b cp Fycp
Note that it is unlikely that the PNA will be this low. It requires an extremely
large cover plate. In the event that the PNA were in the cover plate, the dis-
tance yp would become negative.
Calculating the PNA Location

To calculate the location of the PNA for positive bending, the program starts
by comparing the value of MPFconc to that of MPFsteel to determine whether the
PNA is in the steel section or in the concrete slab above the steel section. As
described in an earlier section of this Technical Note, if MPFconc > MPFsteel, the
PNA is within the concrete slab. If MPFsteel > MPFconc, the PNA is within the
steel section. If MPFsteel = MPFconc, the PNA is at the top of the steel beam.
If the PNA is in the concrete slab above the steel section, the procedure de-
scribed in the previous subsection of this Technical Note entitled "PNA in the
Concrete Slab Above the Steel Beam" is followed.
If the PNA is within the steel section, the program assumes that the PNA oc-
curs in the top flange of the beam. The distance y2 is calculated using Equa-
tion 5. The calculated distance y2 is then checked to see if it actually is within
the beam top flange. If it is, the location of the PNA has been identified.
If the calculated distance y2 is not within the beam top flange, the program
continues by assuming that the PNA occurs in the beam top fillet. (Note that if
the beam is a user-defined beam, there is no top fillet and the program skips
directly to assuming that the PNA is in the beam web.) The distance y3 is cal-
culated using Equation 6. The calculated distance y3 is then checked to see if
it actually is within the beam top fillet. If it does, the location of the PNA has
been identified.

If the calculated distance y3 is not within the beam top fillet, the program
continues by assuming that the PNA occurs in the beam web. The distance y4
is calculated using Equation 7. The calculated distance y4 is then checked to
see if it actually is within the beam web. If it is, the location of the PNA has
been identified.
In any practical case, the PNA is not expected to be below the beam web.
However, in the event the PNA has not yet been located, the program contin-
ues down the beam section through the bottom fillet, the bottom flange and
finally the cover plate until the location of the PNA has been identified.
Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending

The plastic moment capacity for positive bending in a composite section is
calculated from Equation 11:
10
φ bcpp M n = φ bcpp ∑T
Piece = 1
piece x PNA− piece +
Eqn. 11
10
φ bcpp ∑C
Piece = 1
piece x PNA − piece
where:
Cpiece = Compression force in a piece of the composite beam,

kips.
Mn = Plastic moment capacity for positive bending, kip-in.
Tpiece = Tension force in a piece of the composite beam, kips.
xPNA-piece = Distance from centroid of tension or compression force

in a piece of a composite beam to the PNA, in.
φbcpp = Resistance factor for positive bending when plastic

stress distribution is assumed, unitless.
In Equation 11, the ten pieces are:

Concrete above the metal deck, not including rebar, on the left side
of the beam: The concrete can only carry a compression force; tension is
not allowed in the concrete.
Concrete above the metal deck, not including rebar, on the right
side of the beam: The concrete can only carry a compression force; ten-
sion is not allowed in the concrete.
Concrete within height of metal deck on the left side of the beam:
The concrete can only carry a compression force; tension is not allowed in
the concrete.
Concrete within height of metal deck on the right side of the beam:
The concrete can only carry a compression force; tension is not allowed in
the concrete.
Beam top flange: The force in the beam top flange can be tension, com-
pression, or compression in the upper portion of the flange and tension in
the lower portion.
Beam top fillet: The force in the beam top fillet can be tension, compres-
sion, or compression in the upper portion of the fillet and tension in the
lower portion.
Beam web: The force in the beam web can be tension, compression, or
compression in the upper portion of the web and tension in the lower por-
tion.
Beam bottom fillet: The force in the beam bottom fillet can be tension,
compression, or compression in the upper portion of the fillet and tension in
the lower portion.
Beam bottom flange: The force in the beam bottom flange can be ten-
sion, compression, or compression in the upper portion of the flange and
tension in the lower portion.
Cover plate: The force in the cover plate can be tension, or compression in
the upper portion of the cover plate and tension in the lower portion.
In Equation 11 the values used for Tpiece, Cpiece and xPNA-piece depend on the lo-
cation of the PNA. The appropriate values for these items are given in Tables

2 through 11. Table 1 serves as a guide to which of those tables to use based
on the location of the PNA.
Note, because the metal deck and concrete slab can be in different locations
relative to the PNA on the two sides of the beam, you may need to use values
from two different tables listed in Table 1.
Table 1:
Table to determine which table to use in conjunction with Equation 11 to determine
the plastic moment capacity of composite section for positive bending.
Location of PNA Table
Above rebar in concrete above metal deck 2
In concrete within metal deck 3
In beam top flange 4
In beam top fillet 5
In beam web 6
In beam bottom fillet 7
In beam bottom flange 8
In cover plate 9
Table 2:
When the PNA is above the centroid of the rebar in the concrete above the metal deck,
use the equations specified in this table together with Equation 11 to determine the
plastic moment capacity of composite section for positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA

Concrete above metal deck (left) N. A. N. A. 12a 21a
Concrete above metal deck (right) N. A. N. A. 12a 21a
Concrete in metal deck (left) N. A. N. A. 0 N. A.
Concrete in metal deck (right) N. A. N. A. 0 N. A.
Beam top flange 15a 23a 0 N. A.
Beam top fillet 16a 24a 0 N. A.
Beam web 17a 25a 0 N. A.
Beam bottom fillet 18a 26a 0 N. A.
Beam bottom flange 19a 27a 0 N. A.
Cover plate 20a 28a 0 N. A.

Table 3:
When the PNA is in the concrete within the metal deck, use the equations specified in
this table together with Equation 11 to determine the plastic moment capacity of com-
posite section for positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Concrete above metal deck (left) N. A. N. A. 12b 21b
Concrete above metal deck (right) N. A. N. A. 12b 21b
Concrete in metal deck (left) N. A. N. A. 14a 22a
Concrete in metal deck (right) N. A. N. A. 14a 22a
Beam top flange 15a 23a 0 N. A.
Table 4:
When the PNA is in the beam top flange, use the equations specified in this table to-
gether with Equation 11 to determine the plastic moment capacity of composite section
for positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Concrete in metal deck (left) N. A. N. A. 14b 22b
Beam top flange 15b 23b 15c 23c

Table 5:
When the PNA is in the beam top fillet, use the equations specified in this table together
with Equation 11 to determine the plastic moment capacity of composite section for
positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Concrete in metal deck (right) N. A. N. A. 14b 22b
Beam top flange 0 N. A. 15d 23d
Beam top fillet 16b 24b 16c 24c
Table 6:
When the PNA is in the beam web, use the equations specified in this table together
positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Beam top fillet 0 N. A. 16d 24d
Beam web 17b 25b 17c 25c

Table 7:
When the PNA is in the beam bottom fillet, use the equations specified in this table to-
gether with Equation 11 to determine the plastic moment capacity of composite section
for positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Beam web 0 N. A. 17d 25d
Beam bottom fillet 18b 27b 18c 26c
Table 8:
When the PNA is in the beam bottom flange, use the equations specified in this table
together with Equation 11 to determine the plastic moment capacity of composite sec-
tion for positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA
Beam bottom fillet 0 N. A. 18d 26d
Beam bottom flange 19b 27b 19c 27c

Table 9:
When the PNA is in the cover plate, use the equations specified in this table together
positive bending.
Piece T xPNA C xPNA

Beam bottom fillet 0 N. A. 18d 26d
Beam bottom flange 0 N. A. 19d 27d
Cover plate 20b 28b 20c 28c
Equations 12a and 12b are used for the compression force in the concrete
above the metal deck. Note that these equations are applied to each side of
the beam separately.
CC1 = 0.85 f'c beff zp Eqn. 12a
CC1 = 0.85 f'c beff tc Eqn. 12b
Note that for partial composite connection Equation 12b is replaced with
Equation 3 of Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 37 Partial
Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution.
Equations 13a and 13b are used for the tension and compression forces in the
rebar in the concrete slab above the metal deck. Note that these equations
are applied to each side of the beam separately.
TR = ArFyr Eqn. 13a
CR = ArFyr Eqn. 13b

Equations 14a and 14b are used for the compression force in the concrete
within the metal deck. Note that these equations are applied to each side of
the beam separately. Also note that these equations only apply if the span of
the metal deck ribs is oriented parallel to the beam span. If the metal deck
ribs are oriented perpendicular to the beam span, there is no compression
force allowed on the concrete within the metal deck ribs.
w r (z p − t c )
C C2 = 0.85f c' b eff Eqn. 14a
Sr
wrhr
C C2 = 0.85f c' b eff Eqn. 14b
Sr
Equation 4 in Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 37 Partial
Equations 15a through 15d are used for the tension and compression forces
in the beam top flange.
TFT = bf-top tf-top Fyf-top Eqn. 15a
TFT = bf-top (tf-top - y2) Fyf-top Eqn. 15b
CFT = bf-top y2 Fyf-top Eqn. 15c
CFT = bf-top tf-top Fyf-top Eqn. 15d
in the beam top fillet. Note that these equations do not apply to user-defined
sections.
TKT = kwidth kdepth Fyw Eqn. 16a
TKT = kwidth (kdepth - y3) Fyw Eqn. 16b
CKT = kwidth y3 Fyw Eqn. 16c
CKT = kwidth kdepth Fyw Eqn. 16d

in the beam web.
TWeb = tw h Fyw Eqn. 17a
TWeb = tw (h - y4) Fyw Eqn. 17b
CWeb = tw y4 Fyw Eqn. 17c
CWeb = tw h Fyw Eqn. 17d
in the beam bottom fillet. Note that these equations do not apply to user-
defined sections.
TKB = kwidth kdepth Fyw Eqn. 18a
TKB = kwidth (kdepth - y5) Fyw Eqn. 18b
CKB = kwidth y5 Fyw Eqn. 18c
CKB = kwidth kdepth Fyw Eqn. 18d
in the beam bottom flange.
TFB = bf-bot tf-bot Fyf-bot Eqn. 19a
TFB = bf-bot (tf-bot - y6) Fyf-bot Eqn. 19b
CFB = bf-bot y6 Fyf-bot Eqn. 19c
CFB = bf-bot tf-bot Fyf-bot Eqn. 19d
Equations 20a through 20c are used for the tension and compression forces in
the cover plate.
TCP = bcp tcp Fycp Eqn. 20a
TCP = bcp (tcp - y7) Fycp Eqn. 20b
CCP = bcp y7 Fycp Eqn. 20c

Equations 21a and 21b are used for the distance from the center of the force
in the concrete above the metal deck to the PNA. Note that these equations
are applied to each side of the beam separately.
zp
xPNA = Eqn. 21a
2
tc
xPNA = z p − Eqn. 21b
2
Equations 22a and 22b are used for the distance from the center of the force
in the concrete within the metal deck ribs to the PNA. Note that these equa-
tions are applied to each side of the beam separately.
zp − t c
xPNA = Eqn. 22a
2
hr
xPNA = z p − t c − Eqn. 22b
2
Note that for partial composite connection, Equation 22b is replaced with
Equations 23a through 23d are used for the distance from the center of the
force(s) in the beam top flange to the PNA.
t f -top
xPNA = y p − d + Eqn. 23a
2
t f -top - y 2
xPNA = Eqn. 23b
2
y2
xPNA = Eqn. 23c
2

t f − top
xPNA = z p − t c − h r − rd − Eqn. 23d
2
Note the terms zp, tc, hr and rd in Equation 23d must all be for the left side of
the beam or all for the right side of the beam. It does not matter which side
of the beam is used, but all of the terms must be consistent.
force(s) in the beam top fillet to the PNA.
k depth
xPNA = y p − d + t f − top + Eqn. 24a
2
k depth - y 3
xPNA = Eqn. 24b
2
y3
xPNA = Eqn. 24c
2
k depth
xPNA = z p − t c − h r − rd − t f − top − Eqn. 24d
2
force(s) in the beam web to the PNA.
h
xPNA = y p − d + t f − top + k depth + Eqn. 25a
2
h - y4
xPNA = Eqn. 25b
2
y4
xPNA = Eqn. 25c
2
h
xPNA = z p − t c − h r − rd − t f − top − k depth − Eqn. 25d
2

force(s) in the beam bottom fillet to the PNA.
3k depth
xPNA = y p − d + t f − top + +h Eqn. 26a
2
k depth - y 5
xPNA = Eqn. 26b
2
y5
xPNA = Eqn. 26c
2
3k depth
xPNA = z p − t c − h r − rd − t f − top − −h Eqn. 26d
2
force(s) in the beam bottom flange to the PNA.
t f -bot
xPNA = y p − d + t f − top + 2k depth + h + Eqn. 27a
2
t f -bot - y 6
xPNA = Eqn. 27b
2
y6
xPNA = Eqn. 27c
2
x PNA = z p − t c − h r − rd − t f − top −
t f -bot Eqn. 27d
2k depth − h -
2

Equations 28a through 28c are used for the distance from the center of the
force(s) in the cover plate to the PNA.
x PNA = y p − d + t f − top + 2k depth +

t cp Eqn. 28a
h + t f -bot +
2
t cp - y 7
xPNA = Eqn. 28b
2
y7
xPNA = Eqn. 28c
2

Technical Note 35
Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates the moment capac-
ity of a composite section when an elastic stress distribution is assumed.
Positive Moment Capacity with an Elastic Stress

Distribution
To calculate the positive moment capacity with an elastic stress distribution,
the program first calculates the location of the elastic neutral axis (ENA) and
the transformed section moment of inertia. Information on how the program
calculates the location of the ENA and the transformed section moment of in-
ertia for full composite connection is provided in Composite Beam Design
AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia. In-
formation on how the program calculates the location of the ENA and the
transformed section moment of inertia for partial composite connection is
provided in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic
Stresses with Partial Composite Connection.
The positive moment capacity for a composite beam with an elastic stress
distribution is determined by considering five locations in the composite sec-
tion. These locations are:
The top of the concrete on the left side of the beam.
The top of the concrete on the right side of the beam.
The top of the top flange of the beam.
The bottom of the bottom flange of the beam.
The bottom of the cover plate.
A moment capacity is calculated based on the allowable stress and the section
modulus at each of these five locations that is applicable to the beam consid-
ered. The smallest moment capacity calculated is the positive moment capac-
Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity Technical Note 35 - 1

Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
ity for the beam. Figure 1 illustrates the allowable stress assumed for each of
these locations.
Compression 0.85f’ Es
c E
c
tc
Fyr
hr
Fyf-top
Elastic neutral axis (ENA)
d
yeff
Fyf-bot
tcp Fycp
Tension
Allowable Elastic
Composite Beam Stress at Key Points
Note: For a fully composite beam yeff = y.
Figure 1: Allowable Stresses for Positive Bending at Various Key Locations of

the Composite Beam Section
Equations 1a through 1e are used to calculate the positive moment capacity

at the seven key locations in the beam section. Table 1 lists the location to
which each equation applies. Note that in these equations, if there is full
composite connection, the term y is substituted for the term yeff.
Table 1:
Table to determine which of Equations 1a through 1e apply to a particular location in
a composite beam
Location in Beam Equation
Top of concrete on left side of beam 1a
Top of concrete on right side of beam 1b
Top of beam top flange 1c
Bottom of beam bottom flange 1e
Bottom of cover plate 1f
Technical Note 35 - 2 Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity
 Es 
φ bcpe M n = φ bcpe  0.85f c' -left *
 E c-left 
Eqn. 1a
 I eff 
 
 d + h r-left + t c-left - y eff 
 Es 
φ bcpe M n = φ bcpe  0.85f c' -right *
 E c-left 
Eqn. 1b
 I eff 
 
 d + h r -right + t c-right - y eff 
 
In Equation 1c, the term "ABS" means to take the absolute value of the
amount in the associated brackets.
I eff
φ bcpe M n = φ bcpe Fyf -top Eqn. 1c
ABS [d - y eff ]
Ieff
φbcpeMn = φbcpeFyf - bot Eqn. 1d
y eff
Ieff
φbcpeMn = φbcpeFycp Eqn. 1e
y eff + t cp
The positive moment capacity of a composite beam with an elastic stress dis-
tribution is the smallest of the moment capacities obtained from the equations
included in Equations 1a through 1e that are applicable to the beam consid-
ered. If the denominator of Equation 1c is zero, the program does not need to
consider the moment capacity associated with that equation.
Note that the term φbcpe in these equations is the resistance factor for positive
bending in a composite beam when Mn is determined from an elastic stress
distribution.
Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity Technical Note 35 - 3

Technical Note 36
Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates the moment capac-
ity of a noncomposite steel beam, including a cover plate, if applicable.
Overview
The program only calculates the moment capacity, Mn, if the beam is compact
or noncompact. It does not calculate Mn if the section is slender.
The plastic moment, Mp, for a noncomposite rolled steel beam section without
a cover plate is calculated as Mp = ZFy.
The exact methodology used to compute the plastic moment capacity in the
other cases depends on whether the beam, including the cover plate if it ex-
ists, is doubly or singly symmetric, and whether the beam web is classified as
compact or noncompact.
Figure 1 shows a flowchart that directs you to the appropriate section in this
chapter for calculating the moment capacity of the steel section alone. The
figure has boxes labeled a through g; start in the box labeled a. Note that the
criteria used by the program to determine if a section is compact or noncom-
pact for the AISC-LRFD93 specification is described in Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 33 Compact and Noncompact Require-
ments.
Steel Beam Properties

If properties for the steel section alone are available directly from the pro-
gram's section database, then those properties are used to compute the mo-
ment capacity. For other cases such as a user-defined section or a section
with a cover plate, the section properties are calculated in a manner similar to
that described in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 20
Transformed Section Moment of Inertia, except that there is no concrete or
reinforcing steel to consider.
Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone Technical Note 36 - 1

Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
Is section doubly No No No
Is the beam web Is the beam web Beam section is
symmetric or a classified as
compact? noncompact?
channel? slender and is not
Yes a Yes b Yes c designed. Go to
next trial section.
Refer to Refer to Refer to d

“Moment “Moment “Moment
Capacity for a Capacity for a Capacity for a
Doubly Symmetric Singly Symmetric Singly Symmetric
Beam or a Beam with a Beam with a
Channel Section” Compact Web” Noncompact
in this in this Web” in this
Technical Note. Technical Note. Technical Note.
e f g
Figure 1: Flowchart For Determining Which Section of this Chapter Applies in

Calculating Plastic Moment for Steel Section Alone
After the moment of inertia has been calculated, the section moduli and ra-
dius of gyration are calculated using standard formulas. This process is re-
peated to get properties about both axes. The torsional constant is deter-
mined by summing the torsional constants for the various components of the
section. For example, it may be determined by summing the J's of a rolled
section and the cover plate, if applicable, or in a user-defined section, by
summing the J's for the top flange, web, bottom flange and cover plate, if ap-
plicable.
Moment Capacity for a Doubly Symmetric Beam or a

Channel Section
Figure 2 shows a flowchart that determines the equations the program uses
to calculate Mn for a doubly symmetric steel section alone or a channel section
alone. The figure has boxes labeled a through k; start in the box labeled a.
Information relating to how the program calculates the compact and noncom-
pact section requirements is in Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Techni-
cal Note 33 Compact and Noncompact Requirements.
The following subsection discusses the unbraced length checks in the program
that are used to determine how to calculate Mn for a doubly symmetric beam
Technical Note 36 - 2 Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone
Are the web,

compression No Is the web No Beam section not
flange and noncompact? designed. Go to
compression next trial section.
cover plate Yes g
compact? k
a No
Yes Is Lb ≤ Lr?
No
Is Lb ≤ Lp? Is Lb ≤ Lr? Yes h
Yes b Are the

No Yes d compression
flange and No
Determine Mn
based on yielding compression
criteria in AISC- cover plate
LRFD93 Section compact?
F1.1.
Yes i
c
Determine Mn
based on smallest
of yielding criteria
Beam section not Determine Mn in AISC-LRFD93
designed. Go to based on smallest Section F1.1,
next trial section. of yielding criteria lateral torsional
in AISC-LRFD93 buckling criteria
e Section F1.1 and in AISC-LRFD93
lateral torsional Section F1.2a and
buckling criteria flange and web
in AISC-LRFD93 local buckling
Section F1.2a. criteria in AISC-
LRFD93 Appendix
f F1(b) equation (A-
F1-3).
Figure 2: Flowchart For Calculating Mn for a Doubly Symmetric Steel

Section Alone or a Rolled Channel Steel Section Alone
or a channel section. Subsequent subsections discuss each of the code sec-

tions mentioned in Figure 2 that are used to calculate the moment capacity.
Lateral Unbraced Length Checks

The unbraced lengths listed in Figure 2 are Lb, Lp and Lr. Definitions of each of
these items are listed below.

Lb = Laterally unbraced length of beam; length between points

which are braced against lateral displacement of the com-
pression flange, in.
Lp = Limiting laterally unbraced length of beam for full plastic

bending capacity, in.
Lr = Limiting laterally unbraced length of beam for inelastic lat-

eral-torsional buckling, in.
The unbraced length of a beam, or a beam segment, Lb is determined from

the input data. The limiting unbraced length for full plastic capacity, Lp, is
determined from Equation 1 which is also Equation F1-4 in AISC-LRFD93.
300ry
Lp = Eqn. 1
Fyf
In Equation 1, ry is taken for the steel beam section including the cover plate,
if applicable. The Fyf term in Equation 1 is for the compression flange.
The limiting unbraced length for lateral torsional buckling, Lr, is determined
from Equation 2 which is also Equations F1-6 through F1-8 in AISC-LRFD93.
ry X1
Lr = 1 + 1 + X 2 FL2 , where
FL
2
π EGJA C S 
X1 = and X 2 = 4 w  x  Eqn. 2
Sx 2 I y  GJ 
FL = smaller of (Fyf − Fr ) and Fyw
In Equation 2, Fr, the compressive residual stress in the flange is taken as 10

ksi for rolled shapes and 16.5 ksi for user-defined shapes. The warping con-
stant, Cw, is based on the steel beam alone ignoring the cover plate if it ex-
ists. For rolled sections, including channels, the program takes Cw from its
built-in database. For user-defined sections Cw is calculated using Equation 3.
Note that Equation 3 actually applies to symmetrical sections but it is also
used when the flanges have different dimensions.

2
 t f − top t f − bot 
I y  d − − 
 2 2 
Cw = Eqn. 3
4
Yielding Criteria in AISC-LRFD93 Section F1.1

The yielding criteria is that Mn = Mp. The process for determining Mp has been
previously described in the section entitled "Overview" in this technical note.
Lateral Torsional Buckling Criteria in AISC-LRFD93 Section F1.2a

The lateral torsional buckling criteria in AISC LRFD F1.2a is based on AISC-
LRFD93 Equation F1-2. In this case Mn is given by Equation 4.
  − L p 
(
M n = C b M p − M p − M r )  LL b
 ≤ M p
− L p 
Eqn. 4
  r
In Equation 4, Cb is calculated using Equation 5, which is also AISC-LRFD93

Equation F1-3.
12.5M max
Cb = Eqn. 5
2.5M max + 3M A + 4M B + 3M C
Refer to the notation in Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note

29 General and Notation for an explanation of the terms in Equation 5.
In Equation 4, Lr is calculated using Equation 2, Lp is calculated from Equation

1 and Mr comes from Equation 6.
M r = FL S x Eqn. 6
where FL is as described for Equation 2.
AISC-LRFD Appendix F1(b) Equation A-F1-3

The limit state for flange and web local buckling is based on AISC-LRFD93
Equation A-F1-3, which is shown herein as Equation 7.
 λ − λp 
(
Mn = Mp − Mp − Mr 
 λr − λ p
) 

Eqn. 7
 
Equation 7 applies to both flange local buckling and web local buckling.

Flange Local Buckling

For flange local buckling using Equation 7:
Mr is calculated per Equation 6.
λ is equal to bf /(2tf) for I-sections and bf/tf for channels. The bf and tf
terms are for the compression flange.
λp is given by Equation 8a if the section is a rolled or user-defined I-

section, or Equation 8b if the section is a rolled channel. The Fyf in these
equations is for the compression flange.
bf 65
≤ Eqn. 8a
2t f Fyf
bf 65
≤ Eqn. 8b
tf Fyf
λr is given by Equation 9a if the section is a rolled beam or channel, or

Equation 9b if it is a user-defined section.
141
λr = , for rolled shapes Eqn. 9a
FL
162
λr = , for user-defined shapes Eqn. 9b
FL
kc
In Equation 9a and 9b, FL is as defined for Equation 2. In Equation 9b,

kc = 4 h t w but not less than 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763. Equations 9a and 9b are
taken from AISC-LRFD93 Table A-F1.1.
Web Local Buckling

For web local buckling using Equation 7:
Mr is calculated using Equations 10 and 11 for both the top and bottom
flanges separately. The smaller value of Mr is used.
Mr = ReFyfSx Eqn. 10

In Equation 10, Re is equal to 1.0 for rolled shapes and is given by Equation
11 for user-defined shapes. Equation 10 is taken from AISC-LRFD93 Table A-
F1.1.
Re =
(
12 + a r 3m − m 3 )
≤ 1.0 Eqn. 11
12 + 2a r
Equation 11 comes from the definition of Re given with Equation A-G2-3 in

AISC-LRFD93 Appendix G. In Equation 11 the term ar is the ratio of the web
area (htw) to the flange area (bftf), but not more than 10, and m is the ratio
of the web yield stress to the flange yield stress.
λ is equal to h/tw.
λp is given by Equation 5a, or 5b in Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93

Technical Note 33 Compact and Noncompact Requirements depending on
the axial load in the member, if any. See the description accompanying
these equations for more information.
λr is given by one of Equations 6 and 7 in Composite Beam Design AISC-

LRFD93 Technical Note 33 Compact and Noncompact Requirements de-
pending on the type of member and the amount of axial compression, if
any. See the description accompanying these equations for more informa-
tion.
Moment Capacity for a Singly Symmetric Beam with a

Compact Web
to calculate Mn for a singly symmetric steel section alone with a compact web.
The figure has boxes labeled a through n; start in the box labeled a.
Most of the formulas associated with this flowchart are based on AISC-
LRFD93 Specification Appendix F section F1and Table A-F1.1.

No This is the wrong Note: WLB = Web local buckling

Is web compact? flowchart. See FLB = Flange local buckling
Figure 1. LTB = Lateral torsional buckling
Yes a
e
Are the No Are the No
compression compression
flange and flange and
cover plate cover plate
compact? noncompact?
Beam section not Beam section not
Yes b designed. Go to Yes f designed. Go to
next trial section. next trial section.
g l
No No
No Is beam No Is beam
Is beam compact Is beam compact
noncompact for noncompact for
for LTB? for LTB?
LTB? LTB?
Yes c Yes h Yes j Yes m
Determine Mn Determine Mn Determine Mn Determine Mn

based on smallest based on smallest based on smallest based on smallest
of the following of the following of the following of the following
AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93
Appendix F Appendix F Appendix F Appendix F
equations: equations: equations: equations:
A-F1-1 for WLB A-F1-1 for WLB A-F1-1 for WLB A-F1-1 for WLB
A-F1-1 for FLB A-F1-1 for FLB A-F1-3 for FLB A-F1-3 for FLB
A-F1-1 for LTB. A-F1-2 for LTB. A-F1-1 for LTB. A-F1-2 for LTB.
d i k n
Figure 3: Flowchart For Calculating Mn for a Singly Symmetric Steel Section

Alone with a Compact Web
The following subsection describes the lateral torsional buckling (LTB) checks
in the program that are used to determine how to calculate Mn for a singly
symmetric beam with a compact web. Subsequent subsections describe each
of the AISC-LRFD93 Specification Appendix F equations mentioned in Figure 3
that are used to calculate the moment capacity.
AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-1 for WLB

For this case Mn is equal to Mp, the plastic moment capacity of the section.
AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-1 for FLB


AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-3 for FLB

AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-3 for flange local buckling is interpreted by the
program as shown in Equations 12a through 12f.
 λ − λp 
Mn = Mp − Mp − Mr  (
 λr − λ p
)  ≤ Mp

Eqn. 12a
 
where
M r = FL S x Eqn. 12b
bf
λ= Eqn. 12c
2t f
65
λp = Eqn. 12d
Fyf
141
λr = , rolled beams and channels Eqn. 12e
FL
162
λr = , user-defined beams Eqn. 12f
FL
kc
In Equation 12b, FL and Sx are for the beam compression flange (not cover
plate).
In Equations 12c and 12d, bf, tf and Fyf are for the beam compression flange
(not cover plate).
In Equation 12e, FL is for the beam compression flange (not cover plate).
In Equation 12f, FL is for the beam compression flange (not cover plate), and
kc = 4 h t w but not less than 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763.
AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-1 for LTB


AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-2 for LTB

AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-2 for lateral torsional buckling is interpreted by
the program as shown in Equations 13a through 13d and Equations 14a
through 14c.
  
(
M n = C b M p − M p − M r )  λλ −−λλ p
 ≤ M p

Eqn. 13a
  r p 
where,
M r = FL S xc ≤ Fyf S xt Eqn. 13b
Lb
λ= Eqn. 13c
ryc
300
λp = Eqn. 13d
Fyf
The term λr in Equation 13a is the value of λ for which Mcr as defined by
Equations 14a through 14c is equal to the smaller of FLSxc and FyfSxt where FL
is the smaller of (Fyf - Fr) and Fyw. When calculating FL, the term Fyf is the
yield stress of the compression flange and when calculating FyfSxt, the term Fyf
is the yield stress of the tension flange.
M cr =
(57000)(1) I y J B1 + 1 + B 2 + B12  Eqn. 14a
Lb  
where,
  I yc   h Iy
B1 = 2.25 2   − 1 Eqn. 14b
  I y   L b J
2
 I yc   I yc   h 
B 2 = 25 1 −  

 Eqn. 14c
 I 
y   J   Lb
 

To calculate λr for Equation 13a, the program determines the value of Lb for
which Mcr is equal to the smaller of FLSxc and FyfSxt. Then it divides that value
of Lb by ryc to get λr.
Moment Capacity for a Singly Symmetric Beam with a

Noncompact Web
to calculate Mn for a singly symmetric steel section alone with a noncompact
web. The figure has boxes labeled a through n; start in the box labeled a.
Most of the formulas associated with this flowchart are based on AISC-
LRFD93 Specification Appendix F section F1and Table A-F1.1.
Is web No This is the wrong Note: WLB = Web local buckling

noncompact? flowchart. See FLB = Flange local buckling
Figure 1. LTB = Lateral torsional buckling
Yes a
e
Are the No Are the No
flange and flange and
cover plate cover plate
compact? Beam section not noncompact? Beam section not
Yes b designed. Go to f designed. Go to
Yes
next trial section. next trial section.
g l
No No
No Is beam No Is beam
Is beam compact Is beam compact
noncompact for noncompact for
for LTB? for LTB?
LTB? LTB?
Yes c Yes h Yes j Yes m
Determine Mn Determine Mn Determine Mn Determine Mn

based on smallest based on smallest based on smallest based on smallest
of the following of the following of the following of the following
AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93 AISC-LRFD93
Appendix F Appendix F Appendix F Appendix F
equations: equations: equations: equations:
A-F1-3 for WLB A-F1-3 for WLB A-F1-3 for WLB A-F1-3 for WLB
A-F1-1 for FLB A-F1-1 for FLB A-F1-3 for FLB A-F1-3 for FLB
A-F1-1 for LTB. A-F1-2 for LTB. A-F1-1 for LTB. A-F1-2 for LTB.
d i k n
Figure 4: Flowchart for Calculating Mn for a Singly Symmetric Steel

Section Alone with a Noncompact Web

The lateral torsional buckling checks and all but one of the Appendix F equa-
tions mentioned in Figure 4 are described in the previous section entitled,
"Moment Capacity for a Singly Symmetric Beam with a Compact Web." Refer
to that section for more information.
The one equation that has not been described previously is AISC-LRFD93
Specification Appendix F Equation A-F1-3. This equation is described in the
following subsection.
AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-3 for WLB

AISC-LRFD93 Equation A-F1-3 for web local buckling is interpreted by the
program as shown in Equations 15a through 15g.
 λ − λp 
(
Mn = Mp − Mp − Mr  )
 λr − λ p
 ≤ Mp

Eqn. 15a
 
In Equation 15a:
Mr is calculated using Equations 15b and 15c for both the top and bottom
flanges separately. The smaller value of Mr is used.
Mr = ReFyfSx Eqn. 15b
In Equation 15b, Re is given by Equation 15c. Equation 15b is taken from

AISC-LRFD93 Table A-F1.1.
Re =
(
12 + a r 3m − m 3 )
≤ 1.0 Eqn. 15c
12 + 2a r
Equation 15c comes from the definition of Re given with Equation A-G2-3 in
AISC-LRFD93 Appendix G. In Equation 15c, the term ar is the ratio of the web
area (htw) to the flange area (bftf), but not more than 10, and m is the ratio
of the web yield stress to the flange yield stress.
λ is equal to h/tw.

λp is given by Equation 15d, or 15e depending on the axial load in the

member, if any.
640  2.75Pu 
, for Pu ≤ 0.125
λp = 1− Eqn. 15d
Fy  φ b Py 
 φ b Py
191  P  253
≥
λp = 2.33 − u ,
Fy  φ b Py  Fy
 Eqn. 15e
P
for u > 0.125
φ b Py
λr is given by either Equation 15f or Equation 15g.
Equation 15f defines λr for beams with equal sized flanges.
970  0.74Pu 

λr = 1− Eqn. 15f
Fy  φ b Py 

In Equation 15f, the value of Fy used is the largest of the Fy values for the
beam flanges and the web.
Equation 15g defines the noncompact section limit for webs in beams with
unequal size flanges:
253   h  0.74Pu 
λr = 1 + 2.83  1 −  ,
Fy   φ b Py 
 hc  
where, Eqn. 15g
3 h 3
≤ ≤
4 hc 2
In Equation 15g, the value of Fy used is the largest of the Fy values for the
beam flanges and the web. Equation 15g is based on Equation A-B5-1 in the
AISC-LRFD93 specification.

Technical Note 37
Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic
Stress Distribution
Partial composite connection for an elastic stress distribution is described in

Partial Composite Connection and Composite Beam Design AISC-LFRD93
Technical Note 35 Composite Section Elastic Moment Capacity. This Technical
Note describes partial composite connection for a plastic stress distribution. In
particular, it describes how the positive moment capacity of the composite
beam using a plastic stress distribution is calculated for partial composite
connection.
Estimating the Required Percent Composite Connection

The program uses Equation 1 to estimate the required percent composite
connection (PCC) for a composite beam.
2
 M u − φM n steel beam 
PCC =   * X% Eqn. 1
 φM n X % comp − φM n steel beam 
 
where,
PCC = Required percent composite connection, unitless.
Mu = Required flexural strength, that is, the applied factored

moment, kip-in.
Mn X% comp = Nominal flexural strength (capacity) of composite section

with X% composite connection, kip-in.
Mn steel beam = Nominal flexural strength (capacity) of the steel beam

section alone as determined from Composite Beam Design
AISC-LRFD93 Technical Note 36 Moment Capacity for
Steel Section Alone, kip-in.
Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution Technical Note 37 - 1

Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
X% = Percent composite connection that Mn X% comp is based

on, unitless. For 50% composite connection use X% =
0.50.
φ = Resistance factor that was used when calculating Mn for

full composite connection, unitless. It is either φbcpe or
φbcpp.
Equation 1 is based on Example 3 in Vogel (1991). Equation 1 might be con-

sidered the LRFD equivalent to Equation 2 in Composite Beam Design AISC-
ASD89 Technical Note 21 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite Connection,
with some rearrangement of terms.
The program initially uses Equation 1 with Mn X% comp equal to the Mn for full
(100%) composite connection to estimate the required percent composite
connection (PCC) for a composite beam. The program checks the moment ca-
pacity using this PCC. If the moment capacity is adequate, the iteration is
complete. If the moment capacity is not adequate, the program calculates a
new PCC, using the last considered PCC for X% and Mn X% comp, and deter-
mines a new moment capacity. This process continues until a PCC that pro-
vides an adequate moment capacity is found.
Calculating MPFconc
The program calculates MPFconc as the smaller of the values obtained from the
equations specified in Table 1 for the particular circumstances of the beam
considered.
Table 1:
Table identifying equations to be used to calculate initial value of ΣQn for partial com-
posite connection
Deck Orientation
Deck Ribs Perpendicular
to Beam Span, or
Beam Type Deck Ribs Parallel No Metal Deck Exists
to Beam Span (Solid Concrete Slab)
Rolled Beam from Database 2b, 2c 2a, 2c
User-Defined Beam 2b, 2d 2a, 2d
Technical Note 37 - 2 Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Partial Composite Connection with a Plastic Stress Distribution
MPFconc = (PCC) [(0.85f'c beff tc)left + (0.85f'c beff tc)right] Eqn. 2a
 wrhr 
MPFconc = (PCC) [(0.85f'c beff  t c +  left +
 Sr
 
 wrhr 
(0.85f'c beff  t c +  right ] Eqn. 2b
 Sr
 
MPFconc = (PCC) (AsFy + bcp tcp Fycp) Eqn. 2c
MPFconc = (PCC) (bf-toptf-topFyf-top +
twh + bf-bottf-botFyf-bot + bcp tcp Fycp) Eqn. 2d
In Equations 1a through 1d, the term PCC is the percent composite connec-
tion. For 50 percent composite connection PCC is 0.5, not 50. The next sub-
section describes how the program initially estimates PCC.
Location of the PNA

The location of the PNA for partial composite connection with a plastic stress
distribution is calculated using the method described in Composite Beam De-
sign AISC-LFRD93 Technical Note 34 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for
Positive Bending for full composite connection except that the value used for
MPFconc is that obtained from one of Equations 2a through 2d, as appropriate,
instead of that obtained from Equation 3a or 3b of Composite Beam Design
AISC-LFRD93 Technical Note 34 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Posi-
tive Bending, as appropriate.

Determining the Effective Portion of the Concrete Slab

When different composite decks and or spans are specified on each side of
the beam, the effective portion of the slab is determined as follows: The pro-
gram first puts the following six items in order, from highest elevation to low-
est, to determine how much of the concrete slab is effective for partial com-
posite connection:
Top of concrete slab on the left side of the beam.
Top of concrete slab on the right side of the beam.
Top of metal on the left side of the beam.
Top of metal on the right side of the beam.
Bottom of metal on the left side of the beam.
Bottom of metal on the right side of the beam.
Next the program sums the compressive forces of these six items, starting
with the item at the highest elevation and proceeding downward. As each
item is added into the sum, the sum of compressive forces is compared with
the MPFconc as determined in one of Equations 2a through 2d.
As soon as the sum of forces exceeds MPFconc, the program recognizes that
the last location considered is below the bottom of the effective concrete, and
the second to last location considered is above the bottom of the effective
concrete. Using this information, the program can solve directly for the loca-
tion of the bottom of the effective concrete.
Figure 1a shows the internal concrete forces for a rolled steel section (a user-
defined steel section is similar) for the condition where the bottom of the ef-
fective concrete is in the concrete slab above the metal deck. In this case, a1
represents the distance from the top of the concrete slab to the bottom of the
effective concrete. Note that the distance a1 can be different on the left and

a1
CC 1
Bottom of effective concrete
Figure 1a: Rolled Steel Section With Bottom of Effective Concrete in Concrete
Slab Above Metal Deck, Positive Bending With Partial Composite
Connection
Figure 1b shows the internal concrete forces for a rolled steel section (a user-
defined steel section is similar) for the condition where the bottom of the ef-
fective concrete is within the height, hr, of the metal deck ribs. In this case, a2
represents the distance from the top of the metal deck ribs to the bottom of
the effective concrete. Note that the distance a2 can be different on the left
and right sides of the beam.
CC 1
CC 2
a2
Bottom of effective concrete
Figure 1b: Rolled Steel Section With Bottom of Effective Concrete Within the
Height, hr, of the Metal Deck Ribs, Positive Bending With Partial
Composite Connection

The program obtains the distances a1 and/or a2 using an iterative solution

technique.
If the bottom of effective concrete is in the concrete above the metal deck, a2
is set equal to 0. If the bottom of effective concrete is within the height of the
metal deck, a1 is set equal to tc.
Moment Capacity of a Partially Composite Beam with a

Plastic Stress Distribution
The moment capacity for partial composite connection with a plastic stress
distribution is calculated using the method described for full composite con-
nection in the section entitled "Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending"
in Composite Beam Design AISC-LFRD93 Technical Note 34 Composite Plastic
Moment Capacity for Positive Bending with the following changes:
Equation 12b in Composite Beam Design AISC-LFRD93 Technical Note 34

Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for Positive Bending is replaced with
Equation 3.
CC1 = 0.85f'c beff a1 Eqn. 3

Equation 4.
wra 2
C C2 = 0.85f c' b eff Eqn. 4
Sr

Equation 5.
a1
xPNA = z p − Eqn. 5
2

Equation 6.

a2
xPNA = z p − a 1 − Eqn. 6
2
When calculating the moment capacity, concrete or reinforcing steel below

the bottom of the effective concrete is not considered in the calculation.
Note that the PNA for a partially composite beam always lies within the steel
beam section, not the concrete slab. Thus it is not necessary to check for the
PNA location within the concrete slab.
Reference
Vogel, R. 1991. “LRFD-Composite Beam Design with Metal Deck,” Steel Tips,
Technical Information & Product Service, Steel Committee of Califor-
nia, March.

Technical Note 38
Bending and Deflection Checks
This Technical Note describes how the program checks bending and deflection
for AISC-LRFD93 design.
Bending Check Locations

For each design load combination the program checks bending at the follow-
ing locations:
Point of maximum moment for the design load combination considered.
Point load locations for the design load combination considered.
Bending Check
The program uses Equation 1 to perform bending checks for both composite
and noncomposite beams.
Mu
≤ 1 .0 Eqn. 1
φ Mn
where,
Mu = The maximum required flexural strength, that is, the maximum

applied factored moment, kip-in.
Mn = Moment capacity for full composite connection or partial com-

posite connection, as applicable, kip-in.
φ = Resistance factor for bending, unitless. For positive bending in a

composite beam with an assumed plastic stress distribution,
φbcpp is used. For negative bending in a composite beam with an
assumed plastic stress distribution, φbcnp is used. For positive
bending in a composite beam with an assumed elastic stress
distribution, φbcpe is used. For negative bending in a composite
Bending and Deflection Checks Technical Note 38 - 1

Bending and Deflection Checks Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
beam with an assumed elastic stress distribution, φbcne is used.

If the beam is specified to be noncomposite, φb is used.
Deflection Check
Deflection is calculated as described in Composite Beam Design Technical
Note 11 Beam Deflection and Camber. For full composite connection Itr is
used in the deflection calculations. For partial composite connection Ieff is
used in the deflection calculations.
Note that camber is subtracted from the total load deflection for checking.
Technical Note 38 - 2 Bending and Deflection Checks

Technical Note 39
Shear Connectors
This Technical Note begins by defining the program's default allowable shear
connector loads for AISC-LRFD93 composite beam design. Shear connector
capacities are defined for both shear studs. Next the equations used for de-
termining the number of shear connectors on the beam are provided.
Shear Stud Connectors

The capacity for a single shear stud is calculated using Equation 1.
Qn = 0.5Asc f c' E c ≤ AscFu Eqn. 1
Equation 1 is based on AISC-LRFD93 specifications Equation I5-1.
If there is formed metal deck, the value of Qn obtained from either Equation 1
or from the overwrites, if specified, is reduced by a reduction factor, RF that
is specified in Composite Beam Design AISC-ASD89 Technical Note 25 Shear
Studs. Note that the reduction factor is different depending on whether the
span of the metal deck ribs is oriented parallel or perpendicular to the span of
the beam.
The reduction factor, RF, only applies to the 0.5Asc f c' E c term in Equation 1.
It does not apply to the AscFu term.
The terms f’c and Ec can be different on the two sides of the beam. The pro-
gram calculates Qn for each side of the beam separately using Equation 1 and
uses the smaller value in the calculations.
Horizontal Shear for Full Composite Connection

Between Maximum Moment and Point of Zero Moment
Positive Bending
The total horizontal shear to be resisted between the point of maximum
positive moment (where the concrete is in compression) and the points of
Shear Connectors Technical Note 39 - 1

Shear Connectors Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
zero moment for full composite connection, ΣQn-100, is given by the smaller of
Equations 3, 4a or 4b as applicable. Table 1 defines the conditions where the
various equations are applicable and it defines what to use for Ac left and Ac right
(both simply called Ac in the table) in Equation 3 for each condition.
Table 1: Table Defining Equations to be used to Calculate Horizontal Shear for

Full Composite Connection
Deck Rib Use Smaller
Span Relative of These Note About Ac in
to Beam Span Beam Section Equations Equation 3
Rolled section
3 as noted
from the pro- Ac in Eqn. 3 is the area of con-
and 4a
Perpendicular gram database crete in the slab above the metal
3 as noted deck
User-defined
and 4b
Rolled section
3 as noted
from the pro- Ac in Eqn. 3 is the area of con-
and 4a
Parallel gram database crete in the slab, including the
3 as noted concrete in the metal deck ribs
User-defined
and 4b
ΣQ n −100 = 0.85f c' left A c left + 0.85f c' right A c right Eqn. 3
ΣQ n −100 = A s Fy + b cp t cp Fycp Eqn. 4a
ΣQ n −100 = b f -top t f - top Fyf - top + ht w Fyw + b f -bot t f -bot Fyf -bot + b cp t cp Fycp Eqn. 4b
Number of Shear Connectors

Between Maximum Moment and Point of Zero Moment
For full composite action, the number of shear connectors between a point of
maximum positive or negative moment and adjacent points of zero moment,
N1, is given by Equation 5.
ΣQ n −100
N1 = Eqn. 5
Qn
Technical Note 39 - 2 Shear Connectors

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Shear Connectors
In Equation 5, ΣQn-100 is as determined in the previous section entitled "Hori-

zontal Shear for Full Composite Connection" and Qn is determined as de-
scribed in the previous section entitled "Shear Stud Connectors."
For partial composite connection, the number of shear connectors between a

point of maximum positive (not negative) moment and adjacent points of
zero moment, N1, is given by Equation 6.
ΣQ n −PCC
N1 = Eqn. 6
Qn
In Equation 6, ΣQn-PCC is equal to the percent composite connection times ΣQn-

100. For example, if there is 70% composite connection, ΣQn-PCC = 0.7 ΣQn-100.
Thus, the percent composite connection, PCC, for AISC-LRFD93 design is
given by Equation 7.
ΣQ n − PCC
PCC = Eqn. 7
ΣQ n −100
Between Point Load and Point of Zero Moment

The program uses Equation 8 to check that the number of shear connectors
provided between a point load and a point of zero moment is sufficient. Equa-
tion 8 is not specified by AISC but is used by CSI as the LRFD equivalent of
Equation I4-5 in the AISC-ASD89 specification.
 M u − φ M n steel alone 
N 2 = N1   Eqn. 8
 φ M n comp − φ M n steel alone 
 
In Equation 8,
Mn comp = Maximum moment capacity of composite beam, consider-

ing partial composite connection if applicable, kip-in.
Mn steel alone = Moment capacity of steel beam alone, kip-in.
Mu = Moment at point load location, kip-in.
N1 = Number of shear connectors required between the point of

maximum moment and the point of zero moment, or end
of the slab, unitless.
Shear Connectors Technical Note 39 - 3

Shear Connectors Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
N2 = Number of shear connectors required between the point

load considered and the point of zero moment, or end of
the slab, unitless.
φ = Resistance factor used to determine moment capacity of

composite beam, unitless. This is equal to either φbcpe, φbcpp,
φbcne, or φbcnp depending on whether there is positive or
negative bending and whether the stress distribution con-
sidered is elastic or plastic.
Equation 8 is checked at each point load location.
Technical Note 39 - 4 Shear Connectors

Technical Note 40
Beam Shear Capacity
This Technical Note describes how the program calculates the allowable shear
stress for AISC-LRFD93 composite beam design.
Shear Capacity
Refer to Figure 1 for a flowchart showing how the program considers beam
vertical shear. AISC-LRFD93 Equations F2-1 through F2-3 are reproduced
here as Equations 1 through 3 respectively.
h 418
For ≤ , Vn = 0.6 Fyw Aw Eqn. 1
tw Fyw
 418 
0.6Fyw A w  
 F 
For
418
<
h
≤
523
, Vn =
 yw  Eqn. 2
Fyw t w Fyw h
tw
523 h 132,000A w
For < ≤ 260 , Vn = 2
Eqn. 3
Fyw tw  h 
 
 tw 
Note that in Equations 1 through 3, Aw, the area of the web, is calculated as
shown in Equation 4 where Ctop and Cbot are the depths of copes, if any, at the
top and bottom of the beam section. The copes are specified in the over-
writes.
Aw = (d - Ctop - Cbot) tw Eqn. 4
Beam Shear Capacity Technical Note 40 - 1

Beam Shear Capacity Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93
h 418 No 418 h 523 No 523 h No Beam section not

Is ≤ ? Is < ≤ ? Is < ≤ 260 ?
t
w Fyw Fyw t
w Fyw Fyw tw
designed.
Yes Yes Yes
Determine Vn from Determine Vn from Determine Vn from

LRFD Section F2.2 LRFD Section F2.2 LRFD Section F2.2
equation F2-1; see equation F2-2; see equation F2-3;, see
Equation 1. Equation 2. Equation 3.
Figure 1: Flow Chart for Calculating Beam Vertical Shear Capacity
Checking the Beam Shear

The program checks the beam shear at the ends of the beam using Equation
5.
Vu
≤ 1 .0 Eqn. 5
φ v Vn
where,
Vu = The required shear strength, that is, the applied factored

shear, kips.
Vn = Shear capacity, kips. This term is calculated from Equation 1,

2 or 3, as appropriate, and as indicated in Figure 1.
φv = Resistance factor for shear, unitless.
Limitations of Beam Shear Check

Following are some limitations of the program's beam shear check for com-
posite beams.
No check is made for shear on the net section considering the bolt holes.
No check is made for shear rupture on a beam with the top flange coped as
described in AISC-LRFD93 specification Chapter J, section J4.
Technical Note 40 - 2 Beam Shear Capacity

Technical Note 41
Input Data
This Technical Note describes the composite beam design input data for AISC-
LRFD93. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you click
the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam Design command. A
printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully
review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which
program design is based. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 5 Input
Data for further information about using the print Composite Beam Design
Tables Form, as well as other non-code-specific input data for composite
beam design.

The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. The
tables typically correspond to the tabs used in the Composite Beam Over-
writes form. The column headings for input data and a description of what is
included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical
Note.
Recall that the composite beam overwrites apply to all beams to which they
have been specifically assigned. To access the composite beam overwrites,
select one or more beams and then click the Design menu > Composite
Beam Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Information about
composite beam overwrites is available in Composite Beam Design AISC-
LRFD93 Technical Note 31 Overwrites.
Input Data Technical Note 41 - 1

Input Data Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93

Beam Location Information
This information does not correspond to one of the tabs in the composite beam over-
writes. This data is provided to help identify the beam to which printed overwrites apply.
Global X coordinate of the center of the beam to which the
X
overwrites apply.
Global Y coordinate of the center of the beam to which the
Y
overwrites apply.
Length Length of the beam to which the overwrites apply.
Beam Properties
Composite Type Type of beam design. The choices are Composite, NC w/ studs
and NC w/o studs. NC w/ studs is short for noncomposite with
minimum shear studs. NC w/o studs is short for noncomposite
without shear studs. Note that this option allows you to design a
noncomposite floor beam in the Composite Beam Design post-
processor.
Shoring Provided This item is Yes if the composite beam is shored. Otherwise, it
is No. Note that this item supersedes the Shored Floor item in
b-eff Left If the beff left width is program calculated, this item reads "Prog
Calc." Otherwise, this item is the user-defined width for beff left.
slab.
b-eff Right If the beff right width is program calculated, this item reads "Prog
Calc." Otherwise, this item is the user-defined width for beff right.
slab.
Beam Fy If the beam yield stress is based on the material property speci-
fied for the beam, this item reads "Prog Calc." Otherwise, this
item is the user-defined yield stress of the beam.
Beam Fu If the beam minimum tensile strength is based on the material
property specified for the beam, this item reads "Prog Calc."
Otherwise, this item is the user-defined minimum tensile
strength of the beam.
Technical Note 41 - 2 Input Data

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Input Data

Cover Plate
This information is included on the Beam tab of the overwrites.
Plate Width Width of the cover plate.
Plate Thick Thickness of the cover plate.
Plate Fy Yield stress of the cover plate.
Consider Cover Plate If this item is "Yes," the specified cover plate is considered in
the design of the beam. Otherwise, the cover plate is not con-
sidered in the beam design.
Beam Unbraced Length
Beam unbraced length data is provided for both the construction condition and the final
condition. The headings for these two types of beam unbraced lengths are “Beam Un-
braced Length (Construction Loading)” and “Beam Unbraced Length (Final Loading).”
The types of data provided in each of these tables is identical and is documented once
here.
Bracing State This item can be "Prog Calc," "User Bracing," or "Length
Given." Prog Calc means that the program determines the
braced points of the beam. User Bracing means that you have
specified the actual bracing for the beam. The user-defined
bracing may be point or uniform bracing along the top and bot-
tom flange of the beam. Length Given means that you have
specified a single maximum unbraced length for the beam.
Unbraced L22 If the Bracing State item is "Length Given," this item is the user-
specified maximum unbraced length of the beam. Otherwise,
this item is specified as N/A.
L22 Absolute If the Bracing State item is "Length Given," this item indicates
whether the user-specified maximum unbraced length of the
beam (the Unbraced L22 item) is an absolute (actual) length or
a relative length. A relative length is the maximum unbraced
length divided by the length of the beam. If the Bracing State
item is not Length Given, this item is specified as N/A.
Cb Factor If the Cb factor is calculated by the program, this item reads
"Prog Calc." Otherwise, the user-defined Cb factor that is used
in determining the allowable bending stress is displayed. (Note
that when the Cb factor is program calculated, it may be differ-
ent for each design load combination, and for a given design
load combination, it may be different for each station consid-
ered along the length of the beam.)


Point Braces
The heading of the point braces data table specifies whether the point braces are pro-
gram calculated or user-defined, and whether the distances used to locate the point
braces (Location item) are absolute (actual) distances or relative distances. A relative
distance is the distance divided by the length of the beam.
brace. As described in the preceding description, it may be an
Uniform Braces
The heading of the uniform braces data table specifies whether the point braces are pro-
gram calculated or user-defined, and whether the distances used to define the extent of
the uniform braces (Start and End items) are absolute (actual) distances or relative dis-
tances. A relative distance is the distance divided by the length of the beam.
Note:
Details about the location and type of program calculated point and uniform
braces is only reported after you have run the design. Before you run the de-
sign, this information is not available.
point of the uniform brace. As described in a previous descrip-
tion, it may be an absolute or a relative distance.
point of the uniform brace. This distance is always larger than
the Start item. As described previously, it may be an absolute
or a relative distance.


Deck Properties
Beam Side This item is either Left or Right. It indicates to which side of the
beam the deck label and deck direction specified in the same
row apply.
Deck Label This item is either “Prog Calc,” if the deck label is determined
by the program, or it is the label (name) of a defined deck sec-
tion, if this is a user-specified overwrite, or it is "None" if no
composite deck has been specified on the side of the beam.
Deck Direction This item is “Prog Calc,” “Parallel,” or “Perpendclr.” Prog Calc
means that the direction of the deck span (parallel or perpen-
dicular to the beam span) is program determined. Parallel
means that the span of the metal deck is parallel to the beam
span. Perpendclr means that the span of the metal deck is per-
pendicular to the beam span.
Min Long Spacing Minimum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the beam.
Max Long Spacing Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear studs along the beam.
Min Tran Spacing Minimum transverse spacing of shear studs across the beam
flange.
Max Conn in a Row Maximum number of shear studs in a single row across the
beam flange.
Stud Qn This item is “Prog Calc” if the allowable horizontal load for a
single shear stud is determined by the program, or it is a user-
defined allowable horizontal load for a single shear stud.
User-Defined Shear Stud Pattern
Uniform Spacing The uniform spacing of single shear studs along the length of
the beam.
User-Defined Uniform Stud Sections
The heading of the uniform stud sections data table specifies whether the distances used
to define the extent of the stud sections (Start, End and Length items) are absolute (ac-
tual) distances or relative distances. A relative distance is the distance divided by the
length of the beam.
Note:
User-defined shear stud patterns are described in Composite Beam Design


Length This is the length of the uniform stud section. As described pre-
viously, it may be an absolute or a relative distance.
Number The number of uniformly spaced shear studs in the uniform
stud section.
Deflection, Camber and Vibration
Deflection Absolute If the live load and total load deflection limits are specified as
absolute (actual) distances, this item is Yes. If they are speci-
fied as a divisor of beam length (relative), this item is No.
Live Load Limit The live load deflection limit for the beam.
Total Load Limit The total load deflection limit for the beam.
Calculate Camber If this item is Yes, the program calculates the camber for the
beam. If it is No, the program does not calculate a camber, but
if desired, the user can specify the camber.
Specified Camber User-specified camber when the program does not calculate
the beam camber.
Neff Beams This item is “Prog Calc” if the number of effective beams for
vibration calculations is determined by the program, or it is a
user-defined number of effective beams.
Other Restrictions
Limit Beam Depth This item is Yes if the beam depth limitations (Minimum Depth
and Maximum Depth items) are considered by the program for
beams with auto select section lists. This item is No if the beam
depth limitations are not considered.
Minimum Depth Minimum actual (not nominal) beam depth considered in the
Maximum Depth Maximum actual (not nominal) beam depth considered in the


gram for the beam.
program for the beam.
RLLF This represents the reducible live load factor. A reducible live
load is multiplied by this factor to obtain the reduced live load.
This item is “Prog Calc” if the reducible live load factor is de-
termined by the program, or it is a user-defined reducible live
load factor.
EQF The EQ Factor is a multiplier applied to earthquake loads. This
item corresponds to the EQ Factor item in the composite beam
design overwrites. More information about the EQ Factor is
available from Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Techni-
cal Note 42 Overwrites.

Technical Note 42
Output Details
This Technical Note describes the composite beam output for AISC-LRFD93
that can be printed to a printer or to a text file in either short form or long
form. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 6 Output Data for informa-
tion about using the Print Composite Beam Design Tables Form, as well as the
Summary of Composite Beam Output.
The program provides the output data in a series of tables. The column
headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns
of the tables are provided in Tables 1 and 2 of this Technical Note.
Short Form Output Details

posite Beam Design command and select Short Form in the Output Details
area of the resulting form. Similar output also appears on screen if you click
the Details button in the Show Details area of the Interactive Composite
Beam Design and Review form. See Composite Beam Design Technical Note 3
Interactive Composite Beam Design for more details on the interactive design.
Table 1 Output Details - Short Form

Basic Beam Information
A typical label beam would appear as "B23." Do not confuse
this with the Section Label, which would be identified as
"W18X35."
Group Name of the design group (if any) to which the beam has been
assigned.
Beam Beam section label (name).
Output Details Technical Note 42 - 1

Output Details Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93

Fy Beam yield stress, Fy.
Fu Beam minimum tensile strength, Fu.

of the beam.
Seg. Length Length of each composite beam segment separated by com-

mas. The lengths are listed starting with the composite beam
of the beam.
Stud Ratio This item has a slightly different meaning, depending on

whether the shear studs are user-defined or calculated by the
program.
When the number of shear studs is calculated by the program,

a stud ratio is reported for each composite beam segment. It is
equal to the number of shear studs required in the segment
divided by the maximum number of studs that fit in the seg-
ment.
When the shear studs are user-defined, the total number of

studs is reported instead of the stud ratio.
Story Story level associated with the beam.
Length Length of the beam.
Loc X Global X coordinate of the center of the beam.
Loc Y Global Y coordinate of the center of the beam.
duced live load.
Shored This item is Yes if the beam is shored and No if it is unshored.
Technical Note 42 - 2 Output Details

Composite Beam Design AISC-LRFD93 Output Details

Camber The camber for the beam. This item may be calculated by the
program or it may be user-specified.
Comparative Price of the beam using the input price parameters for steel,
shear studs and camber. This price is intended for comparison
of alternative designs only. It is not intended to be used for cost
estimating purposes.
Stud Diam Diameter of shear studs.
EQ Factor A multiplier applied to earthquake loads. This item corresponds

to the EQ Factor item in the composite beam design overwrites.
Overwrites If this item is Yes, one or more items have been overwritten for
this beam. If it is No, nothing has been overwritten. The values
for all overwrite items are included in the long form output.
Thus, if this item is "Yes," you may want to print the long form
output.
b-cp Width of the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by the

user, N/A is reported for this item.
t-cp Thickness of the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by

Fy-cp Yield stress for the cover plate. If no cover plate is specified by
Consider-cp This item is Yes if the specified cover plate is considered in the
design. Otherwise, it is No.
Deck Left and Deck The deck section labels (names) on the left and right sides of
Right the beam.
Dir. Left and Dir. Right The deck directions on the left and right sides of the beam.
Perpendclr means that the deck span is perpendicular to the
beam span. Parallel means that the deck span is parallel to the
beam span.
beff Left and beff Right The slab effective widths on the left and right sides of the beam.


Ctop Left and Ctop The program calculated cope of the beam top flange at the left
Right and right ends of the beam. Do not confuse the left and right
is the J-end.
Cbot Left and Cbot The program calculated cope of the beam bottom flange at the
Right left and right ends of the beam. Do not confuse the left and right
is the J-end.
Itrans Transformed section moment of inertia for full (100%) compos-

ite connection for positive bending, Itr.
Ibare Moment of inertia of the steel beam, including cover plate, if it

exists.
Is Moment of inertia of the steel beam alone, not including cover

plate, even if it exists.
Ieff Effective moment of inertia for partial composite connection.
PCC Percent composite connection.
ytrans Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
tom of cover plate, even if it exists) to the elastic neutral axis
(ENA) of the beam, with full (100%) composite connection, y .
ybare Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
plus cover plate alone (if it exists).
yeff Distance from the bottom of the beam bottom flange (not bot-
with partial composite connection.
q Allowable horizontal shear load for a single shear stud.


Moment Design
This table of output data reports the controlling moments for both construction loads and
final loads.
Pmax The largest axial load in the beam for any design load combi-
nation.
Important note: This value is not used in the Composite Beam
Design postprocessor design. It is reported to give you a sense
of how much axial load, if any, is in the beam. If there is a sig-
nificant amount of axial load in the beam, you may want to de-
sign it noncompositely using the Steel Frame Design postpro-
cessor. The Steel Frame Design postprocessor does consider
axial load.
Pmax Combo The design load combination associated with Pmax.
PCC PNA Location of plastic neutral axis (PNA) for partial composite con-
nection (PCC).
PCC phi Mn Factored nominal flexural strength with partial composite con-
nection.
Full PNA Location of plastic neutral axis (PNA) for full composite connec-
tion.
Full phi Mn Factored nominal flexural strength with full composite connec-
tion.
Type This item is either Constr Pos, Constr Neg, Final Pos or Final
Neg. Const Pos means it is a positive moment for construction
loading. Const Neg means it is a negative moment for con-
struction loading. Final Pos means it is a positive moment for
final loading. Final Neg means it is a negative moment for final
loading.
Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling moment for
the moment type considered in the table row.
Mu The controlling factored design moment for the moment type

considered in the table row.


phi Mn Maximum factored flexural strength associated with this load
combination.
Ratio This is Mu divided by φMn.

Shear Design
This table of output data reports the controlling shears for both construction loads and
final loads.
Type This item is either Constr Left, Constr Right, Final Left or Final
Right. Constr Left means it is a construction loading shear at
the left end of the beam. Constr Right means it is a construction
loading shear at the right end of the beam.
Final Left means it is a final loading shear at the left end of the
beam. Final Rght means it is a final loading shear at the right
end of the beam.
Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling shear for
the shear type considered in the table row.
Block This item is either OK or NG. It indicates whether the program

check for block shear (shear rupture) passed or failed. OK
means that the beam passes the Check, and NG (no good)
means it did not. If the item indicates NG, you should check the
block shear by hand for the beam.
Vu The controlling factored shear for the shear type considered in

the table row.
phi VN The maximum factored shear strength associated with the con-
trolling moment.
Ratio This is the bending stress, fv, divided by the allowable bending
stress, Fv.


Deflection Design
This table of output data reports the controlling deflections for both live load and total
load.
Type This item is either Live Load or Total Load.
Consider This item is always Yes, indicating that deflection is one of the
criteria checked when determining if a beam section is consid-
ered acceptable.
Combo Design load combination that causes the controlling deflection

for the deflection type considered in the table row.
Deflection The controlling deflection for the deflection type considered in

the table row. The computed camber is subtracted from the to-
tal load deflection before the deflection is reported.
Note:
Deflection is described in Composite Beam Design Technical Note 11 Beam
Deflection and Camber.
Limit The deflection limit for the deflection type considered in the ta-
ble row.
Ratio This is the controlling deflection divided by the deflection limit.

Vibration Design
Neff The effective number of beams used in the vibration evalua-

tions.
Type Frequency or Murray Damping.
Consider Indicates whether vibration was considered in the design.
Actual Calculate vibration frequency or percent damping of the beam.
Target Minimum acceptable frequency or damping required.


Ratio Target divided by actual.
Ok Indicates whether the member is acceptable for vibration re-

quirements.
Long Form Output Details

posite Beam Design command to open the Print Composite Beam Design
Tables form and select Long Form under Output Details. The long form output
details report provides all of the data described in Table 1 for the Short Form
Output as well as the data described in Table 2 Output Details - Long Form.
Table 2 Output Details - Long Form

Beam Property Over- Indicates user-specified overwrite values or program calculated
writes values.
Composite Type Either composite or noncomposite (NC) with studs, or noncom-

posite without studs.
Shoring Provided Yes or No.
beff Left Program calculated or user-defined effective width of concrete

slab on left side of beam.
beff Right Program calculated or user-defined effective width of concrete

slab on right side of beam.
Fy Yield stress of beam.
Fu Minimum tensile strength of the beam.


Beam Unbraced Length Overwrites (Construction Loading):
Bracing State User defined or program calculated.
Unbraced L22 Maximum unbraced length for buckling about the 2-2 axis of the
beam. This item is filled with "N/A" unless the unbraced length
for buckling about the local 2-2 axis is user defined and is a
single maximum unbraced length for the entire beam.
Absolute L22 A "Yes" for this item indicates that the unbraced lengths are
specified as absolute distances form the left end of the beam. A
"No" indicates that they are specified as relative distances from
the left end of the beam, with 0 indicating the left end of the
beam and 1 indicating the right end of the beam.
Cb Factor Unitless factor used in determining allowable bending stress.

Program calculated if zero is specified.
Program Calculated Point Braces for Construction Loading:
Program Calculated Uniform Braces for Construction Loading:
Start Distance from the left end of the beam to the starting point of
the uniform brace that braces the beam for buckling about the
2-2 axis.
End Distance from the left end of the beam to the ending point of the
uniform brace that braces the beam for buckling about the 2-2
axis.


Beam Unbraced Length Overwrites (Final Loading):
Bracing State User defined or program calculated.
Unbraced L22 Maximum unbraced length for buckling about the 2-2 axis of the
beam. This item is filled with "N/A" unless the unbraced length
for buckling about the local 2-2 axis is user-defined and is a
single maximum unbraced length for the entire beam.
Absolute L22 A "Yes" for this item indicates that the unbraced lengths are
specified as absolute distances form the left end of the beam. A
"No" indicates that they are specified as relative distances from
the left end of the beam, with 0 indicating the left end of the
beam and 1 indicating the right end of the beam.
Cb Factor Unitless factor used in determining allowable bending stress.

Program calculated if zero is specified.
Program Calculated Point Braces for Final Loading:
Program Calculated Uniform Braces for Final Loading:
Start Distance from the left end of the beam to the starting point of
the uniform brace that braces the beam for buckling about the
2-2 axis.


End Distance from the left end of the beam to the ending point of the
uniform brace that braces the beam for buckling about the 2-2
axis.

Deck Property Overwrites:
Beam Side Left and right.
Deck Label User defined or program calculated.
Deck Direction User defined or program calculated.
Shear Stud Property Overwrites:
Min. Long Spacing Minimum allowed longitudinal spacing of the shear stud con-
nectors.
Max. Long Spacing Maximum allowed longitudinal spacing of the shear stud con-
nectors.
Min. Tran Spacing Minimum allowed transverse spacing of shear stud connectors.
Max. Conn. in a Row Maximum allowed number of shear stud connectors in a single
row across the beam flange.
Qn Horizontal shear capacity of a single stud.
Deflection, Camber and Vibration Overwrites:
Deflection Absolute A "Yes" for this item indicates that the deflection limits are
specified as absolute distances. A "No" indicates that they are
specified as the length of the beam, L, divided by some num-
ber, e.g., L/360


Live Load Limit Limiting live load deflection used when deflection limitations are
considered in selecting the optimum beam.
Total Load Limit Limiting total load deflection used when deflection limitations
are considered in selecting the optimum beam.
Calculated Camber Yes or No.
Specified Camber Specified value or N/A if not specified.
Neff Beam Effective number of beams used in the vibration calculations.
Other Restriction Overwrites:
Limit Beam Depth Yes if user inputs depth limit.
Minimum Depth Minimum shown if specified. Zero is not specified.
Maximum Depth Maximum shown, if specified; 44 inches is not specified.

program

gram
duced live load.
EQF A multiplier applied to earthquake loads.

ETABS Composite Floor Frame Design Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETABS Composite Floor Frame Design Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

Composite Floor Frame Design Manual

Computers and Structures, Inc. Version 8

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers and Structures, Inc.

Phone: (510) 845-2177

 Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-2002.

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

THIS PROGRAM IS A VERY PRACTICAL TOOL FOR THE DESIGN/CHECK OF

THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

General Composite Beam Design Information

2 Composite Beam Design Process

3 Interactive Composite Beam Design

4 Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model

7 Composite Beam Properties

8 Effective Width of Concrete Slab

Effect of Openings on Effective Slab

9 Beam Unbraced Length

10 Design Load Combinations

11 Beam Deflection and Camber

13 Distribution of Shear Studs on a Composite

Physical End of the Beam Top Flange 13-2

14 The Number of Shear Studs that Fit in a

15 User-Defined Shear Stud Patterns

Composite Beam Design Specific to AISC-ASD89

Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios

20 Transformed Section Moment of Inertia

21 Elastic Stresses with Partial Composite

22 Allowable Bending Stresses

Allowable Bending Stress for Steel Beam

23 Bending Stress Checks

24 Beam Shear Checks

26 Calculation of the Number of Shear Studs

Composite Beam Design Specific to AISC-LRFD93

Deck Tab 31-9

32 Design Load Combinations

33 Compact and Noncompact Requirements

34 Composite Plastic Moment Capacity for

PNA within the Beam Bottom Fillet 34-11

35 Composite Section Elastic Moment

36 Moment Capacity for Steel Section Alone

AISC-LFRD93 Equation A-F1-3 for

37 Partial Composite Connection with a Plas-

38 Bending and Deflection Checks

40 Beam Shear Capacity

Beams Designed as Composite Beams

Design Codes Technical Note 1 - 1

Material Property Requirement for Composite Beams

Other Requirements for Composite Beams

Technical Note 1 - 2 Beams Designed as Composite Beams

Frame Elements Designed by Default as Composite Beams

Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Composite Beam

 Composite beam design

 Steel frame design

Beams Designed as Composite Beams Technical Note 1 - 3

meet the requirements described in the previous subsection entitled "Frame

Technical Note 1 - 4 Beams Designed as Composite Beams

How the Program Optimizes Design Groups

How the Program Optimizes Design Groups Technical Note 1 - 5

Regardless of whether the optimization is based on weight or cost, if all sec-

Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections

Technical Note 1 - 6 Using Price to Select Optimum Beam Sections

Important Note about Optimizing Beams by Weight and Price

When a beam is optimized by weight, the program internally optimizes the

Composite beam design

Steel frame design

Construction load strength design load combinations

Final condition strength design load combinations

Final condition deflection design load combinations

Using the Define menu > Load Combinations command to change a

Steel yield stress, Fy

Location: This is either Max Moment or Point Load. If it is Max Moment,

Beam section (e.g., W18X35)

Beam yield stress, Fy

Shear stud layout

Beam end reactions

Construction load bending and shear ratios

Final load bending and shear ratios